2n.d Edibbn
6v
International
Marine Publishing ~.11111,1,‘11. .\ln,u,,04sIi
Company
FOREWORD “’ Vlll PREFACE ix PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xi 1 GENERAL 1 2 PLANS 10 3 TOOLS 15 4 WOOD 19 5 FIBERGLASS AND OTHER HULL MATERIALS 6 FASTENINGS 46 7 LINES AND LAYING DOWN 66 8 MOLDS, TEMPLATES, AND THE BACKBONE 9 SETTING IJP 108 10 FRAMING 117 11 PLANKING 130 12 DECK FRAMING 153 13 DECKING 161 14 DECK JOINERWORK 170 15 INTERIOR JOINERWORK 182 16 MISCEELftNEOUS DETAILS 192 17 SAF!?Y STANDARDS 227 RECOMMENDED READING 231 EQUIVALENTS 233 INDEX 236
35
88
l’h ligtlls otrt.11 showt*tl bright lalt* in lht* t~vt*ning 21 rht. ?i!i/zNItlJt) in IIiin1irlglc~l. Nt-w York, anal r2b1il inrlc- 10 (tfj 50 aI :\r~c~t~ortIowri J1c.w in D;hricw. I havv tvijovtd ;L tit’c~linic* intluc-ncxscl tjv I IIt. t;\tk of srnatt 1Jo;iIs 1tit-ir tlc3ign. I tIcA I)uittting. ;~rdl I ticbir us(*. Most rcwarclill,~ of all ;Ispc’( lb. tx.1 tiat~s. arc ItIc* tc*:l(*:s lhdl ccbmc’ ;Itong It.1 I (.I’!? c*ulcJilin,g Itic-
d-t)uilt tJo;tts art* growing mort~ and mor(* t3pt-nsivt-. ‘1‘0 huittt your own rn;iy wt*tl t)c*;I practic,,lt sotulion ;1s wcdt as rc*wirding. Surctv ttw ,jovs of bring krtloar ;ir(b manifoltl, and t host- t3ptGnc-rd ;Il~o;ird ;1 t>bJal you ti;lvt- Luitl
with your 0wI1 hdntls ;iI(’ inimt~dsurabtt-. Hot, Stcwartt. tGng t~sc~t~ptionalt~ welt quatiiicd t)v his tong c~sp~-rit*nix~ in r!ic “world of small stiit~s.” ha5 l)roductd ;I cl~~ai-iy writttbn It’s1 of nici-it and grrat worth. At’tt-r vt*ilrs as an ;~ppr~-ntic~~- ht. work4 in scvc-rat small boat vards btaforc joining rhr highly rcspecrerl office of naval architect Philip 1.. Rho&s. where he spent manv I yrars cn, gagecl in dcsi
tirnrd at the war‘s t%ntI involving vat t.i ax: Bob ac‘\elrtit (! :I lx)sition wirh a Wrs. Coast firm as superint,.-dent of vachr repair anti construction. Somerime ti;Icr tx returnd IO I hc East Coast where a number of vac.hr designs werr proctucxd. ranging from 22 LO 73 ft’et . which
required
his cxperirn&i
supervision
of loft in= anti cnnslruction.
l‘hc vii
viii
f~Ol
warmer-
cllrne tjt~ckontd.
wi! h its slowt~r l)acx- anti t*.isitar iivin,g. ant! 13oh ~onrinut~tl his work In~(jlv!rl,q the d~s~gn~n~ anti supervlslon of Ilumt’rous var.lli\ PIt.st.~lr iv i~r*is !vi!i! a Floritla
tJuiltlcr.
p”W”’ ;a< hIS. Bol) S~vwartl‘s l,uhlishd. marrrials wonth-fully
whtarl* iIt> is classic- work
co11t
drawings.
wit Ir I ht. cIt*sign rlntl prc),qrt*~~ 01 clulstantling
has bcbtbn ht*ar-iily
In this larrsl tdition. and presenr rrgularit~ris
char
t-rncd
Hoh has Inatlt~ antl sIandaids
I-cct*ivc-d from riumt~rous in atltliIion
Surt-Iv I his comprt~ht~nsive
rlicb rimt- iI w;ls first
revisions daring IO nt-w 10 provicling more* of his
anti practical
marvrial.
SO ~~11
prcxn1td.
will provitlr~ ! ht- .rnialt~r- boatt~uilrlt~~ arid Itit+ f)roft3sional with ;I worltl 01 v;Ilutd ant1 valid information. Intlccd. scardv a wt.t-k passe-s wht*n. in wriring It-IIt-1-s I(J hoa huiltlvrs ail ovt’t I IIt* world. I (1~:no1 sii#gt-51 Hofr(hrr/ltl/~rg ,tlfltrrrfr/ as ;d sourt‘(- 01 knowlt~tigc, ,~011l1
.Alhill
?I .s.r\ t\nc
&
XI.E
tl~lr-tl~nvIl
Dalit~l. C:c~nnc~ ricur
II is indt*tvl
ditficull
IO rt-;ili/cs rli;tl
IO yc*;11-sli,1\,tb passtbd since
Inic~rnaiional
f’uhli5hing (:~m1l1;11iv wt.111 i11ro Ou4int*bs nritl ;1c.tluirc*cl ltw cxqyighr .ll,ctrrrtr/ II 11:*clM’~~ll:I Ir.rr, I\' !Il:lI !-I.:;;:. !!E! ! !::*:x h;1LT !XX~I! :ic‘i; 'Ul! ."I I i1ig llii~ tlt~ iidt.: Boris f’hil Rhoclt5.
l.au(-1. L.tv~n;irtli.
OII(- of Ilit~ ,qwaItw
ihca sniall
;i~Iti mosi
iKl
ii1 Tc‘iir
I1r~;1ll1uildt~1’~ slaurit~li
vt*rs,iIili* 1i:i\~l
Marim,
IO flotr//~rrr;tlttr~ c .> rlihi
Ir-itv1tl.
;irIll
art hi1cv 14. li;rvc- l~oili +;tilrvl
ovt*r lilt- hoi izcjtr ~11tl dt(’ 111i55t*ill1v mdnv
irit-ncls. 111ort’ p(*iq)It~ 5im.t. Ilit- I;151 tvlili~,ti o! flflttr so m;inv who h;ivt* rt-;icl ~1111 l~i*i~Il gri11ifVilIg I0 mt 3
I v~*nl IO llavt* I1t7-Ii t,xl105tvI I0 Inilnv ;illii
hrr//tlt’t/,q .IltrtIrrfl/ It~;ll~Ilt~tl1’1~0111 111t’
10 us
il
Il;is
\ 1c)c)k. In .icltiilicm.
fhlfl I I/ lr;lr!il,,~
Mainc~. uws rhtk coml)l~tt~ ford.
Connc~~it~ut
~I‘hroqqhout
rhv Iwo vac~hr dt~sign sc~lioo~~ in IIitb I’ S. ~onlinuc~
Alfl t11111:a _ IVSC material. l)ook.
, rtyrinrb
I his hook.
thtb Wtbstlawn
that
School
[ht. names
providtb
ijs advvrtising
svrvicrhs of valur for the products
In adtlitic1ri 10 thia fI!lolo and illusrration the following
Gtlugcwl of
HIothcrs.
h11za.
Illl~..
drawings
that
I cannot copy fasrw
Inc
Srcmann
, for the ust‘ of photos
for ho~h phoros
close wiihout
ancl skrrc-ht-s;
thanking
her 5 percmr
in Brooklin.
of 1’ac-h1 DrsiRn.
Sram-
lo boatbuildrrs. or sty-vice
offtvxvl.
Illill
c‘arr1
9~11h menRarhc-r.
of tht* s(1urcx.s. Conli~ct
I
lhtb firms
crvdiis
Plastics.
I did years ago for how-to-build
ior me with rhan
sour(‘vs:
Insrirurcb.
ant1 aildrt~~sc~s of firms
iwlit~w lha~ Iht* rthacit-r will Iwrwfit fro1n my rt-srilrch ctirc-crly iIlltl lt*ll tht’r11 wlI;ll you Ilt-tvt. thank
Dvsign
of rhe hook.
vou will find
IOOIS a11t1111att.arials or firms Zion is noI IO IW vonstrucd
while
portions
l’acht
given in the caarlit-r tditioll. I wish 10 \1’il
that
for permission
appeared
IO us{’
in 7‘/1r Rudrf~~r
Dorothv C. Marks fo1 doing some of thth rt*vision meanin,g that she can ‘I;pc a pa,gP 31 times rypIng
1 ran. KotitW M. .Sltward ,jat~lamt ilk. FItAla
l);lriIlg
;I Ilic~i~liIl#
Pillll’rsOIl. ii
was clct~iclt4
num!,ci
ii
Etlilor
ilIlt
I,f‘)c..ii.>
BusiIit-ss
I Shoultl
IIlitl
\lillI
.i,gtt
IL,r-ih l..lu~-I -Ix-t~tldrrli
rty)t7Iivt~ly
M;tIl;tgc~I~
wriits sonll~ ,irIit.lt-s
Of
ill)OUt
IlIt*
fintb (,I(1
hoirl
dntl
ilit-
it/ltttlt*r
(~011slruc
:4\111lL
Irtlr*
Illil#il/iIl~‘,
lion
;tinlcVl
ill
IlIt-
amalt-uI’ ;tIl~l. Ilol!t~l‘uII,‘. of soIlIt’ VillUt’ I0 lhca l~r0ft~SSiC~IIitl. -1‘lris (It7 ision It~sulltvl ii: ;I sturic5 of ‘LOc.oIIst~ciIlivt* Inorlllllv l)itxx3 I Il;tl Mx*rt*So \\~t~ll rtxx~ivt~tl Ill;11 I hty wt’rt- Illiltlt* inlo
i:ook.
il
J‘ht-
rtw~f>litrIl
ol
Ihis,
~r~tl~(~*tl. I Ilt- l)o(bk $viIS l)uhlislIt~tl
IOO.
itl)Ioatl
was c~IiIhusi,isIic.
~llill
~)on
.itlt*l
iII L’I~t~I~t II. l.t*1It51S 01 itl)l)IovitI
iI
w;h
in
wt*r(’ rtG\c~cl
from afar. On<* IhaI lingt.rs in IIIV mint1 was frton a l‘urkislt naval oflicc,r who IIOI onI) bouplIr Iht- I)ook. ~LII also l)uilI a I)oaI lrom III\’ plans. ‘l‘il~ll ii#i3ill Olin Sl~pht~IlS. lolcl nit’ how I tic E‘rcnr.11 tbtiirion was of \alut* lo him on an ins faIntd yacht ticsi,gncr. slx‘t.Iion
writ) in I;:urol)t- ~vht*n Ihtb I)ook illusrrarions
lxYwc*t*n hiiI lllr*
anti
Ill~:11t’lilr~
a l)uiltlt*r.
rtwartl
niubl,
.l‘hirigs
scrvtyl
IO brrak
like Ihis al-t- lit~drIt;-II. hc
UIlfOrtLlllillt~l~.
a language-
harrit*I
htx~au~- in SO sm;tll
a ficltl
stxxmtlilrv.
As Iimt* wt*nI orl. I he numl~t*r of rqutxIs for Ihtb hook showtd I haI a rt*\,i&m wab in IlOW \VI’ Il.lVC~fjo///1lf11’/f1it~,g .Mtrurrrl/. qain tiont- wirh Ilit- t~nIhu~i3sm of Boris
ortlt-I . Sll ilb il
l)I.iIIIt’ movi~r. a II lioirgh llit7~~
hcbt-Ii Iimt*s, wlit-Ii Iht* midIiighI
IlilVt’
IOW. I IIiII I WiIS IIOI SO lIi\l’l)v wirh his l~rodtling inc~lutlt~S
it
IIrIl(’ Ot
nt’w m;tIt~rialS
build tion
The
thr &mrnts
Wt.11 a5 It~c~tiniilIIt5
iIS
Ihis or any orhrr hope
.l‘ht> ‘II’W l)ook has t)(bcIl rcwriI~cn. I 1lilVt’
1)icbt.d
lip
in
inrcrim.
ltltb
from
an unt!ersIanding for many
is \erv and
who orherwisc
11~ has Ihr ability of boatbuilding
book can Itsac-h all Ihc-rt- is IO know about
for is I!) givt- somy guidancr
an urge IhaI usually
of a drram
Assuming
IhaI
br*st I can
a boat
MY of plans
Oltl.
I)UI illltl
I haI Ilao* I)t~t*n accrptcd.
DO noI think building.
lht’
oil was burniIi~y
rewarding. experienced could
lvith woodworking set forth
I Irust
in this book.
Ihal I hi, book.
desi
non enjov rools.
boaI.
IO 1h0:;c with rhr urgt- IO will lead IO rhc realiza-
boaring hnd
plus a good
and
is arm4
the1.e is no reason
Ihc St-a. with pians
and
whv an amateur X:
BOATi3UILDlNGi'WANUAL
Chapte:
1
how IC)use skillfully During the past two decades, mort b and m’)rc people have learned both hand and power tools for household chores and improvements, making furniture,
outbuildings,
people
are good candidates
of making
and
something
nlaterial
to form
building
and see that
sets
that
the like, and
they often
turn
out very creditable
for boatbuilding.
Y~I, many is 1101 all squat-c corners;
th,lt
curved
shapes
discourages
them.
And
when
thev
starts with a lines plan and the attrz’riant are GUIVP+ well, that’s that. These people
the
Such
look into
it usually
dimensions
jobs.
are turned off by the thought bending wood or other flat boat-
table of offunnecessarily
depriving themselves of a very fascinating and satisfying pastime. Constructing the first boat, however small, is an experience not to be soon forgotten.
Watching
form
provides
carefully a piece over
hours
done,
grow
from flat paper
of fun and is super
the finished
of furniture,
is often
and dver for plrasurca
through
courses
Northwest. number learn The
of lucky
people
in various
so there
purpose
of this
elementary
problems
flat material
a stressful pride
boat.
If you are fortuna:.e from
observation.
can take
When
and soon forgotten,
to learn States,
boatbuilding principally
courses
advantage
reason
is to introduce from starting
enough When
day.
to the builder.
the job is And unlike
a boat
is used
are
located
the hull until
down
to building
able
to and
the great
opportunity
to
on bnatbuilding.
construction
to live in a boatbuilding
it comes
so that
of this splendid
for books boat
have been in ttre Northeast
water
don’t purport to teach all the skills of an expert boatbuilder. It is impossible to coker briefly all the information needed deal
into a shapely
the years.
is still ample
involved
after
put in a corner
all too few of such
book
and
of great
of the United
boatbuilders
the craft,
theraI,y
with the desire
parts
Unfortunately. of would-be
drawings
vessel is a source
which
A number take
a hull
area,
by explaining
the
first laps at the kee;. to build
e\prv
tyr::
I of
you can :>Farn a great
the kind
of boat
you want, 1
‘. \;-. $ -s \, :9 !I .-----L ‘/I 3 2 ‘L z 3 ..
g,
r= s 3 z : 2
2 -T c <
-F
--L
J
\i ‘1,
.I/ ’ *!tiI 1. ‘v 1.1 ;/I ;
L; ,/I ,I 2d J5 ii k 2 i’J ti -, i
-
i
= L E .z 2 z ; -g : 3 2 -- 2 z 52 - < z; 2.s -2. z E I .-c 2 ; - .z t- . 2 f\ ,Q N E &tz 2-c uk b >, 2; L4-2
GE.VER.41. FLAT
5COWQE’t
BOTTOMS
DORY OP 5r(1i=F
ALGE
3
VEE.
AFL
i3OiTQt.l
f3Tl-TOMS
L~c.,u~HIN~ j +.-&AE DEEP’ \/EE
ROUND
?
OOMLE
‘cw
hrJE
I&TEL
+IL~oAT
BOTTOMS
i,\ 1) J&J/l ~A1Llt.I~ -ucJl-OLT
DIt.IGUf
ROAT
IcigurtbI-1. .St,t,t/fJ//s ftl ttf/tl/t.//q/Il fB//YlJlt’fl/ /lrl/ I’ rllrd rr~rrlrtttlrtltr~ftrtvi trrlll.\ ner would conform
build
have
you.
When
and
can be mastered
process
working
Bending
wood
forward Figure
light
planks,
l-2 is a lines
ings and
templates relative
that
will net
drawing
merits
on lofting,
designed
round-bottomed
of the
that
there
bend
for a small
for the various
will admit
parts
is not unduly
be a great
during
a discussion
on the boat
cold
construc-
boats, and
The
of framing.
to round-bottomed
of v-bottomed
difficult
deal of fun.
such as the
must
be made
round.bottomed which
hull.
is the making
Lines drawings of full-size
are
hull draw-
parts.
hull
types
will never
boat,
along
to have them
Do not let this scare
of the hull.
in the chapter
everyone
the bending
is not restricted certain
necessary
process.
In fact it can
further
or boiling
possible
the bevel
the bending
material.
detail
to fit the shape
in detail
in the hull:
in during
in more
of bottom
for them
right
a few attempts.
by steaming
discussed The
after
as it is entirely
ends
bent
is twisted
with relatively
will be described
tion alone, limber
frames
to the hull shape
especially
are
argued
far
be a v-bottomed for a sailing
and hull
wide,
but
as handsome
just
about
as a well-
craft.
Figures l-3 and l-4 show the essential differences between the framing of flat, vee, and round-bottomed hulls. Although the lower ends of the frames in the round-
ZliC ,
bottomed
boat
are shown
on the hull shape, the deck
butted
to install
on the other
side.
them
against
the keel, it is sometimes
in one piece,
In contrast,
note
extending the number
from
possible,
depending
the deck on one side to
of pieces
that
make
up a
~;lC.2'l~:R.4 I. :i
-FLAT
Bo-?Tm
ygE 4e--q-y.
Y.2’V’Y __ .Figure
frame
I-3.
‘I‘\,/H~YI~(~ttr.\/r’r~~‘/tott
for a v-bottomed
bodt.
\(v‘ttotr\
SaA-‘-
~Irror~glr
On the other
hand,
1’
trr~tl
frames
/ht
Itottotttd
;dre spaced
ht~tt.\
farther
apart
in a round-bottomed boat, so the frames are fewer in number. Figure l-5 is a section through a rather normal sailboat of the cruising ocean
racing
type and
and-centerboard-type recommended helped
for
on a similat
not become
is :ypical boats,
the
amateur’s
discouraged
and
is a lot of heavy
The
of the trames,
time needed
to build
of a flat sheet without
the rnaterial
board
or with
first
a hull
program.
wrinkling,
unless
of construction
is more
difficult
job than *. and
that
surfaces,
either
he will
due to reverse
on a simpler
hull.
is such &at
it can
If a shape can be formed
it is said to be “developable.”
surfaces
he has
deadwood.
if the hull shape
such as plywood.
keel-
This type of boat is not
boatbuilding
is a tougher
out the backb,
material
The
at
or classic
keel or combination
draft.
of this kind
The framing
the planking
with developable
a computer
attempt
a hull can be reduced
pieces of.flat
deep
of shallow
enough
work getting
with large
ways of designing
very
when on his own.
in many
be covered
the so-called
being
job or has watched
(S) curves there
of either
the latter
than
graphically
are cylindrical,
There
are
on the drawing conical,
or a com-
bination of both, and the designer must be content with the limitations of these curves. Figure l-6 shows the lines for a 52-foot hull that was designed with the aid of a computer.
This
boat
was built
of large
fiberglass
sheets:
one
for each
side.
one for each
6
GENERAL
A.pC 6Orz CgEkiTER63AE~ SAL BOA-l-
ty1
Above:
Figure
through
ty~G-d
1-4. nrc-
Sectiot~s
nnd
round-
hotton~d II ~11s. Right: Figure l-5. -f-hip t1lilfStli~)WCtI'OII O/' (111 ~~u.rr’li~r~~ ticrrnc
ulith
sclilhortt rt’zvrsC
showing curzv.
hisnt
4331’“> .3;7pz &E’ -%+-AI s??L’ --.
c 2 tI 3 $
/l1illJ.j !I12 ~ I p ; 1 /I11 ( iji 11 I 1-t 4-f Ii/ / I tc/I1’-p- I I! ‘! t-/ -11 I + P-11: / / 4 ,--IL I(~ 3‘/ j 1-q i t-t ----I--cIi----
2 z h 2 z s 4 .’ wz = .2 i t 73+ 2” 5 ‘2 =: ,< I 2
4 ‘I ii 4
S-G -2 2
‘I -3 i! ‘I 4 iI !I
$ 2
-3 iI
-
t_ ’11 k1----’ ~
-
i
-I
ft 1
.g 2
TS . ^ 9 e P-4” E $4
;j
-1
*. .‘;: 2
La
j
I ‘I’!: ; ‘i /
;
GENER.4L
R. M. %b’-‘A(LD
Fiqurc
l-6.
7
PPQfLE
:I 52./oat ,Jih~r,~lu.~~ conttnt~rctu~ Ir\hrrrg bout h 1111hm~r’l~ fiwP1i~p1 Oh
.\U)./flCl’.\.
half of the bottom,
one for the transom,
and
a number
of joined
strips
for the wide
chine surface on each stde. On the other hand. the v-bottomed hull in Figure 1-7 cannot be built in this manner, for there are concave sections in both the sides and bottom.
Flat sheets
cannot
Most of the figures principal
hull
lines,
successfully
be bent
in two directions
at the same
in th’- chapter have been labeled with the names of some of the beginner must become familiar with this nomenclature.
and ti
For instance, the top edge of the hull viewed in profile is the sheet-line. line viewed in plan is the deck line. or deck at side. A chine is obviously between
the side and
will be exp‘rained draws
the lines
For hundreds matters
time.
bottom
later.
of a v.bottomed
Since both
hull.
Other
while the same the intersection
lines in the surface
sides of a boat are usually
the same,
of a hull
a designer
only
for one side of a hull. of years,
are, different
now.
wood was the primary As this is written,
material
boats
used for building
of fiberglass-reinforced
hulls,
but
resin
have
been manufactured for 30 years, and now fiberglass boats dominate the standardized boat market, with hulls and other parts produced in volume from expensive molds and tooling. However,
wood
wood in tht: United
is not dead. States
Many
pleasure
and elsewhere.
and
Wood
commercial
is being
used
boats in hulls
are still built in the conven-
of
f~l~..~I:‘R.~~l.9 tional and
manner,
covered
cold-molded
on the outside
and
saturated
that will be discussed farther The techniques of wooden tion
of tooling
in ihe better molded
for fiberglass quality
plastic
and
hulls
and
fiberglass When
demand
the finish achieved
and
boats
finishes such
or a welded
of some
are extensively Wood
parts. to avoid
that
have
as for yachts
employed antiseptic
the cold, become
a logical
fabrics.
for building
hulls
in the construc-
is used for the interior
65 feet and
steel hull
with superstructure
builders.
But here again.
of the larger
in the quarters
joinerwork
apj?cyrance extension
of the
of molded
because
it provides
a feeling
longer,
welded
built wood
aluminum
of the light is usually
of warmth
tha:
alloy is
chosen
for
can never
be
by thr sy Iittlctics.
it is possible a .‘kit” boat.
to gain There
cd by the builder fiberglass
an introduction are
usually with plywood quire but reasonable available are full-size “Hare”
boats
with synthetic
new scheme
cabins. is small,
alloy construction the choice
a relatively
on. boatbuilding
fiberglass “mica”
with resin and reinforced
with resin,
a number
to boatbuilding
by purchasing
of kits for vbottomed
motorboats
and assembling and
sailboats,
planking. Most of these are furnished with beveled parts that recare to set up the frames accurately to form the hull. Also paper patterns and templates for parts, with all the wood provid-
from hulls,
local stock. mostly
Then
there
for powerboats,
are kits that supply fiberglass hulls. are also available. Here is where an
amateur must be careful to be >:tre that guidance is provided or available to locate c’omptrnents such as engincss and fuel and watc’r tanks. ‘l‘hr weights of such items must be positioned so the boat will trim and run properly and safely. Some of thrsc hulls can should not bite off more than he can chew. IIC cluite largca. and the atnateur Making ;I kit boat does not give the same sense of accomplishment as building a boat. from scratch, 1~111the scheme dons make sense for those with limitrd spare time ot for those who want a particular model of boar that is available in kit form. Listings of kit boat manufacturers
are found
CZuirfc. In addition, Fi.thc~rmcln. See thr
a good number Recommended
in boating
magazine
ads and in the RrW Owner;) Buym
of fiberglass hull builders advertise Reading at the end of this book.
in Nationcll
,
Chapter
2
A Set of plans
is needed
for a boarbuilding
project
unless you have decided
to build
a
kit boat. Seldom does one want to build just any boat rather there is an urge to own a certain tvpe, either power or sail, and usually there is an idea about the size suitable for the intended spent
use. There
on the search
Knowledge scanning contacted
for a design
of arrangements
the design
are ample
for study
sections
mechanic
offer
more
scale than
they
firms
also offer
l&at
that
the boat
for various
ample
will meet
lengths
boating
These
magazines,
be
requirements.
can be obtained
and the naval
do-it-yourself
time should
your
of boats
magazines.
by the design,
of the monthly
and
by
small
drawings
architect
can
particularly
magazines
be
Molar
for the home
of power and sailboat plans that have been run as The pians they make avaiiable arc to a iarger.
over the years. those
in the original
spxialize
full-size
Owners
sure
for plans,
Some of the boating
for sale a choice articies
of several
is offered
some
“how-to-buiid” practical
to make feasible
information.
& Snifing, and
sources
of the monthly
of what
for furttlrx
Boutz’ng
are several
in plans
patterns
Ruyws
Reading, lists the names sizes of boats, Another
Guide,
articles.
The same magazines
for the backyard
for hulls. listed elsewhere
buildt=r,
in this book
nnd addresses of many naval architects source is the various class associations
and
under
carry
ads
in some cases Recommended
who have plans for all for small one-design
sailboats. Regardless
of their
source,
try to determine
whether
the plans
that
interest
you are
sufficiently detailed for you to completely understand the vessel’s construction. It cannot be emphasized too strongly that good plans are well worth their price, because , 7‘.. :r cost is but a fraction of the total cost of the boat. The cost of the plans might be considered as insurance that the finished boat wilt be a success. When designers do not draw the profusion of details that the novice builder would like to have, this book should
be very helpful
in filling
in snme
of the missing
information.
19%’
SLOOP
‘TRITON”
SAIL PLAN 5CfiE ?h.:cc DCSlQhED FOR
==A
THE a%
RUDDER ~~_~~~~~~LE.~J.Ee3.n
z VEr.5
Gf\tzA-
.EP.c,T.3o.ee a-.r.-.:--
7..
BE’.’ -PI--
I___
.
/;/4 B “: i
OL.5
/ ,;i
/ /
‘\ \,x
\\ \ I‘I 1 \A ‘\,$ 1,
,.! h”MbER 2’C~Ocl lb=-=-+c%.‘,NO a0 ‘ii?i$, P ,;I( \)i \y,‘:\ I*‘\,; a,.’ 1(: ;,I\ t’i: (’ ti; d /; a :, ‘: ,! , II ;,,: ” IS I’Gn ;j 1* *,.5 ’ l’1 3.. *j’ I;\ \’I!\! i’ ;, . ,//- --~- -~~-~~...; 1,I_ :-vi i 1’ ,‘\ / I.: / a
*
W-Y w. 7 _
ii . (1 ;/ ‘/ ._I J ;;’ .,,’ w >i ,;I 9s, ‘/6” I ;ipc 3, ;,:I; ___, d /.I8: r!
Rudder’s Figures 2-1, 2-2, 2-3. ThtJw p/am uvrt’ drnuw by lhr author as part ofTt.e 1948 ikut~ t$ lhl publicalirm. “llou~ fo Build” writes nrrd appeartd in rhc Fvhruary Lnrgr-scale blwprit~h uvw off&-ed by The Rudderjor ust ) by h o nl t>b uild t’ rs. Th e a rc hot ~on;.cd fornl nlnl;cs I i1i.q n rt4atirvly simplr boat lo build. (The Rudder, rt$rinled ztvih pt~mi.~sion, )
:r,‘,;:7-2:;: n-1
_ ---.-r
*; .‘-1 ., -. ,a;,’ /JY A
-.--
_/+---: .-.~--~~-p---~~~.I:\, rri / ---___
\
L-J’
yrrrrui Dihw.ll,r.q L.“rn”lY.iL __.... I,.a. L0”rn-l P L-L . . ..___I. *. ..I,’ ET -L .-: 0.I’
p’-6-
SLOOP’TRllON~
L~0ldEq +(.L,.~,-. .o. -*ID vus. e-7
Figure
2-2.
_
rJii&m L( SRV.RD
Nz*wz n.v Rq
PLANS
14
I would
tures,
warn
or locations
formance, before
making
of major
regulated tion.
safety,
the
routine Office
of the boat,
tion
such and
is fairly
Inspection
details
building
construction
inspection ried.
can result against
without
If there
Guard. without
simple
is to be started
quickly,
of the hull. The Coast
The
Consult
them,
per-
the designer
you will be better from the drawings.
Guard. the route,
In general, and
it should
general
arrangement
six or more fare-paying or, most likely, fishing. be aware
that,
in the in-
of passenger-carrying
regulations
set of plans, Guard
in unsatisfactory
departing
you should
equipment
if you take the time
the service,
is a complete
a craft,
at least obtaining
of the U. S. Coast
of superstruc-
for Hire
construction
by the U. S. Coast
heights
of seaworthiness.
and if he advises
Passengers
lines,
there is a great number of boats built to carry whether it be for sightseeing, dinner and dancing,
not start The
reduction
that will give you what you want
for Boats Carrying
of
in the hull
Such procedures
changes,
If you are contemplating
should
changes
weights.
any major
plans
Every year passengers, terest
making
at least, or even downright
off using
Plans
you against
are not unduly approval to consult
boats
strict,
is
but you
of the hull construcwith the closest Marine
an application
is made
for the
the number
of passengers
be submitted.
otherwise
if construc-
are necessary
and
drawings
has a book of regulations
to be caralso
that spells out the design
and equipment They no longer
requirements and lists the plans that must be submitted for approval. offer the book for free, but they can tell you the location of a govern-
ment
that
bookstore
stocks
the publication.
lf
yi;b
i
‘“c
3;d+
-r-L”zle--
-se -/ ) f,
i
.I..- -1 .. . L.... .“..1m-m..
Vn-lm-U-* m-.-1 n . . . .. e ..*
*-le. .-. <-3?
L...... ..-- ZLt9’-6’OOP ‘TRITOW ~ONSTRU~ION PLAN a,,..,su-
Figure
2-3.
L
1 --_
j -- /
.-
--‘-iq
’A 7
4LCTAT~
Gii&R pf mol5L4T 6.4 ,TCWbRD
Chamer
The selection of tools needed to build a boat depends being undertaken, It is best to start with a small craft
3
upon the type of project that is to get the feel of the work-- the
difference between bqatbuilding and common carpentry. The construction of a simple plywood-planked boat, either as a kit or one started from scratch, calls for a minimum of tools. mer,
For such
hand
sufficient.
saws, One
a boat, planes,
item
the usual assortment chisels, screwdrivers,
the amateur
may
of home workshop a brace and bits,
not have when
starting
tools such as a hama hand drill, etc., is a boat
is a number
of
clamps, either the “C” or bar type. It seems as though one never has enough of these; they really :,re indispensable. The one power tool that is well worth the money in labor saving,
even for the simplest
of boats,
is a % R electric
drill.
Other hand tools, such as a drawknife, spokeshave. bullnose plane, rabbet plane, and round-bottom plane are out of the ordinary but very handy in the building of some boats. If not on hand, these can be added as the need develops. Essential framing
tools for layout
square,
a level.
rule or measuring
tape,
work,
and useful
dividers,
and
but it should
from
start to finish,
a carpenter’s not
pencil
be a cloth
your own long bolts from rod stock, a few thread-cutting needed. Another handy tool, one that a boatbuilder
tape
are a 24” carpenter’s
compass. that
Also essential
stretches.
is a
For making
dies and a die holder will be cannot do without, is an ad-
justable sliding bevel such as Stanley Tools No. 25 or No. 18. Thi: is used for transferring bevels from drawings to the lumber and picking up bevels in many ways, as you will learn.
Needless
A relatively
to say, both
new kind
up in boatbuilding
is the Stanley
blade.
There
which
holds the blade
a scraper-like
are two blade holder
carpenter’s
of tool that
with
“Surform,”
holders
in a curve, a short,
is often that
vises will be used.
for some of the little jobs that come
featuring
a unique
can be used like regular
two file-like curved
and machinist’s useful
holders, blade.
The
throwaway wood planes,
one of which holders
rasp-like
is round,
for curved
one of and also
blades
are 15
16
7‘001.S
A
ADlUmABLE
0.
L\PPED
.k?Llobk5
C. %AI=‘EFDoT”
Figure
3-l.
particularly
;I tc,rcl bout t~ctilriirrg
tool.5 ltlrlt
good
The
in boat work.
D.
‘c-f CLAMP
E.
ADIU~-AI~LE
CHIP
blades
AUGER
BAL?
(lrv lrol cllzc~crqs/iJiltld
Surform
fiEVEL
ADZE
CLAMP
iI1 ttrc tlomiJ
cut wood,
plastic,
wortzstlo~.
and soft metals
such as lead. It takes a lot of fastenings twist drills. latter
Thehc
kind
hardwood useless.
even
though
or metal
In all but
to make
a boat sound;
come in two kinds,
the smaller
the drills boats
car1 be bored
with ship augers
slow-turning
electric
and
there
drill you will need
steel and high speed. Be sure to get the because drilling a series of holes in expensive,
they are more
heats
so for the electric
carbon
the carbon
will be some
steel
holes
bits will burn
required
and
become
for long bolts.
These
with and without center lead screws. The latare preferred because they make it ter, called “barefoot” augers by boatbuilders. If auger holes are made with power, a heavy duty, easier to keep a hole on course. technique
drill
is a must.
like to use a twist drill
long enough,
you must extend
it up, with the extension motor
available
Some rather
them
smaller
builders than
by welding
than
and
you must
an auger.
If the standard
a rod onto
the drill diameter,
develop
your own
drills
are not
the drill shank and trueing if necessary, to fit in the drill
chuck.
You will learn The screws
must
that a great
many
all be sunk
into
woods or. with softwoods, To reduce
the number
and counterbores
wood screws are used in modern drilled
to prevent
of separate
on the market.
holes to enable
the wood from drilling
operations,
them
splitting there
boat construction.
to be driven
into
hard-
as the screws are driven. are patented
countersinks
Both of these tools first drill a hole for the body of the
TOOLS screw;
the countersink
screw,
while
gadgets
then
both
eliminating
have
an
much
of available
similar
or less the same job.
sheet
to the profile
name
have
for these
diameters they
and
equal
a stop
drills
drills
and
of screws. thus
pilot
They
are
of the
plug.
valuable
These
time-savers:
of working
Unfortunately,
twice
the range
expensive
construction
that
do
they were stamped
out of a steel
one for clearance
of the screw
of the screw at the root of the threads,
of the drill bits,
can
expendable.
the head
be desired. of more
two diameters,
to the diameter screw
and
look as though
on the shank
is wood
lengths
are cheap
These
to take
for a wooden
on fastenings.
tools
of a screw and have
and one about makes
of hole
as might
drilling
hole
of drills and the necessity
in the chapter
sizes is not as extensive
more
some
for depth changing
are shown
the hole
a straight-sided
adjustment
are also some
shank,
up by shaping
drills
baclr-and-forth
on every hole. These There
follows
the counterbore
17
to control
and
they
be burned
These
depth
are sold
when
and
of the hole.
One
in sizes for various
drilling
hardwoods,
bits are also shown
but
in the rhapter
on
fastenings. Old-hand especially nail
boatbuilders when
often grind
twist drills
a hole is to be made
fastening.
The
tapered
point
to a tapered
completely
does not
through
tear
point
similar
the wood
the wood
to a gimlet,
for a rivet or clout
as the drill
goes through.
One of the traditional tools of the boatbuildpr is the adze. I‘his tool is shaped hoe and is still in use in yards that build vessels with heavy timbers. Boatbuilders ally use the lipped of the blade. skilled
adze,
The
workman,
foregoing, chances
heavy
in the hands
the guidance
it will be apparerlt mention
has
are good
that
your home
go ahead
and
start
one of the most useful size. For straight in a small
shop.
and,
edges at the ends
when
pieces
in the hands
of wood.
who
of a
The adze can
of the inexperienced,
of someone
so it is best to
has plenty
lumber
if the planking and
hatch
because
ference
being
ury for small quantities
in bearings
mozt
because
of adze
time
but small labor-saving
now than which
and
for cutting
decks.
and
should
curved
for cutouts
If ex-
By far
be 12 or 14” in will do most jobs A portable
planking
for out
of
depth
such as for pqrtlights
As in the case of the %-inch Stick to a good grade lines and better
thus in life expectancy.
screwdriver. power
ever before.
arbor
the
really
the saw is set to cut out little more
have competitive
screws
and
of them.
tools aren’t
can be a labor-saver.
saw you can find.
and power,
hand
from the
need,
saw but does have some use, particularly
in plywood
is an electric
these
omitted
ever
with many
saw with tilting
also be used
makers
will
equipped
not essential,
for a table
saber
you
common
A saber saw is invaluable
openings
of anything of the
while
It can
even repuLable boats
is already
table
is not too thick
do not buy the cheapest
brand,
One
panels.
tools have been that
is the bandsaw,
rircular
jointer,
saw is a poor substitute
thickness.
of most
anyway,
for boatbuilding
A 4.inch
some hand
workshop
boat
cuts an 8-inch
up plywood
the hull
that made
as you go along. workshop are more
circular
the plank
been
your
cutting
drill,
L
when
but
pensive and can be bought Power tools in the home
than
the grain
his belt.
As we progress.
not,
under
type with curled
across
tool for working
to the limbs
how to use one
under
is a smooth-cutting
is a wonderful
also be dangerous learn
which
adze is used diagonally
like a usu-
electric in a good
lines.
Somewhat
but it is a tremendous
labor-saver
the difof a luxwhen
are to be driven. tools
is the
sander,
and
it helps
in
prevent
boredom,
too.
planking
The
whether
is good
fiberglass.
for wood or fiberglass, Again,
up joinerwork. Another
power
labor-saver
during
plane, This
is all that
familiarity
Sources
and
longer
one such
as the S-inch
a certain
up lead
about
ability
so don’t
a luxury,
of boats
used for smoothing
than
ballast
tools because,
down
sander
of
the best,
skimp.
but which
is an enormous
25 feet long, plane
made
is an electric by Skil. This
keels.
as mentioned
with woodworking
the seams
is about
is used by the pros for smoothing
in sanders,
be considered
is a lightweight
as cutting
the orbital
in the introduction,
tools has been
assumed.
for Tools
.4 few places both
are mentioned
below
for woodworking
of course, Sears, revised annually. Brookstone
Company, Wood Wade
and
that
are
metaiworking.
known
for stocking
One of the largest
a good
selection
of
and best known
is,
but not everyone knows that they put out a fine tool catalog that order: Here are some others know]! to me, listed in alphabetical
Craftsman Garrett
is important
might
will be said
jobs
the belt sander
the construction
been
for such
For finishing,
and
quality
tool that
All you need
tool has even
tools,
disc sander
and for sanding
I27 Vose Farm
Service
Co.,
Road,
Peterborough,
New Hampshire
is
03458.
Co., 2727 South Mary Strcc:, Chicago, Illinois 60608. 302 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10001. (This
Inc.,
ca:alog is so beautifully illustrated it should bc a collertor’s item.) W.1,. Fuller Inc., P.0. Bax 8767, Warwick, R.I. 02888. (They sell the “barefoot” wood auger hits shown in Figure :I- 1 .) Wetzler Clamp Co., Inc.. 43-15 11th Street. Long island City, New York 11101. (A manufacturer of clamps only and will sell direct IO boatbuildcrs.) 313 Montvalc Avenue, Woburn, Massachusetts 01801. Woodcraft Supply Corp., (Another
house with a nicely
ing.) Woodworkrr’s New Mexico
Supply, X71 12.
illustrated
Inc.,
P.O.
catalog Box
that
14117.
lowers one’s resistance 11200
Menaul
NE,
to purchasAlbuquerque,
Chapter
Wood
is ow of the c,asit>st materials
rtlmain:;
a favoritt*
marerials.
of
many
Not ail woods
out of which
proft5sionais.
nrr sui~nblr
the amateur
tIrspirt*
It is beyond
provt’n rlutahit* st rengr h
the scope of this hook 10 morth rhan scrarch
wc~ocl, even when our discussions
iimite(1
I0 rhe trees found
10 the small
numher
onr
the surface
in rhe llnited
01 commonly
a boat.
and ir
tht* grc-at growth in synthctit howcvcr. so as we go along.
for bonthuiiding.
1tit-rt- will I)t%commt’n~s OII IIKW kill& tl~a~ have (ltXir;ll)lt’ qualities sought anal have I he necessary
can build
4
States
accepted
of I he most
on rhts subjrcr
dlone,
boatbuilding
of
so I will limit woods
and
how the lumber is manufactusrri rain woods from boatbuilding dccavq
and
availabltordinary that
shortness
lrom logs. A few reasons for the elimination of cerare brittleness. softness. weakness. susceptibility to of growth. On the orher hand there are rime-tested woods
that have lhe net.essary iurnber~ard. Fortunately
fully untlers:ands
Ihe builder TV”““““.
Sawing
but rhese rypes can seldom be found in an every area where boats are built has a yard
the nec~ls of the hoathuiider.
rile aid of such a supplier ‘l‘herc should
qualities. aimosi
to obtain
ht. no compromise is consideI~ecl.
the high
in the matter
the t-xtra ~0sI and
and the amateur
grade
lumber
of lumber trouble
needed
quatiry.
of good
is advisrd
to seek
for long hull life.
for when the labor
material
of
is of little conse-
of Lumber
Grain
is formed
tation
has much
by the angle
orirntation
in boards
been
and
felled
of the annual
to do with the suitability depends
trimmed.
upon
rings with the face of a hoard of the lumber
how rhe lumber
it is easy for the lumberman
for use in boats.
is GUI from to run
and its orienThe grain’s
logs. After a tree has the log through
a saw 19
A. Figure
PLAIN
e.
SAWN
QUARTER
SA’NM
4- 1.
and cut it into boards
as shown
in A of Figure
4- 1. -!-his is called
plain
sawing,
and all
but one or two of the boards sawn from the log in this manner are called slash grain or tlat grain. A more expensive and more wasteful method of cutting up the log. B in and the rrsultinp; boards are known as rift, verFigure 4- I 1 is ralicd quarter sawing. tical.
or edge-grain
boards.
It can be seen from
Figure
4-2 that a few boards
from the
nlidtilc clt’ it plain-sawn iog have rift grain just like quarter-sawn lumber, but the ma,joritv 01 tllr~ I)l;tin sawn boartls arta not tlf3ir;tblr for I~OilI~~llildil~g, as will h showl~.
Seasoning Wood
for ,tlmost
content
prewnt
,~ny purpose
or more
the weight
sorption
by the ceil walls
wood
has taken
at a11 must
of the log. I‘here and
on as much
4-2.
time
or scbasoned to reduce the content
are two ways that
absorption
into
SAWN
LOG7
thr moisture
may be as much
wood contains
the cell cavities
as the cells will hold,
F’LAlh;
Figure
be tlricd
when thr tree is cut , at which
as half
moisture,
themselves.
When
abthe
the wood is said to be at the fiber
il’OOU
saturation
point.
percent,
In this condition
and no shrinkage
process
ot reducing
hoatbuilding
the moisture
material,
level is wanted,
the moisture
takes placc un:il content
to about
and this is when
wood
shrinks
further
content
of the wood averages
this percentage
15 percent,
the wood shrinks.
if more
is reduced.
moisture
about
Seasoning
an acceptable
After
it seasons
is removed
21
25
is the level for
to whatever
and swells if more
moisture is taken on. Shrinking or swelling is greatest in a direction parallel to the annual rings, thus slash-grain boards cup more than rift-sawn ones and appear as shown in Figure
4-YA dfter
reducing
thickness
seasoning.
than
Shrinkage
width,
of rift-sawn
producing
boards
lumber
with grrater
tlian flat-grain ones (Figure 4 :!H), and t
tends
more
dimensional
rift -bdwn lumber
t.oward stability
is desirable
for
Thrrt* are two methods used for seasoning wood. and the mention of the merits of one versus the other just might start an argument in the local t)oat shop. There are those
who will accept
depending
upon
only
I hr
air-dried
thickrl:*ss
wood
is tht- best for boatbuilding.
done
right
in boatyards.
for material,
lumber,
of the and
On the other
so ;he lumber
is often
a process It is
pieces.
on nutnerous hand.
place-d
that
gt*~lt*rilll~
modern
can take several years, accepted that air-dried
occasionh
1 hate
production
in a kiln to be dried
cannot
seen this being wait too long
in a number
of days.
Drying boat lumber by this nlethod uct of thr kiln wilt have a moisture
mus: be done with care. because the normal prodcontent a:;,low as eight percent, v herc,s time has the moisture content (if boat material shown 111th drying mctl~od. with many accepting 15 percent as ideal. sliould he between 12 and 16 ptarccnt, of the lumber .v,,ight when Moisture c~ontent, incidentally, is expressed as ;: pt-rcentage llldl
I’t’gitl-dlt?iS
Of
cwen dry. Drying surface
illld
in a kiln spcbc-ds up thr t-vaporation of m,)isture, causing fast drying on the slow drving inside, and is said to affect both the strength and elasticity of
the wood. cessively and
Lumber during
for boats
the building
swell unduly.
be used
leave
the selection
boatbuilding. and
checks,
made
properly These decay.
not
of the wood
results.
the moisture The
to the experts
also know
or nondurable
or it will shrink
that
sapwood.
and
it be too dry or it will absorb
types of planking
for determining
for correct people
be too green
nyr must
In the case of some
very serious. There are meters must.
must period.
boat
PX-
moisture
the latter
condition
could
content
of wood.
and
best procedure who understand lumber
check
should
for the amateur the requirements not have large
be they is to of
knots
Kinds of Wood In the northeastern this
country
part of the United
was
the
born,
established
long
other
of the country,
parts
areas
frames
east,
or Alaska
cedar
or Douglas
of wood
makes
little
materials
that
with untried
members
with
might
be yellow
pine
mav
products
Coast.
rot in a short
was from
added
made
to
in certain
for boatbuilding.
As a
but keel, deadwood,
and
white oak in the North-
As tong as it is proven.
involves
time
in
woods lumber
has been
being
woods
in the South,
but a boat
native
lands,
localities.
boatbuilding
the years,
foreign
these
fir on the West
difference,
available
Through
from
be of oak in most
backbone
tike to think
certain
of local
experience
would
many
its worth.
with substitutions
other choice
of using
has proven
of satisfactory
example,
where
as well as material
woods,
as a result
typical
practice
ago. and time
the list of suitable
States,
too much
.rr be brittle
the
work to gamble
or not hold
fasten-
ings. As a guide, approxitnate
1 give here a list of good weights
moisture
per board
woods,
together
foot (one foot square
with principal
properties
by one inch thick)
and
at 12 percent
content.
White
Oak
Weight
al.2 l~Oll~~llS
iItlO~ll
tionally well. Easily steam-bent, should be green. not seasoned. ktbcl, stem,
dradwood,
(‘11‘.
stiff,
I)Uleat)lt~,
(ht’ilt’y).
and
strong,
holds fastenings
excrp.
thus excellent for frames, but for this purpose Also used extensivrlv for all !rackbonr members
~hd
oak grows
white*
iI1
?kw
Enghnd.
and
it
is
the oak such as
dxilJln~tic’
that the most dtrrablc oak ib from trees felled during the winter when the sit11 is not flowing. (Set- Winter Cutting vs. Summer Cutting following the description of Alaska cedar.) oak.
11 should
be noted
‘l‘he red varietv
when
it is at
Douglas Weight
aii possible
and
about
‘) ,.!I
importance.
California.
plywood
to tind
is a much less durable
white
panels.
greater than
supply white
01 red oak than
oak and
white
is to br avoided
oak.
and
Pine
(Longleaf!
Weight
about
useful
for stringers,
when light weight
is not of
~‘oI-
IO house
3.4 pounds clamps,
keels,
and straighl-graincd. for Sitka sfrruce
planking whtn rift sitwtr. Grows it; Oregon, W’ashington. from which veneer is peeled for manufacture into Logs dre IiligC. Douglas fir is often called Oregon pine. Green fir is often found in
Yellow
oak
Strong
for spars as it substitute
catering
for stringers,
(metlium).
t)ounds
lumber vards scasoiling.
white
there and
Fir
c~fitmfrs. scrmctimes utmost
here
is weaker
builders
(heavy).
Strong,
and for planking
deadwood,
etc.
and
May
this should
not be used without
very durable,
and straight-grained.
if weight
is not a factor,
be available
in good
further
Used
also as a substitute long
lengths
for
in some
localities. this.
Has been
Grows
reported
in Southern
as not durable
United
States
in fresh water.
in Atlantic
and
but
Gulf
I cannot
substantiate
states.
-White Pine Weight
about
of which decks
were
2.1 pounds used
in yacht
because
building.
the wide,
but the dubious struction.
White
(tight).
clear
is seldom boards
durability
except
Genuine
in the construceion
for inlerior
seen
available
of many
northern
white
of sailing
ships
nowadays. make
varieties
pine.
years
White
pine
it a tempting
makes
enormous ago and
quantities
often
for laid
is mentioned
material
here
for the amateur,
this wood undesirable
for boat con-
joinerwork.
Cedar
Weight about 1.9 pounds (tight). Atlantic white cedar, which grows near the Atlantic roast from Maine IO northern Florida and westward along the Gulf coast to L,ouisiana. is also known strong.
as juniper.
southern
1,111its uniformity
moisturetight
r;nt)idty.
taycsr is usually wit II or wilhout trunk
swamp
cedar,
and boat cedar.
It is not
for planking. are especially
Soaks up good for
and resistance
bum shrinkage
I;lt)str;lk(* t~lank4
white crdar,
10 rot make it excellenr is tow. ho[h of which qualities
I)oals [11;1[ art* atrt~rnal4y
in and
OUI of the water. Sapwood lhal is. plain-sawn boards
thin. Atmosr always suppliett as “flirches.” I)arti on I ht. r~tgc*s. ‘I Iic*sc*“boat hoards” tat)c*r in width sanx- as the tree
;~ntl I.;II~ IN* art~~al~t,I~:c~clusly usect for Ilull t)Iankinj=.
Port Orford
Cedar
clear. and srraight-grained. Weight ah0ul Z.-l puntis (iigilr ). Moderarely strong, 1 Irartwcxxi VVI-;C~c*sis[ant iti rot I!4 for planking and bright finisht*tt decks. Grows in sout I)(,111Orc*gon ;11i(t nor-rllc~ri
CI,llifornia
anti IS d material
familiar
tht* woo(1 lrtrm wl1ic.h \‘;ISI rlurnlwr~ 4’ vene!ian b!ind s!a!s have ttisrinc~li~~t~ st1ic.v o(t01 ‘t’hih wood wah scarcch in the tare 1!)7Os.
Wcstcrn Wt.ight and
made.
as
Has a
Red Cedar ahout
1 .!I f)ounAs
twgr hs for planking.
rnal~riai
to thcb tavman been
(lighl).
Ilighly
‘1‘lli.s wood.
rvsisldnl howt ver.
10 rol and is soft and
availahltweak.
in good widths thus
not the ht’st
ior (his purpose.
Cypress Modvralcly slrcmg. (rncdiuni’~. M’cighl at)out 2.X founds rot. Llscd for f)ianking wlww wc,ight is not ;I f‘;l<.tor hrcausc cxtt’nl.
making
for a h
heartwood
very rtxistanr
it steaks up water
rime in [ht. ivatt’r.
to
IO a great
Grows in southern
low
swamplands
of the United
who understands
Sitka
States.
If you wani
in a boat.
fmd a supplier
strength
for its weight,
Spruce
Weight
about
2.4 pounds
and availability a narrow
(tight).
in long, clear
strip
from
craft
quality. aircraft
Spruce
(Northern
believe
under
spars
shrinkage,
high
it ideal
for spars.
to Alaska.
Not
have proper
it or not,
there
particularly
care. are
Grows on Pacific
Stilt available
always
Coast in
resistant
plenty
10 rot,
in 1980 in airof amateur-built
construction.
White)
Weight about 2.4 pounds (tight). Used for deck and hull framing Grows
make
California
when
because
wooden
Moderate
lengths
northern
but this is not detrimental
High strength for weight. not very resistant to rot. where weight-saving is the primary consideration.
in New England.
Philippine Weight
“Mahogany”
about
laucl~l and trim
to use cypress
this.
3.0 pounds
tnn~l’lr
attractive
for
mahoganies. relatively
darker
Weight
varies
and
and
trim.
color
considering as “firsts
are exlcnsively When
Somewhat
vary
more
iis qualiiies.
for woods
ior planking
for color
difficult Holds
According
10 finish fastenings
boatbuilders
as and
and is
and grain
io one iarge
and the better
known
used for planking
material
srtrc~ed
considerably.
and seconds”
than well
true and
importer. prefer
it is is the
the more
red variety.
from medium
to heavy.
and planking
than more and
expensive. finish
nyankom,
Honduras,
exterior
the so-catl?d
Lemwerder, Germany, builders African mahoganies are Khava
finish,
Philippine
Honduras material.
Mexican,
and African
mahoganies
and interior
joinerwork
of flile yachts.
mahoganies,
are better
looking,
or Mexican According
mahogany
to
Abeking
is a favored and
Rasmussen
easier firstnf
of some of the finest yachts in the world, suitable iz~orcnsis. Sipo utile, Sapeli aboudikro and Niangon
and if this firm uses these kinds
past Abeking and Rasmussen stated that arc riot suitable, so here again woods.
that
name
and an excellent
for this purpose.
used for planking.
are heavier
10 finish, quality
is the market
Mahoganies
have all been They
sides
inexpens,vt
expensive,
Other
of builders
cabin
is known
Islands
It is decay.resistant
Hardness
besr grade
This
in the Philippine
in this country.
used by the finest
(medium).
they should
be acceptable
to anyone.
In the
that there are other kinds of African mahoganies it is a case of dealing with a reliable supplier of
W’OOD
25
Teak Weight
about
durable. The
3.5
pounds
Has a natural
acceptable
States
that
kind
teak trim
dulls
bottom
tools quickly,
White
as strong
excludes
as people
moisture
and thus
or Thailand
think.
trim.
Teak
decks
to a whitish
finish
that,
in the opinion
Worms
shrinkage. in the United
are noe coated
as a rule;
of many,
has no
are not fond of teak, so this
of a keel as protection Teak
extremely
has minimum
for decks and
the bottom
but
and is so expensive
has a rich appearance.
is often used to sheath
anti-fouling
Not
in Burma
periodically
Varnished
wood
oil that is grown
its use is reserved
they are scrubbed equal.
(heavy).
paint
is rubbed
off.
adding
somewhat
lo the cost of working
in case some of the toxic
also contains
a gritty
substance
that
it.
Ash
Weight
about
durable.
3.4 pounds
Used
desirabtp.
for deck
Suitable
for sailboat
(heavy). beatns
Straight-grained.
as a substitute
for s:tAam-bending
tillers
and
and
an old standby
strong
for its weight.
for oak where
used for small
and
very
reduction
in weight
is
boat
frames;
also a favorite
or
tamarack.
for oars.
Hackmarack Weight
about
3.1
pounds
durable.
Only
the
roots,
(medium), from
also
which
called
natural
larch
crooks
arc
made,
are
Tough used
and
for boat-
huitding. Slems hancl. Ahrking
for small boats and knees are cut from rhc-se crooks. On rhe other and R;~sI~~ss~~~ once told nit’ that larch was tht-ir sc:ctmtt choice
(twtlind
mahogany)
African
Alaska
Cedar
Weight
ahout
2.6 pounds
very
resistant
used
for keels in areas
fkartwood
Summer
the old hands
white
Wood:
.-I Manual of Ships, old belief
Straight-grainrd. shrinkage
sapwood
moderately
usually
narrow.
oak it was noted the most
that
in the opinion
durable
wood comes
of a jolt to come
For Its I/w As .4 Shipbuilding
lumber.
heartwood
Cutting
it was something 1957. still given
strong.
when seasoned. Good for planking and southeastern Alaska to southern Oregon.
it is grown,
in boatbuilding,
therefore
summer-cut
where
yrttow,
about
winter:
than
Minimum
vs. Winter
Cutting
In the remarks
Bureau “An
(medium).
to decay. is bright
fclr planking.
wide currency The
belief
is that
is based
of most. from
trees felled
across the following Material, winier-cut
if not all, of in the
paragraphs
C’olurn~ I, U.S. lumber
on the erroneous
is more
assumption
in Navy
durable that
in
26
L1’001)
‘the sap is down, ’ while
winter, tually,
sap in winter “The
sound
objection
if left exposed
and
by insects
attack
sawing
after
felling,
damage
Strength
‘the sap is up,’ in the living
that
standtng
trees contain
tree.
about
Ac-
as much
and and
to summer-cut
to high summer decay good
to summer-cut
fungi. piling
lumber
is that
temperatures Reasonable
and
logs are more
likely
t;lat may accelerate precautions,
seasoning
particularly
methods,
remove
prompt
the danger
a comparison in order
of strengtlis
of strength,
with
is of interLast, the woods mentioned the weight
per board
foot again
above
are listed
shown. pOU&S
White
ash
3 .-I
Cypress
2.8
White
oak
4.2
Sitka
2.4
3.4
Northern
2 9
Port
‘l‘tbak
3 .!I
Alaska
c-
liackmatack llondur-as mahog;~*ly
3.1
White
cedar
2.6 1.9
2.9
White
pine
2.1
Philippint
:3. 0
Western
Yellow
pint
Ih~~glas
fir
"nlilhOp~~IlV"
it is recommrndcd Iltrrrtlhook
ASS
of
material.”
pound3
under
to
checking
vs. Weight
Because below
conclusively
as in summer.
only
deteriorate
such
in the summer.
tests have demonstratt-d
that those who want IO learn
of the Forcast Products
Recommendc,d
Design
‘l‘he strength
white
Orford
2.4
spruce
2.4
cedar
1.9
red ct*dar
more
U.S.
about
Department
wood acquire
the CVood
of Agriculture.
listed
in this book.
Stresses for Wood of a few c:f the foregoing
t.‘lns.\l’~g Kt~lrrfi)rwtl of Shipping,
Reading
Laboratory,
spruce
woods
are listed
in the Huks /or LSuilding and
I’icls~tr~ ~‘P.uv/.\, a new ( 1978) publication
the American
counterpart
of L!oyd’s
Register
of the American of Shipping.
Bureau
ABS specifies
that the wood be of best quality, well seasoned, clear, free of defects adversely affecting its strength. and with grain suitable for the purpose intended, and lists allowable tlt-.~grr .\[rc\.st~J in pounds
per square
inch
as follows: Est ronl(J
SptTitJs
Comprt~ssion
FiSer in
Parallel
Rrn ding
to Grain
Ash, whit< Cedar, Alaska
1866 1466
1466 1066
Fir ~ Douglas
2000
1466
-
lI’OO1) Extwvrv
I.‘cll,lf,rr~.ssiorl
Fiht,r
111
Ihrtlllt~l
&~I! tir t1.g
If)
Gruin
Mahogany’
2330
1333
Oak,
white
1866
1333
Pine,
longleaf
2000
1466
Spruce,
yellow
Sitka
Teak * 35 punf1.t
per
~01’~
/ool
mini~num
27
1466
1066
l!JOO
1200
uvrght
Plvwood Panels
composed
items
that
awaited
of layers of wood veneers
werr
to be protected
the ctcvelopment
off a boom
of plvwood
by amateurs almost
on
and
in the marinr
produc:ion
fibtsrglass
glued
use of completely
basis.
Plywood because
but
than
boartls
have
boat
weight
and sailb;,;?ts lot of time. Although
hulls.
as decks
and
plvwood tion.
panel5
unless
fit on a surface mentioned
has compound it has been
ings.
Only
expr.rieric.t% can
If you should
happen
for
for limited-
bulkheads
t(r tBa(.l1 other.
instead
of a number
it is not theoretically
found
curvature.
and
plywood
in-
panel5
that
of small
pieces can save a
to plank
a hull
with
shaped the hull for such construcbe bent in two direc:ions at once to
However
the bottom
help vou with
in both powerboats
possible
in reft~renct-
pl;rnking
wilh thca use of stratt$cally
I:) the exceptions
of certain
arc-bottomed
(~l,tmp5 and fastrn-
IOt’i1lt’tl
this.
to have a set of plans
that it should be planked with plywood. wise, check with him first to see whether major
supc~rstructure5
can be of importance*
t ht. designtar llas speciallv 2, plywood CdnnOt
hulls can br niatlt~ of plywood
gone
is still a place
used for structural
in Chapter
that
above.
that
with panels
thrrc* art’ exceptions.
As nit-ntioned
There
dntl have advantages over regular lumber, rompletelv of wood. Due to t hc* st iftness of plywood
of boats made a matter can br savc~i and working
manufacturers
thickness
even for solne parts panels,
touched
but mostlv
and it is extensively
of equal
purposes
This
stock
tcsrior joinrrwork in hulls of all construc.tion types. Being made of thirl layers of wood srrurcly bonded are stiffer
use for marine adhesives.
is sti!l ttsed for this purpose
c~f fibrrglass
fit-ld for suc.h parts
wet-e used for man): years for their
waterproof
the
line building
boats,
together
the weather,
hull building.
a one-off
tc)tally to production
plywootl
from
for the boat you want
and get the notion
c’ven though the designer has specified otherit is feasible. This procedure may save you a
heartbreak.
Plywood each other, alwavs plywood,
is made by laying up thin layers of wood with tile grain at right angles to and the number of layers is always cldri so that the
parallel.
The
for instanct-.
number might
of plies have
and
two thin
their
thickness
are
important.
faces ant I a relatively
thicker
Cheap inner
“k” ply.
“8
M’OOD
whereas can
a better
readily
relatively
grade
be seen weak
when
against
the grain ciently
a knife
for a smooth cracks
worst whe;l
ing,
using
called paini
that
;I f,lywood
Fir f,lywootl
kind
at its desired
is exposed
matfe
is acceptable
work that
f)e of nlarine
grade.
This
paint
or with one of the durable
guarantees
fjroof adhesive, that a minitnum number voids in thrs inner f,lir3 are minitnal.
Plywood
Grading
Previous
ctlitions
tnanufa(.turt~r.
of this
book
I1.S. Plvwood
for an updatcb on what is availaf)lc complete
gr-ading
the times.
ilkformation
becausx
there
data
plastic
than
wds available
suffi-
develops is at its is used
manufac-
with either
laminates
is to be covered or for interior
one
such as
with a synjoinerwork,
are bonded
by a large
Champion
for boatbuilders
is a for of plywood
finish
with water-
are used in thr, face plies, and that
furnished
now called
to tame
or plywood
the veneers
of patches
carried
Corp.,
that
a paint
is to be covered
Formica. It can also be used for planking and decking that thetic cloth. such as fiberglass and resin. Plvwood for any purpose in a f)oar, whether for planking should
thus most of
difficult
to achieve a first-class paint job. the fir with a sealer before paint-
by one of the marine
vinvl wall coverings
oband
goes on. This situation
it difficult by coating
for interior
fir.To
but even when the plywood
to the elements.
can make somewhat
It
will be
in a lathe
thickness;
sn that
as time
of Douglas placed
and in fir it is indeed
in number
thickness. panel
ply.
fogs are
badly
equal
three-ply
is made
the
Fir also checks
greater
sealer
of the inner
peels the veneer
finish.
of about the
of plywood
paneis.
wild grain,
become
tht plywood
of the modern
to the grain
edge that
e,ch
construction,
plywood
in interior joinerwork, checking Such checking can be alleviated turers.
angle
parallel
for making
is flat g-ain,
hairline
right
and inexpensive
the fir veneer
turned
with
bent
The most common tain
will have five plies of wood,
that
rrsuftcd before.
around
marine
Building
in the receipt This
plywood
Products.
Asking
of eben more
has got to be a sign of
of horrible
quality.
Mat-inc.-gratis plvwood panels art’ laminated with waterproof phenol-formaldehyde or rc*sorc.incll glut>. anrf th:, fac(* f)lics are all grade A veneers. while there is a choice grade
A or gracfr
H backs.
i‘or(*s. tlot h gratltb
of either
Douglas
fir or fauan
detail,
although
there
is little
you can do ;tf,out what is produced
Kf*f);tir5 in ;I gratlc* A ~;I(x, art’ limitt~cl IO ninc* in ;I -I x K-foot panel.
masinlum
01’six vtbnecr f)atl.ht*s. I’ntchrs
4 x 8 pantbl.
for
B.
Cfertb is ;I I)it morr todav.
~l‘hertb is also a choice
of
‘1‘1~ panel
it: a ~gratle I3 back are limited
cores art‘ of grade
B I~ougfas fir or fauan.
four (‘ori* gaf)s in any ply. with (‘ore gaps not to exceed
including
to eighteen
with no more
a in a than
‘$ “, and with none of t hesr gaps
suf~erimf)ost~d. Marine
plywood
and A-B: rnaritle A-A and
A-2.
panels rotary
(An
art’ offered
lauan.
A-A panel
species; A-R ot- A-2 indicates Champion has a “marine CrrZon
overlay
grades
in the following
types:
marine
fir. grades
A-A
means
A-A and A-2; and marinr ribbon fauan. grades both sides are of the same grade of the same
the back Durapfy”
plv is of B or ;I? grade of the same species.) panel with a paper like resin-impregnated
on the face and back.
This panel
is good
for bulkheads
and partitions
ll’OI)l)
[flat arp to br painlcd. Duraply ribbon
‘l‘hr fat-? VCnt’c’rs untft-r- the trvt-rlay arc* pdich-frcc
is also made fauan
wiLlI a C:rvZon fact, (II? qratft* B fir and C1rofarv or thv ventbcr ulltivr I~W C:rc%c,n <‘an I)c f)ouFlas fir, f,ur
hefortb.
rhr wild grain
fini5fl. .f‘hr m:lrlrlcs ttbak f>an(*fs matfv teak
vrnrer)
grain
fjfain-slicvcl
variarions
IIIt’
II.S
f~fvwooti.
will f)c visif)lr.
:lIlti
ChilIll~S~t~Il.
rt’rail
i,, rlol the
fly dtzrcclrtf
rflrough
a paint
1,,,‘I (rflib is [flick for a
I0 lotarv
cut niatchcd for color and afic,:>rctf. <;r;l(fy A-.,j is used when
indications grade
witfl a hi:;t!jry of making
1IOWt’Vl’I
her SillC~~comparlv.
usuaffy
al-v f;l
othrrwist.
t~lt’v sUp])lV
concx’r11 tflal
All0ltlt~l'
X cxmiparcd
f)urf and knot
grad? B backs. Cflampion is a c’ompany rnatc~rials.
of the fir tan
f)\. C~hnmf~ion
lcbak
wilh snlalf
horh sidvs of tflc- pancf
f)uiftiing
fauan.
as Lgratfr GIS.
f)ac k. Optionally.
as mrntionvcf
rotar\l
29
fflcir f,ro(lucts vard
tunittu
onfv
,A- 2 is availahfv
ourftqs
witi) a choice
wtaif known br.atttqxyi
of
as float.
rflroughout
SOI::~~
for \va~c~rf,roof marinr-gratfc carcvcyf I0 f)o;iIf)uif~f~*rs ov(*r tfjcs yy;irh is -f‘fltb kfar-
IIdS
l-101 Kuswff Strt-t-r,
~11 spc’cim of fmnt~fs fir, mafrcjgany-like: ~la11c.l ~all~i
lvak. an(f Bruvn;rwl
Baf~inlc)l-t~ , Marvlanti 2 1230. ‘l‘rv Harbor forot!lcrwisr. .f‘f~cv usually c‘arrv il Dutch-made th.~l is superbfv nla(fr, aff)eit ;1 flit t)rl the heavy
4th.. Plywood
Panel
Sizes
‘f’flf- lolfowinq ih 01 f)fvM.()o~f f)CInt’f sin-s tiic,;llc-ti II? *) ;Intf Ifarf)or Salt3 (intfic~arcd fq il
rill)lC’
.\I(Irlrrf’ I*‘/1 ‘, (3.f,lV) 4x s !hi’ 4 1”0* + 14-f* ’ Iy (.r,-pi”) 48
‘? (:PpIy) “” (i-f+)
s
!)li+
f
!“o*
t
144*
l
in illt.ht3
i ).
IciH* ItiX*
I!)P*
“.I()*
48 s !W ’ I”0 4 I.14 + 4H s 96 4~ 121) + 11 I
‘, (7 p!y) 48 s !?(i* -
I”0 + 144 +
I (i-ply) 4H s 96 + I”0 * I Iq (!I-f,lY) 4x s 9ri ’
l-1-f +
1 I.> ( 11 .f’fV) -fH s 9ti* Murl’rrf~
I~fll~lrp
l.tll/illl
‘( (?I plv) .lH s !)(i ’ ‘” (.:,.plv)
,lH s !Mi I
I”0 ’ I.14 ’ I”0 - + 1.14* 4
IL’(5.plv)
4x s 96 t
I”0 4 l,fd +
‘,( (7.f,fY) 48 s wi* ’ ,Varirrc I,, (3.[‘IV)
Kihtwll
I”0 i
f-14 ’
l.nucltr
4x x Lx*
,Zln rl’ti f* 1)~ rajdy
‘, (5.]‘I?)
-18 Y 96’
“,” (5.fjly)
48 x 96 * 120*
i-f-f* 16x* 192* !216* ‘L-10’
;Iv.lil;if)ft-
Iron1 (:h;imf)itrn
(iri-
‘SO
II 001)
Special Both
Sizes of Plywood (Ihampjon
Champion. sviclttls
10
Ml”,
imum
iiar bar
l+;trt)or
I hI( kwss
start5
Exterior
Grade
in sites
p,snrl:;
t on4stc .a’ C1ti! ;i single
5alt.h. on tilt- ot ht.1 h,lnJ. or i)allc-l5 ill an!
r,l H’,
malit.
other
than
stock.
of $,,“. panels fr-on! ‘b ’ !o I IL’” thick in increments (A friend of mine built several hundred hard-chine
whmt* topsiti~* l,lanking
width
otfcrs
width,
with
panels
pant.1
on
each
in any length.
a maximum
length
side of about with a maxof H1/2’. Panel
at ‘%“.
Plvwood
1\23Ilv 1)uiltlt-1.5. ills lucling rllar-int-
Salts\ 0ftc.r 10
mentions for instance. and ll*ngths ot Sti
,~ss;iulf h),irs s(i feet.)
anti
me. have SIICc~ssfully
usrd
grath~.
hut LI huffi< icllt nurnhc*l c~f failures. rt-c~orclt~d. Bwaus~ of this. the use ot c,xrt-r.ior grade
exterior
grade
plywood
sue_h as delamination, is not recommended
instead
of
have been unless
one is
~lh\ol~/(,l~ c,t,rfo/n that the panels ar,- made with truly waterproof glue, that all voids arc pluggc~l hv the- bui!dcr IO prevent the entrance of water, and that the weaker conSIIEC tion
iniltbrc.llt
III I hc lesser number
of plies is suitable
for the job.
All in all, con-
>,idc-ring rho tr~~mt~ndous amount ot troub!e that could be caused by failure of this ~I~~JVO()(~lnatc~rial. thta hc,.~thuiltlt~r is ativisc:l against gambling his labor against the \,l\‘in,g
iI1 lllq\t(-l-i.il ~051 ,gainerl
Cutting IhIt.
IO
gra(lt-
Plywood [Iit*
hitIt* w ht.11
Figure
i)v 1tI(. us(’ ot f.xtcricn
rtiili 4;lwtYl
4-4.
\t-nt’t-t\
,
,~nct
th,l:
Ilidkt’
utl .I
I).41~c~i
~~lvwo~~tl rt-ntl5 to 5)llinter
t‘i1 i\ 0111’ 01 ~IIc*WI~I~I itI ttii\
011 its undcr-
it3l)t*(‘t. :I 1)iec.e of solid
lumber
1l’f~Ol~
c!amped always
on the
Lightweight there
of the panel
by a fine-toothed
portable
are blades
panels held
underside
be made
circular
with
fine
are best smoothed at an angle
Bending
will eliminate
crosscut
saws are handy
teeth
made
when
for just
with a low angle,
to the edge
rather
this
splintering.
saw with the face-side
than
much
sharp
block
parallel
up.
is to be cut.
and
The
plane
should
of the plywood
plywood
this purpose.
Cuts
31
edges
of plywood
set for a fine cut and
to it.
Plywood
Plywood can be bent to curvature either dry or after it has been steamed. If the latter method is used, the panel must be dried before another part can be laminated IO it. Sometimes
it is advantageous
to dry-bend
thickness. ‘The following chart panel wi!l take. Pant-l thickness
two panels
eat-h of half the desired
is a guide (not the gospel) to how much and bending radii are in inches. ,J cr0.n Cirnitr
60 72
of laminated often
!Jfi
3fi
solid
of the availability
wood
allows curved
means that large parts ha~ltlI(*d. Ct)llI-rnol~lin~
7” Wi
I92
144
“40
parts
144
or plywood
of watt-t-proof
to be made
particularly
that
laminated
beams.
Laminations
are tnuch laminating
an assembly
that
solid
would
in hoat at room
with minimum
construction temperature.
waste of material
and
ICS:; likely
thr
material,
cheap
tluc to
hut the parts
are
wood asst~mblies of parallel grain construi~tion. “ross grain in them if sawn from solid stock.
to check
does not increase
solid pieces jointed in the conventic,nal Builders with an interest in laminating parts that otherwise either strengthwise
trot necfxsarily
ilrt'
have
and
split
the strength
such as the stem showr, in A of Figure
for laminating to a lamination,
cure
can be made of small pieces of wood readily obtained and easiiv antI str,il) l)lanking as tit*sc~riI)t~(l latc*r art- t)ottl form5 01 \v(N,;I
sue-h as deck although
he used
l.kIil
adhesives
parts laminating and so arc ho;low spars. Laminated thtb time that must be taken to prt*pare the form and strong,
a dry
(0”)
24
<;lut~cl parts Lamination
(;rclill
‘4
Wood
hc-cause
(W)
‘2 I I, ‘I! ”
Laminating
bend
P~~mllt~l to
I,‘,I
1’: ‘, ” II
finished
manner. become
than of the
non-laminated wood
4-4 is greater quite
ingenious
would be tedious to make or from the standpoint
itself. than
parts.
a1111
the strength
if it were made
at conr,oc.ting
or that wouid of durability.
of ot
forms
be inferior
‘3 . 9L
11’001)
Fi,gure
4-4B shows the lamination
if sawn from series
one piece of wood.
of cleats
clamped. Another
is fastened
of a tiller.
The shape
in place
type of form
to secure
is shown
in C. and
$,” thick,
like this would
the form it can
which
stock or plywood.
Fir plywood
ably from
if you ask for it, can he bent
Harbor
A part
is laid out on a hoard
have cross grain
or on the floor,
to which
the lamination
he used for laminating
is available quite
to laminate
will be
either
ftom Champion
sharply
and a
solid
and probsuch parts
as
deckhouse roof corners. rockpit coaming corners. and the like. D is a sketch of a form used to ,gluc up right- and left-hand parts with twist, such as the bulwark rails at the bow of a boat No matter
how the form
is constructed.
there
in all forms:
the form must
be covered
with waxed
glued
10 tlte part
I’hrrt~
being
of the lamination
thirt encrugh
to take the required
shape
have
time
in place
Wttt-tt
luml~c~
Icngtl1s
holding
I,umber
Scarphing
(‘a11
them
is nc)t ol~tainal~lt~
wood just
IN* jcbinc*tl with gluecl
f~ant~l this way taktx 01 two sc,trf)tis.
01w
buitcling
firm
4X706,
is incleed
photograph. ltlt~
the I)y
magarines
such
ltlic*rs. M. 1..
that
they must thin,
be
you will
to clamping.
lengths
shorter
with a ratio of Ic~t1gth-t(~~thickt~c~ss of 8 or
with a rig as shown
in Figure 4-h. and a similar . scarl)t1ing a wide ply-
Ilowevet
espec-ially
a toot caiteci
Brothers.
for the jot; at hand,
if you tta.le to set up the rig for
the “Scarffer”
Inc.,
706
slartin
to the amateur
and
profession,tl
put out by the boat -
Street,
L&1!; City. alike.
Michigan
As shown
in the
is an attachment for a portable circular saw. it is said to cut a clean sc-arph with a single pass
has been
finding
Companv. of the needs
I~oatlmilding catering
f’-/:\/lf~~~tWIl.
l-hey
white oak.
has
(long
Plains.
teak.
Hart-a
and cypress,
\Vctod & Supply ad mentions
before
there
Rome
of hr?at builders.
C.;cnuc.
as well as plywood. Company. mail
Tampa.
been
39 West
cnder. Florida
10603,
was such a thing Sitka spruce,
Another
supplier
19th Street,
In the Snutheast, 33601.
reduced
in boating of these sup-
New York
have always had a stock of fir. mahogany.
1001 I. Harra‘s 301 North
wood
to b0irtlruilderS and others. One
White
Avenue,
for as long as I c-an remember
is John
York
,~fl~r’(J~I(L/
258 Ferris
Co111panv.
plywood!).
red cedar.
good
of supplirrs
‘1s i2’c~JtlcQrtRf>cit,
advertising
New
of
~Cl~~t~itist~lll~~IltS
COIK~CJI~
in the Northeast
Lumber
prcrblem
IlIt*
as uutvrproof
aware
strips except
with a routet-.
-4 1;. the “Scarffer” of good quality.
for Roatbuilding
I~ortun;1tc~lv.
Lumt:rr
prior
a lot of f)atience.
01 interest
Figure
son1cwI1;tt
York.
becoming
saw.
Sources
U’estcrn
be remembered it from
If they are not sufficiently
llat -scarphs
Iry hand
Consc~quentlv
of Gclugecul
Llsc-ci with a saw blade of
easily.
in long enough
tbc*cfc~\,&t~ctto cl0 t tits plaiting
(‘a11
that must
to prevent
and Plywood
IO to I Bciat-cls can be tapered rig
paper
laminated.
is no rule for the thickness
a hard
is one thing
New Logan
has alwhys been
II’OOD
Figure
4-5.
Huilhs 1att.r)
33
WINI wish to l)uil(t
art’ fortunatt~ c.rclar.
Wettbrn
rt4
nit-ranti.
whit~h is similar
witlrh~ and Irnghs
iI colti-molded
to havt~ a supplier vtBrric;il grain
Douglas
to I’hili;~pine
t)y I’ht~ Dr;In
for
Lompnv.
woodcn
hull
‘In” vt’nrer fir.
mahoganv.
vt=rtical
(mart*
;tt,out
stc)rk,
eirhtbr
grain
Silka
.I’his marcrial
Figure
4-6. the
jiirm, joints
by
The
grain
spruct~.
is scockrd
P.O. .Box -126. Grt*shatn.
out
this method vertical
or red in good
Ort-gon
Scarljfer,
97030.
put
Gougc~or~ Brothers
vs~mplifie.~ in plywood
cu/ting sheets.
scarph
34
lI:OOL)
Prevention
of Wood Decay
The first step in the prevention boats,
and it should
rot, Decay present
be remembered
is caused
For the fungi
by fungi
to grow,
. The
moisture
75-90 degrees
of decay that
certain content
is to select
that the heartwood feed on the cellulose
conditions must
a,-td wood that
Wood
that
that have proven
durable
in
of a log is the most resistant
to
between
of moisture,
be on the order
F., and the air stagnant.
the lack of moisture,
woods
the cell walls of wood.
temperature,
and
of 25-30 percent, is always
is continuously
air must
be
the temperature
dry does not rot because
wet does not rot because
of
there is no
air present. There
will be more
cabin.
where
watet
for the fungi
to grow.
In addition
to the
against
leaks that
fungi
and
reduce
on
natural
the importance and
marine
borers.
These
ftt~,rted, All 01 I hesc art* ~tld under It-oni sulrlrliers.
of these
the experience
as the best, 1 hdrc
for fnotection
against
like,
being
in preventing
decay
mot-t various
dipped
woods
and
temperature
the
precautions
can be used that
cheap,
easy
are toxic to
IO apply,
and
they
pieces. in
a
such container
I am
Although
naphthanate;
~rluCl;inl
then
to recommend
I have talked
portit up TBI‘C)
as the most effeclivr
dnd wood-tit~stroyitig
borers
miirilw
was copper
recently ‘I‘B’I‘O (trihutyl tin oxide) names bv marine paint manufacturers
of boatbuildt~rs
are easy to apply
smaller-
anal
are
c losr.lv ehdtirittt-d
‘l‘hesc~ preset-vatives brusheci
of some chemicals
preparations
along,anci
art* rc~aclilv dvailaltlc}),IIK-~!.
resistance
leaks in deck and
for the right
of drcav.
l~~~t~tit~~t~loro~~ht~t~~~l c ame
Ic’ht
to avoid
just waiting
bv the builder,
vears dn old standby
many
of building
he trapped,
decay
can he taken
the chances
I;or
later
can enter
bv brushing
apand
any one
with and
photos
of
preservative
fungi.
or dipping.
as planking butt blocks, of the preparation.
short
the larger
parts
deck beams,
being
and the
Scantling ‘The ciimensions itibtanct’.
a list
thickness,
keel
beams
of the hull
timbers
of scantlings depth
and
etc. ‘l’he actual
in wooden
includes width,
dimensions
the
stem
boatbuilding sire
width.
may be given
and and
are called
spacing
scantlings.
For
of frames, planking stringers, deck
sizes of clamps,
as the “siding,”
generally
the smaller
dimension,
and the “molding.” usually a vertical dimension. As an example of this, referring to Figure 12-l A, a deckbeam would be sided I t, ” and molded 2 th “, while a clamp would he sided 1 t*j ” and molded 4 “. The dimensions of frames are an exception to the above. ship dimension the builder
because
the fore-and-aft
is the molded
quickly
becomes
size. The adjusted
dimension terminology
is the siding, is peculiar
and
the athwart-
to boatbuilding.
and
to its usage.
It has been noted that quite a few designers, apparently tiring over the years of hand lettering the words “sided” and “molded’* on their drawings. simply abbreviate these words
to S and
M. This could
be very confusing
to the first-tirr,er.
but now you know.
Chapter
Wood
has bt-cn tht- traditional
the- relative
ease with
upon the skill and ingenuity somel imt-s in combination
Wood
and
When
the type of wood
covering should
preferably
planking,
it can
of the builtlrr. with wood,
or
hull
with
and
be of a stable
plywood.
type,
Normal
and
worms
is mt*chanically
the hull is suitable. weight
and borers.
that can be brought covering
in the design, anyway. The fabric resin
gain The
can
planking
from
hulls
fastened
of
depending
to be considered,
by itself
is usually be either
and
polyester
diagonal
with
moisture
are those who do
but the covering
weight
but
or epoxy.
prevents
advantage,
is made
The
latter
the attack
for it reduces
and when it is planned
weight
of
the worries
‘l-he weight
in size to compensate
polypropylene
rot, minimizes
against
cleaning.
of the boat,
can be reduced
cloth.
planking
there
protects
out for bottom
but very fast boats the added
fiberglass
hull
or triple
shrinks
However,
adds strength,
is a great
to the overall
structures
In anything
and
to rt=commend
The
doub!e
with fiberglass,
of water,
on by delays in hauling
the wooden
is much cloth.
to the hull.
absorption
latter
such
swells
to crack.
t hp use of covering
does not add much
of the covering.
The
so because
However,
materials
such as strip planking,
carve1
quite
and
it remains
there
or other
cause the covering
to cover old carvel-planked
thick
is suitable,
fiberglass
not hesitate
leaks
and
by the beginmar.
tht-rt* are other
construction
resin
and this might
When
for boatbuilding
be worked
Fiberglass
the wood
changes,
material
which
5
of the for
for the weight
does not count for much and
is more
Dyne1 are also used. expensive
and
more
35
3G E-IHER~~l.ASSA ND O’l‘Ilk:R lI1 ‘I.I. .21.47‘k.RI:II..5 time-consuming
to use, due to slower
cure
at room
temperatures,
but its adhesion
to
wood is superior. Covering covering when
is also recommended
of joints
in cabin
the joined
sanded
edges
are oitcn
tit-al cabin
and
covered
such as at the chines
made
wtth
figurr
there
who clabbles
are certain
with
prt-cautions
boats
because ho011
that
must
tionetl
be hauled
must
years I~rlentler
bvnt ht*tic. fahric,s.
St I-WI , New Kochelle.
Molded
Fiberglass
.l‘htb shiny,
Inc.
selt*c.tion
When stick
prcduwtl
fiberglass
anti
Epoxy resin is
the heads
of fastenings,
and smoothing
gouges
use
and can be sanded like Cabosil
propor.
IO the
11twIs
of the home
.~nd c-poxy resins, Kt*Vlilr.
boat’
fiberglass
and
ilIlt glassing IOOIS. ‘l‘llr ot lIefender is 255 Main
for every blemish
hulls
with glass cloth
will IJC reproducx~tl
is finished
as desired.
glass cloth
and
sometimes vertically,
steel.
a release
is made
usualiy
and
made
from
resin and is worked
when
is applied
mat and polyesret-
If a particular
the mold
are
a female
plug 1)~ made, just as though you were or l~lywood. whichever is suitable for tht-
resin
rigid molt1 has been made. Rather than hold the mold’s shape, the shell is rt-inforr-ed 011 wood
the old finish
covering.
.L material
‘l’he address
hull
to split
the female so that
mold
the female
at-y laid up successively
to a very is made. will not until
a
relv entirelv upon shell thickness to the outside with a nerwork of rough
s1r011g.
withdrawn
be
for in-
Hulls
‘l’ht- plug is tlwn covered
it. I’hen
must
hull,
cover,
and
New \I’ork I OH01
commerciallv
t IIt- plug to
ovet
has catered
WJO~.
for (.ovt-ring
‘l‘his rc-quit-es that a wooden male IJuiltIing iI wooctI~11 hull, using stripplanking hull shape.
All old finish
put under
and
ot p0)vestc.t
1110Itl.
snloot II I‘iIlish.
to cover old wood,
is very fast drying
s11c.h as ~J(~lv~)ro~)vl~~rit~;lIlII
(~iltalo~ alho Itas instruc~tions
want
cracks
cloth
putty.
lntiusrries.
they c’arry a large
which
of t*l)oxy resin of
by one layer of
resin.
weeks before
For filling
putlv.
or makts ;I mixture produce lhe consistency
and
olht-r
body
USC’.
to
huildt~r
,turomot~ile
added
In the case of a plywood and
of strain
used to cover ver-
foot for IO-ounce
polyester
be used
11o1
to the builder joints can be
Lil areas
is often
for I dood job.
be dry.
out of the water
OI old, oil IJZW fillers
For many
cloth
or later
be taken
must
they will he sot’tent~d by the resin.
attc*r
doubled
per square
and the wood allowed to dry for several 1-t-commrnded for old wood.
(41 her il polyester
finish.
cloth.
Ten-ounce
will sooner
the boat
wood
d paint
cioth. both including
stance,
New
under
of 2.25 ounces
off the wood. and the wood
stripped, stronglv
tops, and the like, and the
To give you an idea of the weight
cltxaned
must
cabin
leaks is a genuine boon than varnished. Taped
fiberglass
boats.
a minimum
and doul~k t tlis for 20.ounce Anyone
invisible
%O-ounce
of v-bottomed
sides of plywood.
such covering,
decks.
etc.,
to prevent is to be painted rather
work
to feather
Huils
for plywood
sides.
shape
is such
that
it cannot
be
on the centerline.
Some builders decrease the time needed to build stiffness into the mold by using sandwic h construct ion. After 1.I ” or so of fibrIglab% hd> brrn laid up against the plug, they use a core materiai such as end-grain balsa, followed by more fiberglass. The mold
stiffness
is thus
increased
e-reatlv
bv soreadine
the
rrlass skins
aoart.
the core
FIBERG1..-1SS.-IIV-IIOTHER Hl’1.1. M.-ITERIA LS material
acting
flanges. When plug,
in much
the female
it is polished
ing up a hull. beam
working
up the fiberglass
size, this minimizes laying
the hull will be made
and
up and resin
or steel,
resin.
as those laminated
The
the hull
than
is anything
downhand.
by hand
and
the from
larger
spend
actually The more
the job will he. This
up the laminates
the
for Iay-
can be rolled
the work mostly
makes
of fiberglass
high g!oss finish
When
the
from
in diameter
must
with roller and brush. When hulls are produced glass fibers can br applied with specialized spray strong
larger
of time the builders
the less disiasieful
by laying
removed
IL is then ready
each end so the mold
the amount
you can stay out of the sticky that
near
that separates
has been
are repaired.
disc of wood
to the mold
in the hull while
of a hull
and any blemishes
a partial
is added laying
as the web of an I-beam
for the production
Sometimes
side to side while dinghy
mold
and waxed
of the boat,
than
the same manner
37
presumes
applying
the resin
in large quantity. resin and chopped equipment, but these hulls are not as
cloth.
on the outside
of molded
hulls or other
simiiariy
cortttructed
parts of the boat results from first spraying a gel coat of resin on the surface of the mold. The gel coat can be of any color desired. and contrasting stripes at the waterline and
other
accent
stripes
can
After the gel coat has been wovtw roving and choppt*d llow
does one make
not available? ble,
thrrc
has been
Watching
as well when
you know
what
it is all about.
applied, the hull is laid up with fiberglass fabrics known as strand mat until the nectassary thickness hrl+ been reached.
a mold
and lay up a fiberglass
others
ale htroks that the bible
be sprayed
do these
things
are
iLfnr/rrc* Dc~.\/~I~Mnuul,
One book,
for many I years. and now there are other hooks on tIrt* market writrcbn with the bt*ginnt’t. in mind. l‘h~ laminate (It*t;tilitlg the* c.omposit ion of rho tiberglass hull laminate. such sc~hcvllll~* int;)rmation
industry
anal tvpe of glass reinforcement,
as thcb wc$$ir lined
boat
instructions
is the best way, but if this is not possi-
spell out the techniques.
of the tiberglass
hull if detailed
in rhr Plans
own ith*as about
of the boar. laminatc~s.
nunlbcr
.Is experience
of lavers,
is Rained.
etc.
should be out mav develop his
the builder
is nt~eded for rht, first artcmpt at [his type of
l)ut guiclancth
bc~athuiltling.
“One-Off”
Fiberglass
It was inevitable tiberglass mold.
hull
that
huildt-rs
without
having
Setkmann
only devised
Hulls
Plastics,
a method
Inc.,
would
come
tn spend P. 0.
along
the
time
Box 13704,
but also invented
and
and and
figure money
patented
C-Flex
The molds the
open-weave
construction and sometimes
hull
“planking”
must
is fairly
stiffener!
be built
will not
fiberglass
method upside
sag between
a female
L,ouisiana “planking.”
a
70185, which
not con-
alternating with bundles of by a webbing of two layers
cloth. simple.
A hull
with longitudinal down.
a way to build
to construct
NVW Orleans.
sists of parallel rods made of fiberglass-reinforced polyester continuous roving, with each “plank” being held together of Itghtweight,
out
The
thetn.
molds the
form
is framed
strips
let into
must
be spaced
spacing
varying
with
the molds. with
so that
sectional Obviously the C-Flex
the weight
of the
38
FIRERGL.I~SS.-INU OTIIER III’LL M.47’1:RI:Il.S
Figure
5-l.
:I roll
cl/ (:-It1 1’1 : / )r~itrg
(lwrrrg
hdti
ill plw
hy I’(.(’ ptlk\I
lurrl
dower.
.Volr*
(iT(’ cYrrc~/rlIIy
tlttrt
/rrltt(~d
tlrc
icvtltI~s
rrgr1rrr,\t
OII(’
hiti
rior4fu
wrlr’vi~
ri,rr,tll,‘,.
C-Flex. The C-FIvu. molrts and c,c,nforms
which bends lon
rountl-l)nttomett c-ach aclditional v-bottom~~tl
hu11, the C-Flex
is applied
sheer
on the hottom.
to the centerline.
and,
to the chine
and the covering
When
the frame
is continued has been
to the
completely
covered with the C-Flex planking it is wet out with resin, either polyester or epoxy, and t htsti l~ttIlill;ltiOt~ is contiriut4 with c~onventional fitWrgliIss miltc~rials until the desired t hic.kness
has been
13~ the nature
reach~-d.
of its cwttstruction,
the C-Flex
is very strong
in the direction
rods. It is made in two wc+ghts. 0.33 and 0.5 pounds per square conit’s in lerigtlis of 100’ and 250’ rolls. or any length to order. struction, up and about
the amount the
degree
C-Flex
One-nff
of finishing
construction
fiberglass
time depends
of smoothness to anyone
hoarbuilders
upon
Seemann furnishes interested in the method.
frequently
foot, is 12’ wide, and Like any similar con-
the care taken
desired.
use a technique
of the
to have a fair lay-
detailed known
information
as sandwich
con-
struction, where thr laminate consists of a core between fiberglass skins. This type of construction has several advantages over single-skin construction. Probably the biggest
l.‘III~;KI;I..JS.‘;S!i :l.t’l) O’I‘ttER ill ‘1.1 .lI.-fTERI.-lI.S 39 advantage stifter
is its favorable
than
a single
core such as balsa
stiffness/weight
skin of the same or foam,
ratio.
number
the weight
A sandwich
laminate
of laminations,
of the sandwich
and
is significantly
with a lightweight
is not much
greater
single skin. I’his fact offers the designer who uses sandwich construction he calI krzp thy same thickness and weight lanlinate as for a similar and
up wtth a thicket-,
VI;;I
the glass skins and can
use a sandwic.h
Other
latninate
stiftncxs
than
benefits.
ligllt
sweating
or non-rxistcmt
:2n11r trrar strut-tiotl
the
that
ttappcns
the thickness
equal
save weight
sandwich
weight,
hull.
and
increase
fiberglass
Noise
and
sometimes
skin;
of
or he
stiffness.
offers hulls
vibration
the
and weight
to the single
construction
single-skin
framing
insitiv
ison
~-OIII~,~I
is wltat
to both
in a sandwich
slmcx.
he can reduce
with strength
for which
arid thtb .tI)st.nc~e of thtb transvetscgivt-5 11101t’ u.,;Ibit-
hull;
laminate
designed
and
‘I’hc interior
minimized
muc-h stiffer
have a cored
than
with options: single-skin hull
additional
are notorious
is
are also reduced,
used in single-skin
fiberglass
hulls
and sandwich
con.
hull.
should
bc- made
between
single-skin
in thr
e:~nt that the hull is punctured, particularly under Iti s1tc.h (.ir~utnst;Itl(.t’l;. the single-skin hull will admit water, but this is
tht. w,lt~:rlinc~
not so of a sandwic.h hull unless both skins and the core are punctured-something that ad~oc.;itrs of san(lwic.h construction feel is unlikely during the normal life of a boat.
It totlrn\s.
ot t.ourbc.
that
the rt*sult of strc-tl XII .tccitlt~nt irnp;l( I, I hts otttcr
,ig;tiilzt
111111) ;I t.ttio
singIt* \kitl.
01 lx.1
if a c~)rrd laminate is no worse
skin
than
of it sanctwich
.I%(- tcpit
is often
01 $3sanclwicll
1111lt~ t ht. core material
made
laminate
has been
(‘on’ will ric~~l to 1)~. irisc~rtc*~l it the hull
should
be completely
for a single-skin
hull.
thicker
is
than
more
no
damaged,
in which
is to be repaired
punctured
As a safeguard the inner
difficult
than
thts S,I~H~ as for single-skin
in the same
.I‘I~ I)uil(l ;I 5atldivic.h
hull,
a framework
tibrt-glass
of transverse
for a
case a piccc of the way it was con.
~ttu~:tc~~l. OIlit-IMGW-. rhc- (l;ltn;tg~~i section of thr outer skin is ground away ~i1)1-St4i\,t.11~~1~.It..it tic-rcbrl ilit0 t IIt* acliacc-tit unilatn;igc~l skin, and I he void is filled I’il)c%rgl,las .ln(l tt4tl
skin,
with with
repair.
section
molds
and longitudinal
strips (usunllv ( allc :! r-ibbands (jr Ijattens) is needed to define the shape of the hull. and it tn;lkt*s st& to build upside down. Figure 5-2 shows the forward end of a male mold for an X6-foot powtarboai hull. I Ising loam
(or-t- as a:~ c~x;tnipIr.
foam
sheets
are fitted
against
the mold
(using
a
the foam pliable where necessary or using “contoured” core heat lamp to makt matc~rial instt-atI) atltl held in place with nails driven through plywood scrap “washers” until
tht. foan~ (‘at1 t)t- held in place
tnold
into thta foam
of the fibt*rglass Careful material sandwich weaken
(l;igurcb 5 3). ‘I’hcs foam
outsi&
skin (Figurts
workmanshi~~
is t-equired
and whm
the glass skins. the
the affected
lamination
that laminate
through
the ribbands
from r’nsl’dr>the
is then cc~vrred wit)1 the specified
thickness
5-a). to ensure
a complete bond between the core in the bond will hasten delamination of the
Interruptions is loaded
part of the hull.
the core. some of thcb burden reason
wit11 screws
to deflect
When
there
of the laminate
clesi,gner must carefully
use in boat Ilulls. Obviously. a material does not absorb water is desirable.
that
between
is a good
strength investigate
bond
fails upon
supports between
this will
the skins and
the core itself. For this
the available
resists crumbling
and
upon
core materials impact
and
for that
40
FIBERGLASS A Nil OTIIER IiULL M.-l TERIALS
Figure
5-2.
‘X‘ht, tnult’ ~101rf for on
Airex-corrd, Note>
X6jiwt
how
clo.st*lv
pouw~‘rhoclt. .spncd
thrb rib-
h(l trtl.5 (1 r(‘.
FOAM\ //
I ( i i t I i : ? / h i
Figure
5-3.
FIRERCL:lSS .1h’D OTIIER HC’1.L MATERIAIS /-OUTER
Some iiircu
C,~n;td;r
o!‘ the most (closed-cell by l’clrin,
(end-gr;
partly
polyvinyl
%oley
in balsa :ale.
St..
chloride),
Grapevine.
wood),
manufactured
Texas
manufactured
New Jersey
and
by American
7605 1.
by Baltek
Corp.,
10 Fairway
07647.
go into all the construction details, but suffice it to say that while the hull is down the nutside fiberglass skin should be smoothed to the extent desired
it is still possible
construction,
the, core
C)verturning before
cell foam,
Box 195. North
I cannot still upside while
cores are:
Corp. I 204 NoJ:~.
Cotttourkorr
FIBERGLASS
100 perrcnt polyvinyl chloride l’oam), marketed in the U.S. Inc., 12.5 Sht2ridan ‘I’crracr, Ridgewood, New .Jrrsey 07450.
h’lrgt~c~~ll (closed Klegrcell Court,
popular
41
to work downhand,
If you wish more
manufacturers
supply
you with it.
procedure
because
a cored
the inner
hull
fiberglass
can
is a trying skin is added
to the laminate
One method used by several builders of hulls 5-5. This involves the use of a holding cradle the hull as it is overturned
and which
information the shell
on sandwich is quite
to complete
limber
the sandwich.
with Airex foam cores is shown in Figure fitted to the upside-down hull to support
the hull sits in while the construction
of the boat
is completed. Although
the aforesaid
used for additional be produced
before
hulls.
is a “one-off”
method
It is a matter
of economics
a female
the production of single-skin hull. Thr laminate is simply
mold
is justified.
fiberglass changed
of hull construction, Female
to calculate molds
that
the mold can be how many
hulls can
have been
hulls can also be used for molding to include a core.
built
for
a sandwich
42
I~‘IHER(~I.:I!iS.dh’l) 07’111:R 111‘1.1. .11.-l7‘1.111:1 1.S
CARPET
STR\fS
GLA4$Ep
-R’
f=\=e-
HULL
Figure
5-5.
Steel When
you stop to think
pensive
when
worked
to almost
about
rornl~ar~*d
it, steel is a remarkable
with
any shape
other desired.
welding makes it a suitabltx material fashioned riveted construction. One rosion
by sea water.
protect
steel
advantage
Fortunately.
against
corrosion,
of steel construction
metals,
hut
material.
with
‘I’he relative
ease
Steel is not a material
the coatings aluminum
for the average
1 can remember
must
the hull plating,
and both builders
the hulls
would
about
very inrxit can
pieces
be
by electric
coatings
maintained.
as well) is that inner
to An bot-
the hull for one side, enabling
by any means.
auxiliary
improved
be tcrnstantly
construction
beginner
two good-sized
who had not built a boat before. However, the necessary equipment. The worst fault did it again
equipment,
of joining
have brought
tom integral fuc*l and water tanks ran be built in, using larger capacities to be carried than in wooden hulls. for too long
it is strong,
proper
for small craft with a saving in weight over olddisadvantage of steel is its low resistanre to cor-
the years (and
and
sailboats
but without
reflecting
of steel built
by people
they did have metalworking experience and of these boats was the humps and hollows in
said that
they had gained
experience
so that if they
not be so rough.
Rough plating of steel hulls is often disguised by skillful application of trowel cement, probably because it is cheaper to do this than to expend the labor needed to smooth
the plating
by heating
and
quenching.
The
roughness
of the plating
is caused
l~~lHt:K~~I..-l.sS .l.VI) 1)771t~;KII1 ‘1.1. .ll:I 7‘l~:HI:~l.S -IS by stresses ser up when sequence
of welding
Even though of higtler
so that
A few of the many
yacht
aluminum
for- boalhuilding.
huildrrs.
In general .i‘his permits
crew
terms.
can
of achieving
long;
Iht* fitt’r (haI
technicians
be built
lighter
have invented today
rhan
new alloys
ever before.
notably alloy 5086 in rhe United States. are alloys are relatively high in strcngl h and corrosion
welded.
transports
and
A fair amount
platform
alloys of aluminum speed
of rhis meral
of more
operators
weight
or an increase Besides
are using
large fleet of
over rhar of steel.
in speed.
ils light
weight.
aluminum
or the possi-
aluminum
cannot
lasts
but speak
well
Iongeviry.
huitttt7h
of pleasure
t~1a~5 in atltlition
boats
either
1~-;111svi‘rst~or tongil utlinal Atulliinulil
Ijuilti
only in dluminum
IO Ihost- 01 otht-1 nlart-ria1.s.
and runabouts of aluminum are made I)rotluct- 2 large part or ;1n enrirt- hdlf Lramiiig
t~c~nstrut~tion
Small
bv stretch-ft.rming p&t*
0~1
of
is used
sheets of
01it-
~TWial.
ant1 c.ovt*red wirh
is nio~t- t,sl)t*nsivt-
than
or have a line of
craft
5ut.h as dinghies
over malts molds I0 Orht-rwise. regular i1S in
plaling
sleel COII-
steel t~~ns~~ut~~ion. for no1
onlv tlot~s IlIt* atunlinunl ilst4t CXN more pt.r INNI~~I than ~~t.t~l, rl~e ,tt.(u;tl welding I’O~I~ IIIOII-. ‘i‘his mortb than m,lkt-s up for the fact rhar rhe wt+.$lt of aluminum volved
by
vessels.
construt.tion
deadweight
is consumed
the increasingly
supply
reduce
with less horsepower.
commercial
for irs anlicif)a’t-d
~rrircrio~i.
The
alloys, These
the carrying
bililv
;rluniinuni
and one plate 10 another.
but bv far rhe most of it is used IO build
oil field
Several
research
steel hulls
and can be satisfactorilv
oftshore
to the frames
in this respect.
Alloys
satisfacror-y resistance
the plating
steel is an old material,
strength
Aluminum
welding
is of importance
in a particular
project
will always
be less than
the weight
also in-
of the steel required.
Manv builders of steel boars have converted 10 aluminum construction with little need to change cquipmenr rsce11~ for welding, but like steel. it is not a nlaterial for the bt*ginnt~r. 011~ very imptlfi~~rtn~ problem area encc,un~rrtd with aluminum construction is galvanit found when be
t,c)rl.osion.
in sut.11 fitrings the aluminum
and specitit.ations of the aluminum
hetwern
as sea cocks, hull is exposed
and
~~JtY’tWltVi.
‘I‘his oct’urs
the aluminum
prt)pt-llers,
shafts,
to stray electrical
hull rutitlcrs,
currcrfts
the methods
for doing
for the boat.
If you lack this information,
manufacturers
can
so are preferably
be consulred
and
dissimilar
metals
etc..
anti also occurs in anchorages. This can
all spt~lleti OUI in the plans the marine
departments
for help.
Welding ant1 the preparation of the finished surface are also areas that require care. Welding aluminum is quite different than welding steel. It is imperative that weld areas
be absolutely
tion about welding. comes IO painting coating
aluminum
hull rakes aluminum should
clean
if good welds are to be made.
If you are in need of informa-
the aluminum manufacturers can provide assistance. When it the surface, rhe marine paint makers have special systems for and instructions for cleaning it before coating. The highest quality
a lot of labor: a really smooth yacht finish on the topsiJes of a welded yacht hull requires fairing of the surface with fairing compounds. which
stay in place
for quite
a while.
J-1 t~‘Il~t*~t~(~I.‘-Iss .-I,YI) C)7/lt-X III .1.1. N.-t 7‘1:K1.41..~ Ferrocement Every now and ment.
then
Essentially.
terlaced
with
embedded taken
there
wirr,
with
struction
1967-68
tion of ferrocement
turning
to be any mention
earlier
enthusiasts
Exotic
Hull
construction,
lower
weights
this
art’s
is bound
liglttw4ght
fishing
timc*s stronger
magazine
and
there
at all, an indication
of matt+als
than
and
wood
to continup.
and
five times
F2sotic, materials as compared
that
were a number A decade
the method
recently
wltirh
of designers
later there
does
is not as easy as the
havca also found
their
plywood
as a bulkhead
made
such exotic
c.onsidrration.
there
I~latt~riiIlS rquirc-
has
wood
been
made
are other
factors
staving
and
are made
in strength
or decorative
surpassed
panels.
by at least
two other
of both these materials come with aircraft. One type of core is end-
of a DuPont
to consider.
techniques
glass fabrics Kevlar fabric, material.
step forward
material
matet ials can work out well, esperially
spccializrd
strengths
Years ago, the in:roduc-
was a giant
of vertical
material
boatbuilding
tllan is steel. high.strrngth
way into bulkheads.
bulkheads
grain balsa and the other is a honeycomb which is used in helicopter bladrs. Although
that have higher
plastic, and development in form, has been used in super-
the standard
i.. stiffer for its weight is another lightwri
to the bulkheads
plywood
developed
tnatt-rials that art’ stiffer and much lighter. Panels fil~t~rglass skins, and thry are used in large transport
where
called
Nomex,
light weight
If they arr to be used properly, knowledge.
Another
is a these
consideration
is
cost.
For example, S glass is twice as expensive as E glass. As for Kevlar, a of high-speed powerboats who uses this material once told me that, pound for
pound, a Kevlar.,resin combination the standard mat ‘woven roving’resin not used throughout it is hard
exotic fibers. then, is that When
of the con-
strtmssc4 areas of racing sailboat hulls. It is three S glass, which is twice as than stt-cl. I.ike~visr.
stiffer
E: glass from
tion of rc~lat~vc*ly stiff marine
material,
care must be
did not carry some men-
rage.
fiberglass-reinforced in fiber Graphite,
rods and in highly
matlt-. is muctl stronger and tram I)upont aramid tihers.
builder
that great heavy weight
30 feet in length.
for the then current
a number
as the common
t ht4r high
rod in-
is completely
Materials
and
Now,
steelwork
the basically
under
hulls of ferrocereinforcing
had broadcast.
‘Tht-re have been
strong
under
the
It is understood
an issue of a boating
out plans
of concrete
to it so that
and that
for hulls
hardly
hulls
rngaged
not ,.lppear
applied
to the atmosphere.
it impractical
abdL-t cl=nstructing
of a framework
voids in the cement,
makes
In the years
consists
cement
and not exposed
to eliminate
actively
is a wave of enthusiasm
the system
a hull, to make
was as much as seven times more expensive combination. Since these exotic materials
but only as a substitute a general
comment
for strength-contributing about
the cost of building
than are
laminate hulls
using
for laminate designs differ from boat to boat. About all that can i,i! said, the use of such exotic materials will certainly lead to an increase in cost.
one considers
that
the powerboat
manufacturer
referred
to earlier
was able to
I;IRk.XG L.:1.S.S ‘4 ND 0 7-tIl~.ii1I1!l.!. ,21.-I 7’EKI.J1.s effect
a weight
saving
of only
5 to 7 percent,
the extra
cost
is, in most
45
cases,
not
always
be
warranted. The state of the art is constantly developed,
and
there
are always
changing, those
however,
so new materials
who will try to apply
them
to
will
boatbuilding.
Chapter ___-
6
&mpared
with
modern
craft
holding
the
tight,
the
located
with
together boat.
thought
drilled
of a wooden
iron
hull
fastened
boats
to prove
this point.
and
simply
will last a lifetime,
used
of galvanized
galvanized
iron.
timers
fastenings,
and
rods
that
were
today cannot
teners Here
have
coated
be compared no place
is what
to say about
always
are zinc coated
I‘hcy
there
down
contribution
to a and
always
holding
amount
passed
it doesn’t.
task
be driven
of money
the word
a wrecked
The
galvanized
of yesterday.
by using gal-
that
shrimp
galvanized-
today
that seem
boat,
beached
regarding
fastenings
In the first place,
available
in
power.
are hulls here and there
I examined
the fastenings
the
of today
the old timers
are most
likely
of mild
coatings, fastenings of mild steel do not have as do iron ones. Second, the old-time iron nails
by hot dipping by electroplating,
to coating
should
almost all fastenings
to their
proved just the opposite. to offer contradictory evidence
fastenings
whereas
according
maximum
have
hand,
steel. When bared of their protective nearly as much resistance to corrosion trners
builder.
and indeed
On the other
are not the galvanized
as a primary
bc sized
can save a considerable Old
about 10 years after it was built. that Although the above would appear clurability
importance
size to ensure
boat
fastenings.
boats of the old days, built. Thus the innumerable
should
by the designer
The
builder
extra
fastenings
holes of proper
Iron
wooden
to be lightly
assume
All
Galvanized
vanized
constructed
can be considered parts
seaworthy
carefully
heavily
in molten which
by hot dipping.
zinc.
results
Many
“galvanized”
in a relatively
In fact these
fas-
thin coating
“zinc-plated”
fas-
in a boat.
Independent
the zinc coating
Nail,
Inc.,
of fasteners:
a manufacturer
of special-purpose
nails,
has
I.‘.-Is 7‘E.l’Ih’ .;.s ‘* ‘Galvanized’ best
has turned
type is a hot-dip,
hot-tumbler,
out
to bc generally
whose surface
hot-galvanized
may be contaminated
each
is, for practical to a tumbler
produce
on the surface.
very thin
zinc coatings
and galvanized
wood
understood
adjective.
The
purposes, pure zinc. Tumbler, process from which the coating
refer
with iron right
ing e,tch generally
a poorly
17
Electra
and mechanical
serving
galvaniz-
for appearance
more
than
for performance.” Galvanized planking
boat
nails
to frames.
without
going
frames
and
separate
A frame
through
the
is clinched
should
be at least
frame.
With
over on the
from the nail where
to be refastened throughout
because
the length
to do so is a good
sign
that
wood
clogged
around
with
the hole.
reducing
nails
they
used
metal.
galvanized
goes
are used,
to fasten in it
through
the
the zinc
will
Many boats have had nails
is an expensive
are dipped,
holding
nail
of such
were inferior
hot-dipped
zinc when
the
the bare
Renailing
been
if a nail is to be buried
poor
at the end
the fastenings
In the case of the smaller-sized frequently
exposing
of the fastening.
often
frames,
When
started
have
1 t/2 ” thick
lighter
inside.
it is bent,
corrosion
screws
and
progressed
job, and the necessity
or inadequate
to start
wood screws,
the threads
and
when
driven,
with. are
they tear
the
power.
Even if he has had sotne good experiences
in the past with galvanized
fastenings,
the
builder is advised to be sure of his fastenings by using a better metal for fastenings that are to be constantly in water. Although more expensive initially, the best fastenings are cheap
in the end.
Brass If a decision
is made
alternative water
would
cannot
an electrolyte copper
against
woods.
Brass is all right
should
be taken
Silicon
Bronze
called
A point
perhaps
fastening
wrung
and galvanized
exposed
too.
off screws parts
to salt
as 30 percent,
and in
What remains is a spongy useless. This is called de-
alloy is used that contains
of interior
a good
The being
zinc in ex-
high
zinc
brass
driven
into
hard
such as joinerwork,
but care
hull.
in a boat
It is about
off when
that
for the manufacture
as much
disadvantages,
it is easy to break
it is hard
96 percent
being
from sea water.
to be remembered
a copper
for the fastening
Everdur.
to corrosion
with the brasses
when
not to use it in thr
structural
ings are seldom resistant
Brass as furnished
are mechanical strong:
seem
but the use of brass for fastenings
too strongly.
can he expected There
it might
the zinc ieaves the alloy. that the fastening is practically
in strength
and
alloys are not particularly
every
fastenings
is very high in zinc content,
cess 01 16 percent.
For
galvanized
sucl~ as sea water,
so reduced
sometimes
using
be brass fastenings.
be advised
of screws and bolts
zincifiration
against
to beat
copper
and
a copper
silicon
is so strong
that
alloy fasten-
driven, The
and of major importance, it is highly use of this metal removes the risks involved
steel fastenings
is the higher
resale
and is well worth value
the difference
of a bronze-fastened
in cost. boat.
48
F.4s TENINGS
Monel
‘L
This
nickel
copper
resistance, people
but
to afford.
much
galvanic
ing bronze tact.
alloy It can
action
propeller
nails,
a popular
between
of Monel
and
will be mentioned
with
shafts make
purposes
Nails.)
in
from
strength
it is much silicon
For instance,
Monel
for some
(See Threaded
bronze
made
in conjunction
and
and stiffness fastening
silicon
bolts
the metals.
screws.
struction
above and
be used
shaft struts
The strength
driving
ranks
the cost of screws
Monel
have bronze
because
for most
without
IS often
used for fasten-
propellers
fear
in direct
saving
has many
of
con-
for Anchorfast
of the labor
as a metal
corrosion
bronze
it very satisfactory
Monel
and too high
boat
it offers
over
uses in boat
con-
further.
Copper Copper
has excellent
corrosion
resistance,
but
because
of its scftness
it is suitable
mostly for fastenings in the form of flat-head nails that are used as rivets or for clout nails sometimes, used in hulls with light lapstrake planking.
Stainless
Steel
‘I‘here
arc
merals
not he considered
vast
many
cxpt-rirnce
galvanic
action
assutanct~, the
alloys
under
1his common
and
satisfactory
with
other
materials
thtn USC’of stainless
bt-st
metal
aluminum
for
ste&.
Ijulpits,
tlotahly engine
for it avoids
used in a boat.
Mixture
thr
erosion
destruction
freedom
from
boat.
Without
such
above
hardware.
corrosion
water.
stanchions,
of the alloy parts.
It is and
Of the many
stainless
hardware.
systtm
and rigging
sailhoat
parts.
and
fittings
to minimize
he might
steel is being specialty
propeller
on spars.
has been
used more
shafting. to others.
of the screw
to reduce
hardware,
and
more
for and
is also used for
materials
using
his stock of
stanchions
Stainless
As with many
it is brst to Iravtb experimentation application
“bleeding”
be happy
that might
it yourself
be
only when
proven.
of Metals
The loosely and
and
to applications deck
rub strips
builders,
material.
drrk
cxhausr
wire ropts rigging vou know
alloy
same
these
who has
316 seems to be the most corrosion-resistant in a of this alloy may take some doing. One or two have, in the past, special ordered Type 316 wood
such fasrt-tiings. Othc*r than as a fastener p“‘s,
in the
that
by someone
the OIW known as Typo but finding fastenings
If you can find one of these
hll
used
resistance
be limit,4
aluminum
frames.
you are guided
of corrosion being
salt atmosphere, of thr high-qualitv yacht builders , S~I‘VLYS to st’curC%stainless sterl half-oval Il~ads.
unless
steel should
f’asrening
alloy window
stainless
proof
It IS recommended
heading.
for hull fastenings
used term “electrolysis” of metals of metals
is applied
by electrolysis, is blamed
by the average
cavitation,
on electrolysis,
boatman
or galvanic
to the corrosion
action;
due to lack of knowledge
usually
the
of the other
.F.4.Sl‘EIL’INC;S 49 causes.
Except
the scope
for discussing
Sea water dissimilar
is an
metals
currtznt
The
metals The
electrolyte
when
between
fastenings,
the subject
and
intensity
gradually
posi:ions
will
cause
destroyed
by what
of the attack
will vary
series and
also upon
in the galvanic
an
electric
current
or close proximity to each other. to the cathode, that is. the anndic
:he anode
in the galvanic
Anodic
action
that
in contact
will flow from
will be attacked sion.
galvanic
is beyond
of :his work.
series
is properly
according the relative
in sea water
to the areas
of some
to flow
between
When this occurs, fitting or fastening
termed relative
galvanic
corro-
positions
of the
or masses of the metals.
metals
follow:
or Least Noble
Zinc Galvanized
steel or galvanized
Aluminum
alloy
5456
Aluminum
alloy
5086
Aluminum
alloy
5052
Aluminum
alloy
356,
wrought
iron
6061
Mild steel Wrought iron Cast iron 1% H Stainless
steel ‘I’ypc 304 (active)
18-H Stainltsss
sttst-I ‘I’ypt* 316. 3’!{, molybdenum
(active
Lead ‘I‘in Mangantbsc-
hronzt~
Naval
(60’+{, coppt*r,
brass
Yrllow
brass
Aluminum
(65%
copper,
35%
Lint)
bronze
Red brass (H5S;, copper, Copper Silicon
39”:, rinc)
(act ivr )
I ncm1~4
IS?:, zinc)
hronrr
Cupro-nickttl
(904h
copper,
10%
nickel)
copper.
30%
nickel)
Cupro-nickel
(704’,
Coml)osition
G bronzts
(#?A
copper,
2’,‘/0 zinc,
10% tin)
Composition
M bronze
(885;
copper,
SU’, zinc,
61~2“4, silicon.
Incclnel
I I/? ?A Icad)
(passive)
Mont.1 IX-R Stainless
steel Type
304 (passive)
18-H Stainless
steel Type
316, SS’, molybdenum
(passive)
Titanium Cathodic
or Most Nobte
It might he possible to use only one metal, fastenings in a wooden hull, but where a mixture
notably silicon bronze for all of the is the most practical, the metals used
50
FASTENINGS
should
be ones that
are reasonably
silicon
bronze,
Monet.
and
sort or another. Note that stainless understand ished,
steels are shown
it, the surface
formation
of oxide.
and
after
surface
is more
severely
reduced,
close together
Ail of these metals
This
in the series above
of the steel is passivated can be donr
the steel has been resistant
in the galvanic
after
cleaned
Without
fasteners
in two different
by chemical
ail machining
thoroughly
to corrosion.
scale. such as copper,
are used to manufacture
and
passivation,
of one
positions.
As I
treatmen:
to hasten
the
working
has been
fin-
and
degreased.
The passivated
the corrosion
resistance
is
and it is best to avoid the use of these metals for underwater fastenbut the treatment has been destroyed or altered, ings. If the surface has been treated, it is best tc treat such metals as if the metal’s corrosion resistance will be uncertain; they were not passivated. l know of a case wh: re a bronze
stern
iron tag screws a perfect example metals were in contact in sea water;
bearing casting was fastened with galvanized The dissimilar of setting up omaivanic corrosion. first the zinc disap;,eared, and then the iron was
attacked until the bearing finally came loose. Many boats with’bronze hull fastenings have been built with cast iron ballast keels. but in this case I he comparatively huge mass of anodic material. the iron keel, would show the keel cdn be of hot-dipped signs of attack slowly due to its bulk. The bolts securing galvanized
wrought
vinyl-lvpc
anti-corrosivtb
iron or Monrl.
The outside
of the iron should
have several
coats of a
to act as a nonmetailic barricsr to galvanic action. N~~t-;ih~ss to say, only the Icast cxpc*nsive ritrt~i fastcsners should be used in the construction of molds, jigs, plugs for fiberglass parts, bracing, etc., that will never be part of a boat, hoatyarti
paint
It may sc-em ridi?ulous enipioyec3
visit tht* stockroom
to even mention something like this, but I have seen Monet fasteners in throw-away work rathrr than
use bronze
and
for stcsrI nails
and
screws.
Erlww Belts ____.. These
are ordinary
machine
al-r made
bolts with square or hexagonal heads and nuts, and they Monet. and galvanized iron. Longer bolts can be home-
in silicon bronze, a nut as a head by t breading a pirre of rod on both ends. screwing and pruning over the end of the rod to prevent the head nut from turning. the same material are used under the head and nut. Drilled holes should
madr
tliamt~ter
as the bolt,
the advantage
on one end, Washers of be the same
Screw hoits are used tor fastening
over drift
bolts
of being
Welt-equipped professional huiiders have a die. usually for a flat head. and
many backbone parts and have the wood shrinks. to be tightener, s.4 -**hen .. head their own tong bolts. They sometimes
able
the end
of the rod is heated
and
forged
to
shape.
Drift
Bolts
When bolts must bolt can be used.
be very long and a through-bolt is not practical or necessary, a drift They are made from a piece of rod and driven like a large nail. The the other has a washer or clinch ring under one end is pointed slightly by hammering,
51
F.4 S TENiNGS
Figure
lIrij/ hoit.\ (II’V tlrl’z~rl (11 (III (III~IP /‘IIorrlvr- 10 lock /ilc, /)nrt.c~o,q,rc~t/t~~r.
6-1.
a driving
head
diameters
shorter
formed
the hole must
than
by riveting
the end
the bolt to be driven
be less than
the diameter
of the rod. and should
The
hole
is made
have smooth
of the bolt for a tight.
about
two
sides. The size of
driving
fit. Be careful
not to henci the bolt above the timber when driving it. When a pair or a series of drift bolts is caiiecl for, it is best to drive them at an angle (Figure 6- 1) which locks the parts together
and
vanizeii
it on,
Carriage Thesr
enables
thrtn
to resist
strains.
Drift
are screw
frames
galvanized Bolt
are
made
of bronze
or gai-
Bolts bolts
with a round
button
head
and
under the head that keeps the bolt from turning in tnany jrarts of the structure such as to fasten dnd
bolts
and iron,
deck
beams
and
stainless
to (‘lamps
a square
neck on the shank
just
in the wood. Carriage bolts are used frames to floors, stringers to clamps,
or she!ves.
and
are made
in si!teon
b:onze.
steel.
Threads
Fastenings tnust
are used to hold parts together
be tight
in their
thrtwds. Bolts of this type are common stead
of cutting
smatter
are cheaper
in diameter
tight
in the hole.
but
this is sridc~m
and keep them
i~oirs. .I’l\is is not possible
than
today
to manufacture.
the outside
because The
moving:
structure,
threads
therefore,
formed
unthreaded
of the threads,
Bolts of this type are ail right the case in the hull
from
if the bolts have what are catted shank
by roiling
the fastening
so roiled-thread
in-
of these bolts
so the shargk cannot
when
they rolled
possibly
is in tension bolts should
only, not be
used. Wood Screws Fiat-head screws are used extensively in wooden boatbuilding and decking and many other parts. They are available from iron,
brass,
silicon
bronze,
and
are also produced
of Monel
for fastening planking stock made of galvanized and
stainless
steel.
is be
52
F/l S TENI NC3
FOR
I”
. IG3”
W-8
$fc.lo.
743” I, I
’ MAYBE
Figure Tests powc.
do. I4
,242”
2 &” do. I& 2 $f do. 10 3” tJo.zo
REDUCED HAeDv\/ooP
OrJE
in tension.
theoretically the planks
that screws
However,
in a for!.-and-aft
job of hu!i fastenings against
of leaking
stresses
stead
of nails
as planking
that
is thicker
that
have been accepted
than
than
.2613”
’ 7/6A”
do.
I8
70 I’
.29d”
9/s”
/-lo. 13
s/a”
.320”
%L
‘Jo. 4
3/dIt
FOR
DECti1t&3
thin
threads
when
the hull is being
The
This because
for hulls
for a given table.
wilt be subiect
by a gauge
for sheltered
waters.
bc made
fastenings
is
seas. (Such Indeed,
the
length,
Figure
puts more for using
wood to
screws in-
a screw can be used
6-2, shows the screw sizes and if you compare
nail of the same length, the boat nails, however, Monet in heavy gauges
suitable
for
to order.
6-2 to be on the heavy side, but the table
to rigorous
service,
or so for powerboats When
holding
Here the area of the wood
and decking,
nails are available must
the screw sizes in Figure
that
sizes may be reduced
bronze
they usually
boat.)
argument
with an ordinary boat Unlike common wilt be obvious.
but
through
a thick fastening
over the years for planking
thickness
driven planked
in place.
is a strong
accompanying
the greatest
of screws used as plank
in a conventionally
one.
fastenings,
develop
function of fastenings is not to keep ,.&\a.. L.X,.l, “l*rnrL;n-” ““‘““‘h *h-m ~nm past :hei:
is very important;
nails and Stronghoid
Some wilt consider
tion built
l/z’(
is to hold the parts a thin
a nail.
fastenings,
is meant
25
of any one of the screws
screw
planking
do.
resistance
seams
the fastenings
work resisting
Anchorfast
‘%A’
with sharp,
direction
primary
greater
%s”
‘/2 ”
the most important otf. but to pre~en:
is the cause
the gauge
37
do. 30
GAUGE
withdrawal
not too critical; from sprtngtng
working that bears
p.
6-2.
have shown
neighbors
“hd
.2lG7
1g -12FOR
* 176”
13/4”hlo. I2 2”
I Y4”
9
building
from
such as ocean
and other plans.
crttising.
The
boats of tight construc-
be guided
by the fastening
sizes specified. The preciable
size of a drilled extent.
hole
A general
for a screw rule
affects
the screw’s
to follow for determining
holding
power
to an ap-
the lead hole size is 90 per-
(SEE TEwl-)
FZOUbJD HEAr> SCREW
F 1
LAG OVAL
FLAT HEAD SClBti AUP
cent
of the diameter
HEAP SCREd
PLAWX
Figure
at the root of the screw
threads
The lead hole drill sizes in the table the threaded
frame,
Id
FVAME at= MOC’ERhJ PROFbR-rIO~S
softwoods. because
SCIZEW
part
of a screw
but it is best to check
wood to be used.
used
the table
Most builders
in hardwoods
are a guide
70 percent
for hardwood,
for fastening
sizes by driving
and
planking
in
such as oak,
is sunk
a few screws
6-3.
into
in samples
use just one drill for screws in mahogany
the
of the
or white cedar
planking and oak frames and rhib is satisfactory if the plank does not split in way of the unthreaded screw shank. If splitting does occur, you should drill through the plank with a body drill that is slightly under the actual screw diameter. The sizes for these are also shown in Figure 6-2. It is recommended that either laundry soap or beeswax be rubbed
in the threads
a lubricant
and
rt-duces
In thr best yacht and plugged of screws putty
the driving
practice
(Figure
in thinner
over to make
of screws, especially
planks
are set slightly invisible
was used for this purpose,
one of the many
polyester
pliers
sell plugs
of mahogany,
press
and
your
The
depth
thickness. recommended
for wood
with
the grain
parallel
mer.
If hit too hard,
the surface.
material
hull.
with
is better.
or you can
while the heads the heads
For many
like Duratite
compounds
or oak,
scraps for the
are dipped
below
but modern teak,
own from
This acts as
and over are counterbored
wood as the planking,
on the finished
auto body putty
of counter-bore
The plugs
into hardwood.
the screw holes in 5/H”planking
6-3) with plugs of the same
the fasicnings
make
when driving
labor.
buy
“Wood
Marine a plug
puttied
years white
lead
Dough”
hardware cutter
or sup-
for a drill
of wood. plugs
in thick
should
paint,
that
is to have a natural
to that
of the planking,
the plug may be crushed
be about
waterproof finish),
one-third
glue.
of the plank
or varnish
(the latter
set in the counterbored
and lightly
tapped
and it may swell later,
home
holes
with a ham-
possibly
breaking
51
F:l S7‘I*:l~VIN(;.s
Figure
the paint harden.
film or at least then
cut
6-4
presenting
the plugs
flush
an unsightly with
flush off the plug with one cut of the chisel.
the lend hole.
l‘hesr
l‘htw
lrv the c~outttcrsink
be done
can
arc patented
for the screw
and
the bond
a sharp
a day or so to
chisel.
Do not try to
take light cuts to determine of the plank
run of and
have
for the plug with a bit and then boring with separate
countersinks
head
Give
below the surface
by counterboring
operations
hint- lht~ opt7ations.
with
Rather,
the grain: then you will not chip off the plug to start all ovt’r again. Holes tot- screws are started
look.
the surface
bits or with bits that com-
that
patented
drill
the lead hole followed
ccmnterbores
that
drill
the lead
followed by the hole for the plug. (See Figure 6-3.) ‘I’he latter is used most tm-ause unnt’twwry to c.ountcrsink for a flat-head screw that is to have a plug over it. Plugs
can
ticularlv either
sorncrimcs
near
the strakrs’
hy carefully
reducing
become ends.
staggering
the gauge
crowded where
where
the plank
the holes
of the screw just
planking wid:h
if the width
enough
strakes
is least.
are narrow,
par-
This can be overcome
of the frame
to use a plug
it is
will permit
it or by
of the next smaller
size.
Hardware stores stock several types of wood screw pilot bits made for use in $!t 0 electric hand drills and made for screws up to about 2” Number 12. The two shown in Figure
6-4 are suitable
for drilling
first a lead hole for the threaded In most cases
with a countersink.
wootl~ so the lrit shown For
years
IIMII~
ample,
W.L.
Fuller,
of which
are only used
panels
that
other
Inc.,
with finishing
located
washers
should
screws,
a hole for the shank,
be driven
below
Street,
Warwick,
7 Cypress
drilling finishing
the surface Rhode
of the Island
round-head
screws are used in boats,
but,
for securing
rigging
masts,
fastening
a tang is made
will not permit
in light joinerwork
are removed items
for flat-head
then
countersinks, counterbores. plug cutters, and taper-point industry. Ordinarily these items are difficult to find locally.
they are the logical
screws and
the screw
arc only a few places where
the thin metal
countersinking
of the screw,
on the left is best.
02HHH. has been supplying drills to the hoarbuilding l‘hcre
and
part
from behind so that
time
where
to time
joinerwork. the screw
tangs
fastenings
for access
to wooden
a countersunk must
holes do not become
since
Oval-head
show and for securing
to such
In these places
hole.
for ex-
things
oval-head
as steering
gear
screws are used
too worn from
repeated
use. Stainless
steel screws labelled
18-8 have become
easily available
in the standard
con-
ia t~‘.-lS7‘F.~I.v~;S
figurations
of flat,
sold for less than
silicon
ing joinerwork, experience
round,
and oval head bronze
with them.
Stainless
are basically
sheet-metal
are threaded
for the entire
for bearing
Lag
therefore
they should
to use them but can
length
that
type screws
until
for fasten-
1 have greater
are also easy to find.
be used in fiberglass
of the shank,
these will be
be considered
below the waterline
steel “tapping”
fasteners
It is possible
parts.
These
Normally
so they are best in tension
they
rather
than
loads.
Screws
I.ag screws, can
screws;
but I am reluctant
wood screws.
5.5
sometimes
be turned
threads
callecl lag bolts.
in with
in the wood
a wrench.
until
lags are only used where diarnt~tcr in
Hanger
the holding
should
~galvariiztd
brass.
of the screw
for the length and
wood
that the
lost, therefore
A hole of the same
of the unthreaded
as for a regular
silicon
is gradually
or practical.
head
can wear
of a lag screw
are not possible
be sized the same it-on,
tightening
power
through-bolts
as the lag screw is bored
for the thread nlatlt*
are large wood screws with a square
Periodic
shank screw.
and the hole
Lag screws
are
bronze.
Rolts
‘I’hese are ldg screws ‘I‘hev art‘ used
having
principally
the upper
or head
for fastening
propeller
end of the shank shaft
stuffing
threatled
for a nut.
boxes and stern
bear.
ings and for holding tlown engines to beds. Bv bat king off the hanger holt nut, these fat- repair or rt~plactmenr without disturbing the screw in the parts mav ire rtmoved wood.
IIanger
lrolts are turned
the end of the threads ma&
of brass
Copper
Wire
Copper
nails
used
almost
planking both
anti silicon
either
to a nut run down
on the threads.
They
are made
in the form
exclusively
as rivets
the planking
and
of common
for fastening
in lapstrake
frames
are light
wire frames
construction, in size. The
nails
with flat heads.
to floors, and
stringers
planking
hole for the nail shouid
are
to frames, where
be drilled
without it being so small that the parts split or the nail bends while Drive the nail all the way in to draw the parts together; then the
be backed
up against
They
to frames
up with an iron
while
a copper
burr
is driven
over the point
the nail. A burr is simply a washer and it is important that it be a driving ,iail or else it will dance all over the place when the rivet is being formed. driven
to
are usually
bronrc*.
laps to one another
must
applied
lot krd together
Nails
as small as possible it is being dt-iven. head
in witlt a wrench
or to two nuts
the wood with a set. which
is nothing
but a length
of
fit over the The burr is
of steel rod with a
hole in the end slightly larger than the diameter of the nail. With nippers, cut off the point of the nail so that a length equal to one to one and a half times the diameter of the nail is left for riveting. the riveting
with many
Again
with the head of the nail backed
up with the iron,
light blows with the peen end of a machinist’s
hammer.
do
Heavy
‘I, 56
E;4S7XNINC5
1 r\lO@-FERFZous
bi ,4 IL ~IZTE~
. roq” . 134”
Figure
blows will bend resulting together.
6-5.
the nail inside
in a weak,
200
the wood.
loose fastening.
A bent
Light
blows
rivet
tends
form
to straighten
the head
and
under draw
stress,
the wood
Copper rivets are excellent for fastening planking when
for light work but are rather soft. Screws should be used the size of the frame will permit them to be completely
sunk.
Nails
than
Wood
Screws.
are
also thinner See Figure
screws
for the same
6-5 for sizes of copper
wire
job, nails.
a point
discussed
under
u Al
MOhlEL ANCHORFAST NAIL
tztf2zY ‘?.I0 Poltrr -2
&HIsEL POINT GAL’s! BOAT NAIL
Galvanized
Boat
As mentioned prcred shank
rhcm.
and cithrr
pointed
rhesc
Thr
are clinched
nail
is driven
against
with
clinch
without
used
in heavier
are cheap
nails
a blunt
nails are driven
and
PItiT
Fi.gure 6-6.
BOA-I- hIAlL
Nails
before,
from
BLUNT
GAL\/
or a chisel the frame
frames
and
and
across
the nail are buried
In frames project
the grain.
A nail
of acceptable
for plugs,
with a nail set and an attempt
the coating
Threaded
the heads
1 t/i R thick,
splitting
within
of either
the
frame.
the frame, quality
a set shaped
to fit over the entire
new type of fastening
for a boat
is a nail with a unique
the will
nails
Whether
are
or not
be driven
be made
of zinc by using
chisel-
the frames
Blunt-pointed
type nail must must
be ex-
rectangular
‘/j H to :!i” through
or the zinc coating. entirely
life can
head,
To prevent
the surface ting
too much button
up to about
about
the holes are countcrbored of the planking
not
a peculiar
with the grain.
edge
either
have
point.
so that the points
the chisel
cracking
fastenings
are forged,
below
to prevent
cut-
head of the natl.
Nails
A relatively
the nail is driven,
the grooves
wedges
the shank
that grip
on the shank
shape
to resist withdrawal.
the wood fibers (See Figure
annular
thread.
into countless
6-6.)
It is claimed
takes 65 percent more force to pull this threaded nail than an unclinched boat nail, 31 percent more than a clinched boat nail, and 3 percent more
AS
minute that
it
galvanized than a wood
screw. As these nails are avail ble in non-ferrous material, the objection to nails because of corrosion has been overcome. Some boatbuilders have used these nails for their one
planking, quarter.
and figures
show that some yards
have reduced
their
planking
labor
by
58
I;,4 SI‘ENINGS
Figure
6-i’.
There abroad. rolled
are quite Tests
a few kinds
have shown
on the nail
Massachusetts
tional
Co. and
Nickel nails
can
is used only
when
be identified
is not used
it is recommended
The
Monel
to bending
nails
when
Anchorfast
name
that
are stiffer
materials second than
form nails,
Anchorfast
the threaded
by an anchor
nails of other
on the market,
of the thread
make The
also makes
bronze.
that
02324.
drpendent
tant
nails
the importance
by the people
Bridgewater. chorfast
of threzded
and
some made
one of the best is
Independent is owned
nails
stamped
including
are made
on the head
be limited
the silicon
bronze,
to those making
Inc.,
Interna-
of Monel.
An-
of the nail.
In-
and calls them Stronghold, choice
Nail
by the
but if Monel made
them
of silicon more
resis-
driven.
For fastening planking, nails should be the same diameter as the screws they replace, or else more of them should be used. Pilot holes a!. recommended by the manufacturer should be drilled for all but the smallest sizes. The pilot hole size recommended is 50-70 percent of the nail diameter, depending upon the hardness of the wood, and about 80 percent of the nail length.
FASTENINGS
F&we
In Figure nails
usually
59
6-8.
6-5 are shown found
the sizes of Monel
in the stocks of distributors.
nail and screw gauges as a guide Figure 6-8 nail sizes for various sizes, of course. case.
must
Anchorfast Figure
for those wishing types of planking
be used with discretion,
and Stronghold S-7 is a comparison
silicon
of standard
to substitute nails for screws, and decking are tabulated.
as they do not necessarily
bronze
apply
and in These to every
60
FA .STEKIh'(;S
Figure Unusual Otller
Nail
than
6-9.
Fasteners
the copper
wire nails
othtxr copper
nails
unusual
is rlie squart-cuI
nails
that
struction for fastening ing the laps of clinker the layers
have
of double
nails
are used only
iron
held
the point
work
to know liails
ltw
against
planking
where
of rhe nail
fasreners
ing and
with softwoocl
iron
are two
can
Iw
used
in light con-
nail
frames.
some builders and
are glued
rogether
When
the iron
the
a heavy
is held propIt takes team-
is flush wirh the wood.
will be driven.
and
ttr-ive the nails against
by a helper.
90 degrees
is more
is turned
without
rcliahlr
franles
but once the routine
is established,
forming
is held against
head
is flush
much
longer
ing fastened
a clcnc-hrd
the length together.
This
When
the man all takes
of the trail should Figure
when
clout
nails
are used
but
as
plank-
used with hardwoods,
whrn
a
nail.
the point
a hook.
the hook and
with the wood.
rhe wood
a snug hole as described
through,
it into
into
‘l‘his works all right in the laps of softwood
like those of canoes.
first drill
AS rhe nail is driven and
back
adhesives.
than
For clench-nailing, the point
‘l‘hcst*
of planking
of the planking turns
the next
primary
nails.
there
art’ c~lf:;ichetl at a fast rate.
‘l‘he point
rivet
nail.
between
the layers
a good bond.
[he inside
of the nail
“clour”
t-arlier.
‘l‘he most common of thcsc
lo thin, flat frames such as seen in canoes, for fastenup to about 1, ” in thit.kness. and for “quilt” fastening
where
ensure
as mentioned
in boatbui!cting.
coppt.1
di.tgonal ICI
ust (1 ds rivers.
a pIact
planking planking
In the case of the latter.
erly,
CIt~rr~~Irirrg 11 c t~f)/o~r clr~trt IIC,II
is turned th-
be compared
6-Y shows the elements
is about
completes
practice
for riveting
over by holding
point
outside
earlier
and some trials
the wood the
the nail until to determine
to rhe thickness of the clenching
wire
arl iron against
to enter
driving
copper
the how
of the parts beprocess
and the
F,4 .S7‘f-;/YlNGS
3/4% (by I
‘/4” -KJ 3v (by
Figure
nail
available
lengths
s-k?xr2” LorcrG 2,2-4, llq”) Lot-lb
3
“roves”
power
C‘UI copper
of a square
‘I‘remonl
which
have
ml* thick
hh
+icK
\hi;trk Ooml rrtlr%S
\i/tiilrt
Nail
Co..
Massat~husc~~~s 0257 1 antI 1)uck ~l‘rap Woodworking. colnvillt~. Maim- 04X49. ‘I’rtmonr is also a tiistril)utor for ~rirditi0Ilal square sllaf>t* and tlishetl
2.7
‘I49
C-10. 7‘rtrfilt~orrfrl
from
+
61
the same
nail is a great
21 Kl;I) boat
Wareham, Road. LinI head
nails with a distinctive
funcrion
deal more
Elm Street. ::P, Cannan
as our “burrs.” than
a round
The
holding
wirr nail,
but the
traditional use of square nails i\ as rivets. As with copper wire nail rivets. a snug hole should be drilled and ht~ading should he done with light blows of the peen hammer. for when the dished side is toward the wood, ir serves 10 ten‘I’he di:hetl rove is unique. sion 111~rivt.1. ‘l’hc heads planking.
~hrrefore
Miscellaneous
1 1 ” in diametrr.
tap drills.
t-tc.; then,
are made with flat. and stainless sterl. Staples, pieces
for many pensive
applied
of wood other
in Figure must
6- 10 should
be suitably
hc countt~rsunk
into the
shaped.
tyl)es ot fasrencrs
made of prol)t-r as through-fastt,ners
i1IY
through
iron
Fasteners
Thert~ are ‘1 few other I hey useful
of nails shown
111~ hutking
that have some uses in hoat construction when materials. Machine screws are bolts and are non-corrosive for light work. Usual sizes arr from Numbt-r 6 (a fat 5/n”) up
Figure
6- 11 is a rahle showing
will he times round,
with hand,
when
1aminatir.g.
such jobs.
steel, otherwise
when
vou will find
and oval heads. elecrri,.
bronze
or Monel
this very handy.
and in brass.
or air-operated
positioning
If the staples
hole sizes for clearance
fiberglass
chrome-plated guns,
brass,
screws bronze,
woven materials,
later.
musl
ultimate
The
Machine
can he used IO hold thin
or other
are to be removed be used.
and for
and
they can he of inexstaple
that
I have
62
F/l S-I’ENINGS
BODY
$ -I-A9
DRILL-5
MACHINE
tb.
sCfEb&T
r&i
6
4
72
.ry3
@oLTS
TAf DlzlLL
-M?EAD~ pf3z INCH
DIAM.
SIZE
@R USa ~TYWDARP
b40. 30
“‘ZEt-
do- 20
32
t&u2
1 .a6
250
‘14”
%3” II211
I &I. i3 I F
2
2(/64”
0 u ’ yzff
QR ‘3/g,” 5/1df 23/64’
16 13
.500
do-
7
Jo.
10
-375
G-1 1.
seen is a rather with
32 20
.3125
5hkl if
Figure
1
an air
staples
have
the edges
long Monel
gun.
been
and
wire staple
with coated
ttlc’ staple head will sink below used to fasten plywood decking
many
otht1-r similar
plywood
legs that
defy withdrawal.
Driven
the surface of fir plywood. These that is glued to beams and around
parts.
Stapling is the fastest method of securing parts and is quite satisfactory when used in conjunction with an adhesive. For many years rivc.ting remained a method of fastening used only by professional
UNLX!L? HEY PtJD D UNDiS AU
MACHINE
BOLT
(HEY!
HEAd
MACHIClE
l3OL-r
(FLAT
HtAC’)
CLINCH
04?
5)QUARE
HANr3EE
IdeAD
-LT
WAE.Uf3-E
Figure 6-12. 111011Iv usd huilrting.
Bolts in
corn-6ouI
-
F.4SI‘E:NINGS 63
Figure 6-13. ‘l‘ht~ fmrut~ o/ II /into nusiliu,y Iiorltd iI1 Ilrts tvxt. metalworking
shops.
now be done by opc.rated riveters. serted
but due to the invention
back-up. holding
together
rivets.
minor
riveting
Most hardware stores carry these amatfaur. .I’his kind of fastening is a one-man job, because hole
and
srcur-cd
f’op rivets arc- estensivcly application
of “pop”
rivets
thfh
unto ;I drilletl
typical
yclt~ht, illu.,trctlirg /At*u.w.~o/ bolts mt’n-
hull.
the samt
employed
is in securing the deck,
from
and
rub rail.
extrusion and the rivets are of a 4milar water, and generally for fastening thin
allov. parts,
and
hand-
pop rivets are in-
side without
in production
a molded
jobs can
tht- need
fiberglass
for any
boatbuilding.
d~~ck tha:
fi:s
The latter
is usually
the
an aluminum
A rivet alloy
Their use should be limited to above the say an assemblv having a total thickness
such as aluminum of no greater than “h “. Those who make their own metal enclosures, alloy C;ISYSfor clcctrical switc.hhoards, will find that pop rivets make the job go a lot easier
and
faster.
Fastening
Metal
‘1’0 avoid
galvanic
bearings,
rudderposts.
deck.
Fittings corrosion.
fasten
seacocks,
untlc7water
bron7r
and
propeller
shaft
f)arts such struts
with
as shaft silicon
logs, stern bronze.
On
fasten
silicon
stainless steel trim and hardware with stainless steel, bronztb fittings with fittings with hot -dipped galvanized fastenings, Marinium bronze. galvanized
fittings
with stainless
Although grt
steel or Monel.
it is not easy to find.
and
aluminum
you should
alloy
fittings
use ‘Type 316 stainless
with stainless steel when
steel.
you can
it.
Adhesives Adhesives.
used either
the best fasteners.
alonr
However,
or in conjunction it must
with mechanic-al
be remembered
that
fasteners.
an adhesive
are some of
is not a cure-all
64
l.~:~.S’l‘E:NIN(;.S
and
that
ture
for it to provide
(when
pressure,
the
and
Until
curing
World
l-)ro~/
ones.
glued
up with
War
This
II there
fact
as directed, and
with attention working
to mix-
time,
clamping
were
water-rclsistant
only
protected
in boat
adhesives
thousands
from
of hollow
moisture
construction
by varnish
for interior
rather
masts or paint.
joinerwork
than
and
&later-
booms
were
Water-resistant
that is not subject
to
is prote-*-:-’ ‘-’ finish coating. CLCU-wit11 The modern counterpart is marketed Plastic Resin Glue (formerly Cascomite). This urea resin glue,
as Elmer’s
which
consists
proof
types,
properly
be used temperature
notwithstanding,
it, being
and that
by Borden
it must
is two-part),
period.
glue still has a place wetting
strength
adhesive
of a powder has
good
that
is mixed
wnrking
with water,
time,
and
is less expensive
provides
a joint
than
that
the water-
is colorless
when
fitted.
The
breakthrough
development
from
water-resistant
of a resorcinol
consumers
as Elmer’s
resin
Waterproof
to waterproof
glue,
which
Glue
(formerly
adhesives
is also marketed
canoe
with
by Borden
Cascophen).
the
for small
It is packaged
in two
parts, a dark purple resin and a light-colored powder, and is best mixed by weight as instructed. It will produce a joint strnnger than the surrounding wood, but the joints should cinol
he well fitted glue
fully to avoid available.
must
glue
is often
to boatbuilders
until
too much
used IO secure resin,
and
curing
has taken
, so the instructions
on by mixing
as a ltrea-formaltirhytic
benefit
be applied
in hot climates
excess rest hrought
Rcsorcinol
Described great
and pressure
sets up quickly
Glue
builders
place.
as well.
hulls.
waterproof
Aerolite
care-
the time
of cold-molded is another
Resor-
be studied
glut* for use during
planking
Aerolite
to aircraft
should
glue of
is a two-part
adhesive, very easy to mix and apply. One part is a powder that is mixed with water to the consistency of an easy spreading paste. The powder has a shelf life of two years; the paste’s shelf life is one to three
months.
which
has an unlimited
shelf
life.
other
surface
with
the
adhesive
is wetted
is strong,
temperatures
e\‘cll without
down
to 60°F.
The second
‘I‘he paste catalvst.
The
is a water-like
liquid
on one surface,
two
heavy clamping, without
part
is spread
surfaces
are
it is gap-filling.
catalyst,
and
then
then
mated.
the This
and it can be used in
heat.
Some of tl~r epoxy resins are among the best adhesives for use in building wooden boats and parts. .I‘hcy can even be used for joining wood and polyester fiberglass parts to polyester achieve
bond,
out of the joints. than
resorcinol
various
additivrs
from running. ditives epoxies
that
Epoxy
fiberglass.
a good
and
Not needing
pressure
for laminations
and
that
can
pastes
suited
epoxy
adhesive
simpler
to put together
high-strength
hulls
1: 1 ratio
a strong
require
not
enough
SC)that
joint ( epoxy
multiple epoxy
of West
planking
to proper
105 epoxy
is easier
layers.
viscosity
r&n
pressure
that
mixtuie
planked
hulls or any other
can be used in temp:>ratures
compound
is IJnipoxy
epoxy
down glue.
to use
There
are
to prevent
have several
of resin-to-hardener
to
it does not run
On the other hand, there for use as is. Arcon E- 152 and Arcon
or diagonally
is a 1: 1 ratio
and
it does
to tell you about.
for strip
epoxy
with
to thicken
that are thick enough
Tech
strong, if used thick
to ensure
the makers
thev will he glad
spreadable T-88
be used
For instance.
available
is extremely
it is gap-filling
it
such adare other E-154 are
use. Chem
that could to 35°F.
not be Another
~‘:I.ST~:.‘L’I.L;(;S
Caution
to Epoxy
Users
So much
is written
about
principaily
as an adhesive, must hardeners,
especically
and breathing manufacturers’ I have
and
the material
it would
be remiss
be used with caution.
is so valuable not
Avoid
to warn
contact
to boatbuilders, that
epoxy
resins,
with unprotected
skin
who were unhappy,
so beware!
for Adhesives
Most general
and marine
Waterproof
Glue
type plastic
laminatts
quarts
resins
that
the fumes released by epoxies as they cure. These words are to reinforce directions that are often taken lightly. I have never had a problem, but
seen others
Sources
epoxy
65
hardware
stores
as well as the various
are handled
carry
brands
to wood and metal. by Harbor
Sales
Co.,
Elmer’s
Plastic
of contact
The
Resin
cement
Elmer’s
glues
1401 Russell
Glue and Elmer’s
for sticking
in quantities
Street,
Formicalarger
Baltimore.
than
Maryland
21230. Acrolire
is a (:iba-Geigy
Specialty
CI,.,
P.0.
(‘astern
L1.S.
from
product
Box 424.
distributrci
Fullerton,
Woodcraft
Supply
in the> lJ.S.
California
by Aircraft
92632.
Corp..
313
and
Montvalr
Spruce
is available Ave.,
and in the
Woburn,
Massac~huscc IS 0 I HOI Following mm1
arc* the* names
anti
addrf~ssrs
of thy
firms
produ(.ing
the
epoxies
Industrial
Park.
iont~tl:
Arcon I+ I52 and Arcon E-15-1. Allied East W~~ymouth. M;tssachust*tts 02 189. (:he~rn-Tech
‘1’-H8, Chem-Tech
Inc.,
Resin Nj9
Corp., I~ancl~r
Wcymouth Road,
Chagrin
Falls,
Ohio
44U22. Wrsr Michigan
I05
fyxy
Ilnipoxv 33561,
atlhcsivc,
Chugwn
Brothers.
Inc..
706
Martin
900 Fourth
Street,
Strecr.
Bay
City,
-18706. ’
glue.
Kristal
Kraft,
Inc..
Palmetto,
Florida
Chapter
7
‘1‘0 properly
build
must
be (11awn
countless
“how
a boat
from
full sire. IO build”
l)lans,
‘l’his fact articles.
sional
boatbuilders.
but otIlcrs
has been but
pit-tic)11 of a boat that instructions drscription of thr work involved. once the paratively
the hull lines
and
repeated
the job
to thr
point
is so important
of monotony
IO the successful
find
it IO be fascinating
work.
Either
way, it is true that
be assured that the combuilding is time well spent
and will never be rqretted. The full-size drawings from which molds are made are especially valuable when more than one boat is to be built plans,
or for the construction
OIW must “laitl
ctown”
shipyard loft,
lofting. trussed.
trace
thr history
down,”
floor was painted
of the floor there served Hull The
to discover
floor-. ‘I’ht- full-si?tof a floor above
wt‘rc taken
where
the hull must
drawing
conform
board.
the work,
flat white
or light gray, fixed batten
sometimes having
so to speak,
in a
hence
the terms
“mold-
thr mold loft was preferably and there were windows
to provide maximum light. The wooden sacred so somt~ vards prohibited the wraring
was a permanently
hull lines are
of some sort, thus it was a
drawings,
off.” ‘I‘hr roof above to obstruct
why tht- full-size
a workshop
off the full-size
and “taking
so t herr were no columnss
sides and o\~tAratl smooth. sufficiently The
of shipbuilding
always consisted
or templates
” “laying
class boat
and templates from the same
tolerances.
on the ” trrold loft”
almost
Molds
of a one-design
close dimensional
in com-
in boatbuilding would br incomplete without a Thp job is distasteful to some, even among profes.
plans are on hand one becomes impatient, but few hours used to properly prepare for the actual
to reasonably
plan
part of the construction
floor
was
of hard-soled
dull black, an absolute
on all
level
and
shoes.
and on one edge straight
edge that
as a baseline. Lines
work of enlarging
the plans
from
the scale of the blueprints
to full size is termed
I.lh’ES
mold
lofting,
for it is from
hull and various lines
that
Figure
reading
sections
as seen
the waterline
the deck line,
from
from.
He also needs that
for the shape
interesting,
and
characterize the profile
from
a hull. (the
and
are obvious,
the shape of the boat between
conveniently
buttocks.
establish
around
hulls
are the sheerline
of the bottom
for the builder the three
the architect
and
ends and
points
Altholtgh
to construct
lines.
simply
or
is viewed),
of the hull as seen from above.
between
these lines,
from
with the first three
These
outline
to aid the
because
prowling
most of you are familiar
of the
the different
be understood,
of the lines
they are not sufficient
are important,
the hull shape
waterlines,
really
the side,
the job more
magazines
in boatyards
are made
should
Some
a gull’s eye view of the outline
lines
on planes
plan
prepared.
that
molds
as seen from the side at the same time the sheerline
these define
that
to make
lines
of yachting
or stored
by the designer
of deck
above
Of course,
7-1 has been
construction
lines drawn
drawings
the architect’s
the desibm
under
parts.
constitute
beginner
edge
other
these
67
:IND L-I k.I.VIi 110 Wh’
To provide
a hull points
to
cuts the hull into pieces
for dimensions.
These
planes
are called
and diagonals.
If a hull could be lifted straight up out of the water without the resulting hole filling in with water, the shape of the edge of the hole would be the same as the shape of the boat at the surface
of the water.
it is one of the most important architect
then
convenient want
divides
spaces,
load waterline.
the depth
Then
are vertical
and
conveniently
centerline.
Finally,
the
diagonals,
because
they
points
having
it has been points
outlines
or shapes and
established the many shape
above
of the hull,
CI(‘~OSSthe hull have been formed
by vertical
diagonal
fore-and-aft
wherever
a section
points
of the hull
of intersection
these
actually drawn
planes
lines
no usable planes
sections.
for the builder
called planes.
dimensioned of the hull,
and
for the purpose are established
the fore-and-aft
intersecting
to the
are
vertical
signifirant
points
for the to the
side of thr
these
and
the length
to intersect
are called
and
are drawn
one of the fore-and-aft
it is possible
as the architect
drawn
as many
the into
parallel
to each
horizontal
lines running
that
located
outboard
are
and
subdivision
the load waterline
buttocks,
to provide
transverse
intersects
beiow
evenly to the
lines are fore-and-aft mentioned
the load waterline
For further
horizontal planes which, because they are parallel
planes
diagonal
are located as is possible.
on the surface
planes
dnd
called
spaced
of inclined
are drawn
for the boatbuilder
vertical tical,
edges
planes
like the others,
All of the aforesaid although
of the huil above
there
of the boat
‘l‘hese planes,
this line is called
by the designer.
and draws the edges of additional better, are also called waterlines
of something
centerline
On the boat, lines drawn
of until
lines.
The
the horizontal,
A point lines,
on the
verhull
and by means
to make molds
is of
for the exact
has it designed.
Sections may be compared to slices of bread. Just as is the case with the sections on a shapely boat, the slices through an old-fashioned rye loaf are all different, for the . . shape is ever-changing from end to end. A vessel’s shapr. :hen, LQIl c-- be transm:tted :nto three-dimensional form by making full-size templates of the sections. When these are set up at each section’s respective station the same as called for in the lines drawing, vessel’s shape in skeletal form has been established. The vessel’s shape is represented this manner
just
as a loaf of bread
would
keeping the spacing of the remaining slices Figure 7-1 has been included to pictorially
be if every
other
the same. show waterline.
slice was removed, buttock,
diagonal,
a in
while and
Y x : 2 2P 4, i cl 1 n i I7’
Iy /
F
I
9
3 I
?,J
1
)I: /I t ;i
k,
\ \ ‘1
I/ ;I ! I: j~ !!
I 1 7r 1
1
.;:-q> ,T ’ i
\-,. \
l .x.7
k i : 3 6’ i ;i A --- i
; i/l 1
\ \;\
\
-
...J
b
‘1: : 3
i’,, J_L
I/
iJI I (J z n i
4
\--\
7.
i+;
\ >
\
,A v A, ‘, -Jx.. ‘\ --. \\ X!
.+=-y _ 7 ‘! ._ ‘Lo.-\L:a 7r --y’
‘i :: C’
,I /),. -5
‘i
Ll 0 F i
69
LINES AND L.-IYING DOWN sectional
planes
the various body
plan
diagonal,
a solid block
The shapes
it may
be seen
or waterline
Figure necessary
are
shown
dimensions
these lines,
any specific dicated,
how
a point
all the
lines
Note
that
spacing
board,
lines.
Because
tion,
that
and
a table
of the nature
is, on the body
Sometimes
of diagonals,
in Figure
7-1, and
foregoing
together
with
their
the
to build
a boat
have
worked
out for
and
not been
buttocks,
dimensions
For laying
a buttock,
plane.
do not attempt
of waterlines,
of dimensions
on
and on the
hull shown
in the
of the stem,
areas,
wherever
sectional
(Incidentally,
for illustration
as well as offsets for the profile
the stern
is created
for the same
mentioned
were sawn into pieces
by the shaded
on the hull
them.
as they are purely
of a hull
are shown
by an athwartship
lines drawing
to reproduce
purpose.)
half model
of the planes
is intersected
7-2 is the architect’s
on this plan from
as though
planes.
and stations
are in-
for the profile
angle
out all the fore-and-aft
location
of
curved
can only be indicated
in sec-
plan.
it is possible
to define
the shape
of a hull
without
the use of diagonals,
such as in Figure l-7. In the case of a really simple hull with straight-line sections (see Figure 7-3), the sheer, deck line, chine, and/or profile provide a sufficient number of points lines,
from
which
buttocks.
to make
and
the frames
diagonals,
or molds.
This
as will be explained
eliminates
a little
the need
further
ior water-
on.
Abbreviations Before
we go any
reader
it should
furtlirr,
hulls have abbreviations
for words
to be familiar
bc pointed
out that
sets of lines
plans
for
and it is a help for the
with them.
Centerline
C.L.
Waterline
W.L.
Buttock Diagonal
Butt. or butt’k Diag.
Baseline
B.L.
Station Frame
Sta.
Deck
Dk.
Fr.
Length
over all
Length
of load
L.O.A. L.W.L.
waterline
Section
Sect.
Displacement
Displ. fl
Pounds Longitudinal Center
many
used thus far in this chapter,
center
C.B.
of buoyancy
or L.C.B.
C.G.
of gravity
Offsets An offset is simply straight
another
line of reference
in the case of the plan
name
for a dimension,
such as a baseline view of the lines.
and
they are always
for the elevation Dimensions
drawing
are tabulated
taken
from
or the centerline because
it is obvi-
a
...* .?I.; :-I z <.I 17 5 Hi ; E \,, 3 gi, 1 Iju
,L.5 i-j- . j- 3--s j &’G,f !Y-..-0r7 .*! 2 .#*.I 1*/ 3‘“,; & -\_ /’ 1 !I \< \! ;i ;\ ---t 66 :I *_: I\ :i \ iYl k’ ’t! 4-2I.4 U’ “.! ;\ 2: 0 i’~ ‘C F dlY -. . . 57.A PA 1 ,’_ is
;i “I f’
/ ?1 /: j> /I:A ‘4
,;,, / a’ / i 3
4
a 2
i:
l:
‘a ? 61 :
i@ :i /I$ t
- +
1
-
/ ~0 ?i ‘j,
2i 81 5’ 01 -
(,:
1;
&. i 0: ,I:/ ’
t
5
4
i ,; ,’ ‘8 1
i
.
fj-
I, i’
1
ii i
‘,
!
/
-----
‘Q j
J .a
w
o’r PC 9: :u “0’
/ ‘I
~ I
L:t-
$i L-----j-~-. --I .%A’ .L’ i
;/I
b
i -1
0
I
“I’ !.
I
j I
I,” \h
I ,
n‘s / ‘1i !J I,’I’ ii7 Jn. ?+a ‘3 . ’ ‘I I\L4. *4, b \I\
*
1
j
~
LINES AND LAYING DOWN
-
FLAT tkTTOM
L.JEc-
loor
---VEE 6OTTOM LINES
Figure ously impossible To eliminate
71
7-3. Slrai~tll-sectrhncd
boats ham> simple
PLIH
lines.
to write them all on a lines plan and not have them become confused.
a multitude
of fractional
to write offsets in feet-inches-eighths five and three-eighths
inches.
dimensions, of inches.
it has been made general practice
For example,
2-5-3
means two feet,
(You will find that you will read them automatically
once you have tried a few.) Some architects lines and offsets and read some dimensions
pride themselves to one-sixteenth
on the accuracy
of their
of an inch; this is shown in
the offset table by a plus sign or lV$after the “eighth” numeral.
thus we get 2-5-3+
or
One of these days metric offset tables will make life a lot simpler than strug-
2-5-31/j.
gling with feet, inches,
and all those 64 fractions
The use of the offset table will be explained
of an inch.
further along,
but at this time it would
be well to note that the lines for a vessel’s hull are almost always drawn to the outside surface
of the ht.&. Consequently
fiberglass
skin, or aluminum
when molds are made,
of the wood or
must be deducted
from the molds edges.
The lines for metal ships or large wooden vessels with built-up
sawn frames are drawn
to the inside of the plating deducting
the thickness
or steel p!ating
the thickness
or planking
in order
from the full-size drawing of every frame,
drawn when sawn or metal frames are employed, before The
to save the mold
loftsman
from
all of which must be
for each frame is individually
shaped
installation. hull lines discussed
waterlines,
buttocks,
above are for a round-bottomed
and diagonals
involved
depending
upon
boat,
the number
of
the size of the boat.
Other hull types have fewer lines. Figure 7-Y shows an ordinary flat-bottomed rowboat having but four fore-and-aft lines, namely, the deck and sheer, and two views of the
72
LJNES A ND LA YING DOWN
chine,
which is the corner at the intersection
the lines for a v-bottomed of a bottom
profile.
were curved. established
of the side and bottom.
boat having lines similar
The sections of this particular
to a flattie except for the addition boat consist of straight
other points would be needed to draw the sections, by waterlines,
buttocks,
Also shown are lines. If they
and these would be
and diagonals.
The Mold Loft Although
we have said that the builder’s
thing is to find a place to do the job.
first step is lofting the hull, in reality the first
At a minimum,
or more feet longer than the boat in one direction, to the dist-rnce from the baseline there is one, equipped
plus some space
boatyards
the space should be at least four while in the other it must be equal
to the highest point of the sheer, or top of cabin if
on all sides for working
use a level wooden floor maintained
around
sanded smooth and coated with flat light gray or white paint. an amateur level space,
the drawing.
Well-
for just this purpose that is It is too much to ask that
have such facilities at his disposal, so the next best alternative would be a such as a floor or platform, where paper or plywood may be used to lay
down the lines. A few years PRO while visiting boatyards I noticed lofting being done on a very heavy, light bplge paper that was also being used for patterns for one-off parts. This material
was 200.pound
“Alexandritr”
template
paper,
12 square feet per pound. In
each case it was purchased
from a paper goods supply house in a nearby city. The in. formation about the paper is given here, but the amateur builder will probably not be able to cope with the cost of this 72” wide material. Each roll is said to weigh between 500 and 6Otl pounds -- a lifetime
supply indeed.
The drawing supply people make a buff detail paper of acceptable quality, available up to 48 ” and 54” in width, in rolls of 10. 20. and 50 yards and priced reasonably. Some of the paper-faced building panels are also all right, and SO is plywood, as mentioned above, in standard-size panels that may be arranged edge to if several pieces are used to edge to make any size desired. Whatever the material, make up the required size, the pieces must be secured against movement.
Lofting
Tools
The tools for lofting are few and simple. are used, sharpened Colored different
To draw sharp lines, flat carpenter’s
pencils
to a chisel point so a thin line may be drawn for a long distance.
pencils may also be used to advantage types of lines. For measuring,
to make it easier to distinguish
a steel tape is ideal for long lengths,
between but an or-
dinary folding six-foot rule will do, and the rule can also be used to lay off many short dimensions. A large carpenter’s square, either as manufactured or homemade out of :‘/H ” or % ” wood, is needed for drawing lines perpendicular to other lines, such as for station
lines in relation
with a regular
to the base and waterlines. You may also erect perpendiculars or improvised beam compass, as will be shown later. The adjustable
bevel shown in Figure 3-1 will be found handy,
as will a straightedge
six or eight feet
long, which you can make yourself from a piece of thin wood. For marking
the really
LINES AND LA YING DOWN long, straight
base and waterlines,
you should use either a mason’s chalk line, pencil-
ing the line on the floor before the chalk rubs off, or a length line stretched intervals
tightly between
73
two nails,
marking
of about three feet, to be connected
of light, strong fishing
in points directly
under the cord at
later with a straightedge.
Battens Fair curves have no bumps and are pleasing set of battens,
which
are nothing
more
white pine or other such wood. These than the line to be drawn.
to the eye. To draw them, you must have a
than straight,
When the available
tens can be made up of two pieces connected making
a tapered
square-edged
pieces of clear
should be at least two feet longer at each end
glue splice of about
stock isn’t long enough for the job, batin the middle,
18” to 2’ in length.
pieced if you make sure there is a fair overlap For best results, you should use as stiff a batten
where the curve is least, by Or the line itself may be
over the length of a couple of stations. as will go through
all the points on the
curve, for a stiff batten will tend to fair itself unless unduly forced, whereas a supple batten can be passed through all the points and not lie fair. It is difficult to say just what size battens should be used, as the correct
size depends so much on the length of
the lint and the character of the curve. A batten 14 ” to $1 ” thick by 1 th ” to 2” wide used on the flat is suggested relatively
easy curves like the sheerline.
the battens at the ends somewhat,
For certain
for
curves it may be necessary to taper
with ail the taper cut on one edge. For curves in the
plan view, also known as the half-breadth
plan, something like I$$” x 1 Mor th ” x 1 t,4 ” used on the flat, possibly tapered at the ends, or :?t ” square and untapered might be tried.
Like a lot of boatbuilding
selection
of batten
operations,
accumulated
experience
sizes. If you have a table saw, start by making
heavy side until you get the hang of it, ripping
the strips narrower
will aid in the
the battens on the as needed.
Curves
such as sections. the stem profile. and similar shapes will be drawn with shorter battens, probably ‘j/H”and 14 ” square, and inasmuch as these curves sometimes have harder bends in the middle than at the ends, such as around the turn of the bilge, they may have to be tapered
in the middle in order to make a fair curve that touches all the
points. A batten is held in place wiih finishing it. Not necessary
nails driven on both sides of it, not through
but very desirable
by any means,
from
the standpoint
of readily
sighting the shape of a batten when sprung to a curve, is a coat of flat black paint. The contrast
of the dark batten
against the light-colored
floor or paper will help detect a
line that is not fair.
The Grid By examining waterlines,
the table of offsets,
buttocks,
lines and are measured the straight
diagonals,
Figure
sheer,
7-2. it will be seen that dimensions
for the
and profile curves are laid out on the station
above the baseline
and out from the centerline.
lines that must be laid down in the beginning.
Therefore,
it is
This group of lines, called
the grid, is shown in Figure 7-4. You will note in Figure 7-5 that the grid is set up in a
MAUI.!
A SCRtES
lfJ?tCTLY
OF
Pear J-r5
b4VER
CURL7
11ol-n srR.ocl5
-DRAV/ltdG D a, m
A STPAIGHT
“;LO,‘“L” T
4
T
y
LINE-
.-, AIL
--
VJlTb-4 5HARP
POdT
--
-BEAM I
cdcq
FLOOR, JfRCTCntV bCTwee~ t-JAILS
COMF’ASS
-
SHCCR
K-f-l
*Al-&~
I t
. a
e 1
jZIXj ‘;I\
-
;iL,F
i ,,,,,,,, /,,“‘I[;; ,j I \ 1,
‘\
6
.
\
al
+
-THE
Figure 7-4. The grid for full-sized out on a suita ble.floor.
(
I
._ t
. BA5E BA7-t-d (OPTlOtiAL)
“GRID”-
hull lines is comprised
of straight lines and is laid
0
.
/T
met6.w mctt
FOE
CLAEWy
THE
HAL/E
DIAGo~IALS
hJOl-
BEt?!d
AtiD
BUlTOC<
I
5HOWd
L HALF BUEAOTH OF 5l-EM FACE
Figure 7-5. The lofied hull lines are arranged d$ferently,from plan in order to save space on the mold lqft floor.
those on an architect Ys
76
LINES AND LA YING DOWN
compressed
form relative
to the paper
plans:
the half-breadth
over the profile drawing to save space and to minimize
plan is superimposed
the distances one must crawl on
hands and knees when laying the lines down. (Some professionals crawling
around
swivel casters.) the baseline
the loft floor by building Thus the grid is started
for the profile
save themselves from
a dolly of padded plywood mounted
by drawing a straight
view and the centerline
on low
line that doubles both as
for the half-breadth
plan.
The
spacing of the stations is laid off along this line and the stations are drawn in perpendicular
to it.
The perpendiculars beam compass,
may be drawn either
or an improvised
has been used as a practical
with a set of trammel
a regular
one, and is done as follows. Mark a point A (Station
example
in Figure 7-4);
a center., strike an arc B equidistant From the intersection
2
then using the compass with A as
to each side of point A. Lengthen
compass and, using each of the points B as a center, the baseline.
points,
the arm of the
strike two intersecting
C draw a straight
arcs above
line through A on the base. The
line CA is perpendicular to the base. This method can be used at each station, or it can be used at only one, with the resulting right angle used to build a large square for drawing
in the remainder
The spacing
of the stations
of the straight
waterlines
plan and they are drawn in parallel
perpendicular in profile
to the baseline.
waterline
for reference,
waterline,
except at the ends of the boat. Therefore,
the two end stations
With
lines
the exception
of the load
to draw the profile
view of the
mark off the waterline
spacing on
it is not usually necessary
and again one or two stations
to the base.
is taken from the architect’s
from the ends and draw them in
with a straightedge. As mentioned above, the offsets for the curves are dimensioned as heights above the baseline or distances out from the centerline as the case may be. Some of the dimensions will be long enough
that you will not be able to tell readily whether
the end of
your rule is exactly on the line or not. To be sure of this and to save time, some builders nail a batten against the under side of the baseline as shown in Figure 7-4. The end of the rule can then be butted against it when making measurements.
lnstead
of a batten, a nail may be driven at each intersection of a station with the base. You will find either way to be very helpful and, to say the least, easier on the knees.
Sheerline
and Deck line
Either the sheerline
or the deck line will be the first curved line to be drawn and faired.
For the sake of argument 7-2, shows is dimensioned
we will select the sheerline, above the baseline.
reads 2-11-O for the height of the sheer:
Starting
which the table of offsets, Figure at the bow, Station
0, the table
so with the rule against the nail or batten
measure up two feet, eleven inches above the base on Station 0 and make a mark. Move the rule over to Station 1. read 2-7-2 from the table and make a mark 2’7%” above the base. The process is repeated similarly at all of the stations. With all the points marked, it is time to select a batten with which to draw the sheerline,
placing
it so that it extends beyond the length of the boat at each end. With
one edge of the batten against the sheer point on a station boat we are using as an example, the batten
at Station
amidships,
Station
drive nails to hold the batten in place.
2, then at Station
4, alternating
3 of the
Now fasten
towards the ends of the boat un-
LINES AND LA YING DOWN til the batten is sprung to and fastened ject beyond the boat, After the batten
at all the points. The batten’s
should be sprung
to extend
is secured for the entire
to the unfairness
and note the result.
ends, which pro-
the curve fairly and then nailed.
length,
are any unfair or lumpy spots in the curve.
77
sight along it to see whether there
If so, pull the nails at the stations adjacent
If the batten
moves very far from one of the
points and still does not appear to be fair. pull other nails and make adjustments,
giv-
ing here and taking there until the resulting
line is pleasing to the eye. You may expect
points to be out of line occasionally
the architect
scale
compared
because
to the full-size job;
thus errors
However,
it must be remembered
to obtain
a sweet and true curve without
The deck line is faired measured
Profile
has drawn the lines to a small
are bound
to creep
that the batten should be shifted
into the work.
as little as possible
hard spots.
in the same manner
after it has been laid down from offsets
out from the centerline.
and Rabbet
After the deck line has been drawn in and faired, you can continue working on the profile plan, drawing and fairing the profile (bottom of keel), the stem, and the rabbet. The rabbet line is normally
found in traditional
wooden construction,
although
it
may or may not exist in other types of wooden hull construction, or in fiberglass or metal hulls. For these latter hulls, a similar line may be referred to by some other name. In any rasc, the lines plan will make all this clear. The profile and rabbet must be faired in so that they will meet the relatively curves of the stem and stem rabbet.
way 1.0 ensure that the two sets of curves will meet fairly is to extend profile
forward beyond
quick
INith these bow curves not yet drawn in, the best
the point of tangency
note that this has been done in Figure
the rabbet
with the stem and its rabbet.
and
You will
7-5.
The stem profile and the stem rabbet are drawn with a thin batten, as mentioned previously. When points for the stem curves have been marked in from the dimensions on the lines plans, a nail is driven at each spot, the batten is bent against the nails, and other nails are driven on the opposite side of the batten If your particular
plans give a half-siding
to hold it in place.
for the rabbet,
this should be drawn in
next before going on to the body plan.
Body Plan Sections It is strongly recommended
that the body plan be drawn on a separate
portable
board.
Such a board is easy to move around to suit making molds, and it avoids confusion of lines on the floor. Referring to the body plan for the lines in Figure 7.2, you can see that the board or paper
used for the sections
must be somewhat
wider than the boat
and at least as high as the distance from the baseline to the sheer at Station 0, the bow. Begin by drawing the baseline; then draw the centerline perpendicular to the base. The waterlines are drawn in parallel to the base, the buttocks parallel to the centerline and the diagonals
exactly
as dimensioned
on the lines plan.
Needless
to say, trouble
78
LINES AND LA YING DOWN
will result if the waterlines
and the buttocks of the body plan are not spaced exactly the
same as they were laid out on the half-breadth Cut some narrow strips of straight transferring
and profile plans.
wood anywhere
to the body plan the deck half-breadths
from ‘/,b”to ‘/B”thick for use in and the sheer and rabbet heights
from the already faired lines on the floor. Butt the end of a strip against the baseline and mark
the half-breadths
and heights on the stick,
with a symbol and the station number. or battens
and one is shown in the picking on the centerline.
point and draw in the width of the rabbet. and with the pick-up width corresponding
stick against
points;
the sheer height/deck
Draw short horizontal Draw horizontal
batten,
centerline
lines at each rabbet mark the deck
of sheer and deck draw a
Each section now has two definite
width intersection,
and the intersection Nail a batten
mark points for all the waterline
table and label each one. For instance,
of the rabbet
against one side of the with its end against
half-breadths
lay the rule on waterline
and from the offset table under Station
from the offset
2A to the right of the
1 mark off l-l-2,
put a little circle
around it with a 1 next to it to show it is a point on the section at Station 1.9- 1 for Statinn
done, go on to the buttocks.
Place the rule on Buttock
end of the rule at the base and mark all the heights for Buttock Follow with Buttock
II. Then
at the centerline
Move the batten and diagonal
1; then mark
2, and so on. Do the same with the offsets for the other waterlines.
With the waterlines
again
7-5.
lines at each sheer height
on the body plan and with the rule laid on a waterline
the centerline
4 in Figure
of the body plan,
number.
height and width. Now to fill in some of the points in between. centerline
at Station
At each intersection
small cross and label it with the station
each one
of your body plan, mark the heights
the centerline
to each station.
identifying
sticks are called pick-up sticks
up position
With the end of the pick-up stick at the baseline of the sheer and rabbet
carefully
These measuring
lay the rule along the diagonal
and lay off all the diagonal
to the left side of the centerline
offsets for the sections
I with the
I from the offset table. with the end of the rule
offsets along the diagonal
and lay out all the waterline,
lines.
buttock,
in the stern half of the boat. Needless to say, all
the layout and transfer of measurements should be done with utmost care and accuracy. In the end, the time spent to this end will speed the job to completion faster than if the work is done in a slipshod manner.
Rdy
Plan
Battens
Nails are driven around
at all the reference
the nails of each section,
the sheer
point
and beyond
marks on each
using a batten
the rabbet
section.
Then
a batten
is bent
long enough to extend 6” or so above
at the centerline,
as shown in Figure
7-6.
Holding the sheer and rabbet points as definitely fixed by the previous fairing of these lines, examine the batten carefully and shift it, if necessary, to get a smooth, true curve. Before doing any shifting, remember that points established by lines crossing other lines at right angles,
or nearly so, are more accurate
crossings at acute angles. When two lines intersect precisely
at which spot on a line the crossing occurs;
architect, tersections.
working from his small-scale (See Figure 7-7.)
drawing,
than those established
at an acute angle it is difficult consequently
by
to tell
it is possible for the
to misread offsets taken from such in-
With this fact in mind,
it is readily seen that for the flat
LINES AND LA YING DOWN
79
3A
Figure 7-6. Tfz~ body P/UHis best drawn on a portable lCrct>called a .\criuc board.
part of the bottom
sections,
give the most unreliable
the best points are given by the buttocks.
points for the same parts of the sections,
hand, they are the best for the topside sections. in the architect’s diagonal,
may appear
may be ignored,
Faking
scaling
sur-
technique.
The waterlines but on the other
Points may also be out due to mistakes
As a result, all the points on one line, such as a
to be out by the same amount.
the other points being
In such a situation
these points
held if they give a fair section or line.
Diagonals
Fair the diagonals
first, because they are laid out to cross the majority
of the sections at
a good angle. Lay a pick-up batten along a diagonal in the body plan, mark and identify all the points where it crosses the sections; then move the batten to the halfbreadth
plan
and
mark
each
diagonal
half-breadth
on its proper
Figure 7-7.
station.
The
80
LINES AND LA YING DOWN
t S,.=g5-/---f _---/! ii
2 ?I 3, b.4 *,uec -3, lBE.& / ,~ 7p1 +J! PJL 2*’ +. I._‘;i \=z’ \ pq&f+-if+ -- I ,xkh~~ _ /’ 4 % b--% x 5: + Ka i 1.. ~_ t -WI3
-p&cd
kc* ..; 11 f \ Pa UCc.x1PCD FrzDV 1 1 bL;i> oinr, ~~ - --..__?Li+--~-~ @PpDoJcc”5rp~I , 73 c _ CF ..rcI~~ ____ ?.b’“D” 3”” ’ ;. ; /
--$-Q+ -“-<;2w:,,//
1 :;;z”Y
~.
..*
?,I
_ ,*
; .Azy‘LL&+
y$&,:-’ ‘i
9+x:“.z
3,.aciO~... CL”*a
PLAtJ-
vrl
- 4. - _u_
/ 0
~~ yl - ‘A
: --.
&.-
,I,,,,
ILTeeSC:l~O*i OF c,se ‘X’ A..C cl!.Jv3? * UC 10 Lx- dl er U~.5d?C3 =erJv em7 P-.-.I
e
&.G
Figure 7-8. Four steps in finding o/the? stern.
ofa
the correct ending
diagonal that crosses the face
diagonai is then faired, again proceeding as described for the sheerline. If the batten will not go through all the points and at the same time produce a fair line, the usual adjustments must be made. Bearing in mind not to make more changes than are necessary,
the sections on the body plan are then corrected
Long
Line
When
fairing
accordingly.
Endings
The location the profile
the long fore-and-aft of waterline
endings
lines, it is necessary is fairly simple.
to terminate
Considering
of the stem has been faired and drawn permanently.
the stem profile
with one of the waterlines
is a definite
them correctly.
the bow in Figure 7-5, Each intersection
of
point in the profile plan, and
the corresponding point in the half-breadth plan is found simply by projecting the intersection in the profile down to the line ~spresenting the half siding of the stem face in the half-breadth
plan as shown in A in Figure 7-5. The aft endings are done exactly
the same way, as indicated this particular other waterlines Buttock
at B in the stern end of the same figure. It is obvious that in
design only the L.W.L. cross the section
ends within the boat at the stern, because the
at Station
endings are also quite simple.
6.
A short length of a buttock
is drawn in plan
to cross the deck line, and then the point of crossing
is projected
tersection
in the profile view as shown at C
with the sheer is the ending of the buttock
in Figure 7-5. When drawing the waterlines
and buttocks,
those on stations are established
wherever a waterline
7-5 illustrates
of the L.W.L.
Buttock
how the crossing
II in plan gives another
fairing points in addition to
and a buttock cross. D in Figure
and Buttock
point on the L.W.L.
to the sheer. The in-
II in profile projected
to
in plan.
The determination of a diagonal ending at the stem is somewhat more difficult to understand; therefore the steps taken are shown in Figure 7-8, which should be selfexplanatory.
81
LINES AND LAYING DOWN
The preceding explanation of lofting a round-bottomed boat is modified for other types such as v- and arc-bottomed hulls; generally speaking, the latter types are easier to loft. However, in common,
all boats except double-enders
and that is the development
have one additional
of the transom
lofting problem
or stern board.
Projected Transom After the sections have been faired satisfactorily,
it is time to consider the development
of the true shape of the transom or stern board of the boat. Sometimes, plumb verticai,
in which case the section
shape of the transom.
More often,
shape does not appear
in the body plan.
need not be reproduced view of the transom,
drawn at the transom
the transom
is raked,
the transom is
station is actually
the
with the result that its true
This view is meaningless
to the builder
and
full size on the mold loft floor. The same is true of the plan
although
it may be useful for obtaining
transom
bevels.
The only way that a true view, and thus a pattern, of a raked transom can be gotten is if its shape is projected square off its centerline in the profi!e view.
Flat Transom Development
Development of the shape of thr transom
there is nothing of the simplest
type, and its transom
rake of the transom transom
is not necessary
puzzling
shapts development
in profile has, of course,
given on the architect’s developed
is sometimes
to the builder,
really mysterious about the work. The 12’ rowboat
lines plan.
For
is shown in Figure 7-9. The
been previously
c35c
but
has a flat transom
of illustration,
drawn from dimensions the centerline
for the
has bren drawn at the stern end of the lines in Figure 7-9, but this
and it may be located
on a separate
board or piece of paper.
The transom is just thr same as any section, except that it is located at an angle with the baseline instead of perperldicular to it. Points on the transom are taken from the waterlines and buttocks the same as ordinary sections: it is merely a matter of picking up the waterline
half-breadths
thcqm to the development If you have space Figurr
and buttock
for the transom
7-9, thr dcvelopmrnt
remember
throughout
Therefore, centerline
at the end of your lines, as shown in
as indicated
in the diagram.
plan elsewhere.
the development,
but due to the profile angle of the transom,
drawn across
In Figure 7-9 the centerline
the transom
for the transom
and tt,en the intersections
grid
is obviously
across the centerline
and rabbet intersecti(Jns
with the transom’s
are spaced 5 ”
the distance greater
togetht.
be-
than
5”.
measured along
the
grid has been drawn parallel
of waterlines
in profile are projected for this rowboat,
if you
point to
or you may end up with a stern board that
when laying out the grid, the spacing must be carefully of the transom.
of the transom,
However,
there is one important
On the profile drawing of the lines the waterlines
apart above the L. W.L.. tween the waterlines
drawing
is exactly
must locate the grid for the transom will not fit as it should.
heights at the right places and transferring
drawing.
to the rake
and the sheer with the transom with projections
face. With a flat transom,
you can lay off the spacing of rhe buttocks
of the buttock as in the design
the same as they are on the
.,
82
LINES AND LAYING DOWN
Figure 7-9. Ikwloprnent body and the half-breadth rcnterline.
plans,
and draw them in the grid parallel
Two points, P, are established
on the transom
tocks thus drawn cross the lines projected width of the rabbet, Now project
to locate
another
the intersections
file down to the centerline
o/ a Jlat transom.
development
from the buttocks
point,
where the butLay off d, the
R.
of the waterlines
of the half-breadth
in profile.
to the transom
and buttocks
with the transom
plan. The waterline
half-breadths
proa, b,
and c are picked up with a batten and laid off as points A, B. and C on the corresponding lines in the grid. With all the points spotted, draw in the transom with a batten
the same as you did the regular
sections.
If you must draw the transom on a separate sheet, very carefully pick up the spacing of the intersections along the profile of the transom on a batten, as shown in Figure .
7-9, and complete
location
Curved
Development
Transom
A curved transom the development
on either a sailboat
above.
or powerboat
is very handsome,
and although
is more involved than for the flat type, the extra work is worthwhile
when the transom’s curved transom
of points as described
finished appearance
is not generally
necessary
above this range the curved transom must on a hut1 with an overhanging develop,
due to the combination
transom
in profile.
is considered.
viewpoint,
a
on small craft up to 20 or 25 feet overall, but
becomes a necessity, counter
sltirn. This
for good looks is an absolute type is the most difficult
to
of the radius to which it is built and the angle of the
The planks forming
with a radius perpendicular
From the aesthetic
such a transom
are bent to the arc of a circle
to the after side of the transom
as seen in profile.
A pat-
--
- --
--
--.-.
-----
Li
I
-.-
2% AND L.-l YING DO Wh’
tern for the shape must be made, and this is accomplished
as thougtl G rvlinder
83
:~~~-~:Y
cut and rolled out flat. A transom
proportioned
as shown in Figure
7-10 is developed
tocks, because they cross the edges of the transom the waterlines,
and thus are the most accurate.
clo-Fly as needed 7-10
has been
are an infinite
to hc!c, you make proper
purposely
but ordinarily,
between
those shown on the lines plan.
Before the transom usually to a staticn
extra buttocks is attempted,
beyord
chitect
designs to a vertical
desired
angle in profile
and they may be spaced as
for parts
buttocks
for development
The stern in Figure
to develrp
the transom
of the tramt.m
station
ac-
must be added
the hull lines have been completely
the transom.
with but-
lines plan are not the only ones it is number,
templates
drawn with enough
curately,
with but-
By this time you are familiar
tocks and must realize that those on the architect’s possible to have on a hull. There
principally
more nearly at right angles than do
faired full size,
To be sure of the shape of his hull, the ar-
at the extreme
stern and then cuts it off at the
and in a radius in the plan view as mentioned
above.
There are undoubtedly many methods of transom development in use and sworn to by their advocates. However, the system illustrated here will at least help the reader understand
the principle.
the profile and half-breadth plans of 7-1C have been drawn separated and the transom radius made
the stern in Figure smalier
To avoid confusion,
than usual to clarify the drawing.
to another.
After following
Dashed lines show the projection
the development
of the flat transom
of the buttocks in Figure 7-10 is obvious, with the exception
of one view
in Figure 7-9. the use
of their spacing in the grid
for the expansion. Extend the after side of the transom in profile up clear of other drawings, 7-lOA, and draw a centerline perpendicular to it. Tangent to the intersection,
Figure swing
an arc of radius as shown on the plans. This is the curve to which the transom planking will be bent when it is built. same as in the half-breadth
Draw the buttocks plan. Project
down to cross the corresponding the expanded measured
transom,
around
measurements
buttocks
Figure 7-lOB,
the arc instead
to the centerline,
spaced the
of the burtocks with the arc
in the profile view. Now prepare the grid for
spacing
the buttocks
out from the centerline
of as laid out in the half-breadth
give the true distances
som is rolled out flat. Project
parallel
the intersections
between
the buttocks
the buttocks
plan.
when the cylindrical
as
These tran-
in profile to the grid to obtain points on the
edge of the transom as was done in the flat transom, Figure 7-9. For clarity only one buttock, Buttock II, has been used as an example in Figure 7-10. In order to find the point where the transom line is drawn in the auxiliary in this view, select convenient above the centerline
the auxiliary
ferred
at the sheerline.
points (P) along the projection’s
with the sheer parallel
to the stations
the deck
To draw the deck line centerline;
square them
and then square
to cross the deck line in
plan. The widths of the deck at these points are lifted, transf+=rr?d tn
projection,
at the deck is located breadth
terminates
shown in Figure 7-10A.
and also down to cross the sheer on the profile:
the points of intersectior? the half-breadth
projection
and a batten
of the point is measured to the grid.
is run rhrough them. The corner of the transom
where the deck line intersects from the centerline
the arc of the transom. around
The half-
the arc and duly trans-
RADl U5 OF TRA?450M -
CE~NTWZ AINC
.
--
’
-
\
yy~~,gNSO~
,L E!%PANoeo
Figure 7-10. Steps in the development
of a curved transom.
LINES
7-l 1. The complete
Figure
Powerboat Sailboat
devehpment
.J?.‘D L.4 S1.1;G Ml IZ’N
85
of the curved transom started in Figure 7- 10.
Transoms transoms
often
have considerable
rake,
as shown in Figures
7-10 and 7-11,
but there is usually little angle to those on modem power cruisers. A small amount of rake may be neglected in the development of the transom, and the radius can be drawn directly
on the half-breadth
plan,
as will be explained.
The powerboat
stem
shown in Figure 7-12 is not typical of many present day boats in that the topside sections do not tumble home. This avoids having waterlines that pile up on top of one another and makes the transom development easier to understand. Draw the profile profile Holding jected
angle of the transom
view of a waterline the specified
or buttock
radius constant
points on the centeriine
the half-breadth buttocks
intersections
throughout,
(using the C.L.
crosses the 1;~~ on the half-breadth profile
and project
every intersection
up to the centeriine
of it with the
in the half-breadth
swing an arc from each of tht pro-
as center for the radius) until th: arc
plan corresponding
to the line in profile.
with the arcs back down to the corresponding
and then across to the grid, Figure on the grid are spaced as measured
plan.
7-12A.
Of course it is important
around
the arc, Figure
7-12B.
ProyWc: lines in that the
I! i
/ IHj : i$j’ 01 1; 1 : i 3 ; i i j 1 li /, l-J1 *-
; ;
2 CL F -4-~~ 3 CL I2 ---
Ii, / ‘/ ; :. vt: -1 I/ Al/ A 3i 3, ‘,I1 ‘1 : ;
z-y
--
-z-_
+ SE
H
#I
nH 3 0‘ ii
-&&
i j 3 3 !/ A-4 /I ! I +I ‘,
‘“I ‘IL !B ys(I /j +t-
i:j j/ y -2 i p F -2 .2 e b3 .= % P G P% C @ E z F: k;;I hz -I E k1 3,‘1’ P 9 i2 t /’ SOa >z c 0: 5 : 4 $. WB t-IL -7 ,’ t 00 2111 c 20 St ‘3 ., 26 2 b sl d A 2 EL .r( Fr
LINES
AND
1 1 YING
DOWN
87
The development is the shape of the outside edge of the transom planking, but allowance must be made for the bevel on the edges, which causes the transom to be on the inside than on the outside face.
larger
planking
thickness must be deducted
Computer-Aided
before
When making the allowance
the transom
for beveling
frame,
:he
can be made.
Lines Fairing
The purpose of much of the work described architect’s
lines drawing.
drawing,
due to mistakes
manship.
It may not pay an amateur
in this chapter
is to correct
Errors creep in due to the necessity of making made in reading
the offsets,
to depart
and because
from the time-tested
errors in the a small-scale
of sloppy draftsmethods of lofting
ani, mold-making, hull
but the professional should certainly investigate services that fair Such computers fair the lines from the table of offsets. lines by computer.
resulting
in corrected
offsets reading to one-sixteenth
of an inch or one hundredth
foot. (It is easy to lay out offsets in feet and decimals foot folding
rule.)
A logica!
extension
with an ordinary
of computer-aided
lines fairing
of a
surveyor’s sixis the full size
drawing of the body plan, and this is discussed in the next chapter. I have used firms supplying computer-guided lofting for hulls up to 78 feet in length. 25 Hallett Hill Road, Weston, Such lofting is available from Justin E. Ketwin, Massachusetts
02193;
Bristolcomp,
Street,
Rhode
Island 02809;
Bristol,
#3, Baldwinsville,
New York
13027.
c/o Halsey
C.
and Hullforms,
Herreshoff, Inc.,
Inc.,
3667 Woodland
18 Burnside Drive,
RD
Chapter
8
S, TEMPLATES, AND THE BACKBONE
Upon completion
of the full size drawings of the lines for the hull. the builder is at last
ready to start cutting wood, be it for frames for a sawn-frame round-bottomed
hull or a male plug for a fiberglass
Molds are made from the body plan, and because made from lower grade lumber
boat or for molds for a
or cold-molded
wooden hull.
they are only temporary,
they are
than that used for the boat parts. Any lumber except
hardwood is suitable, the thickness of the molds varying with the size of the boat. A rough guide is XV for boats to 16’ , % ” for 16 to 24 ’ , and 1 rror 1 ‘igNfor Z&footers. As you will see further
along,
the molds are set up on the backbone
and strips of wood called ribbands cept that ribbands
are bent around
the molds similar to planking,
have spaces between them. The frames for a round-bottomed
are bent to shape against the ribbands.
There
is gained
that setting
exboat
are two schools of thought as to whether
the frames should be bent inside or outside of the ribbands, experience
or keel of the boat,
up the frame
but it will be observed as
for the boat is simplified
when the
frames are bent inside the ribbands.
When a number
advantageous
mold, in which case the frames are bent outside
to make a permanent
and the mold is removed
for further
The lines for the 12-footer the outside of planking the frames
use when the hull has been planked.
in Figure 7.2, like those for all small boats, are drawn to
and the full-size lines are lofted accordingly.
are bent inside the ribbands,
the thickness
of boats are to be built alike it is
of the planking
For setups where
the molds for the sections are made only after
has been deducted.
Similarly,
frames
for v-bottomed
boats are made only after the thickness of planking has been deducted. It should be obvious after you have studied construction that to make a mold for a round-bottomed bined
thickness
boat with the frames bent on the outside of the ribbands, of planking,
framing,
and ribbands
must be deducted
the com-
from the sec-
tions that are drawn to the outside of the planking. For methods 88
other than conventional
wooden construction,
the ways of getting the
MOLDS, TEMPLATES, AND THE RACfiLDNE
89
MAW THICdNES5 OF PlAhi~lbJB AT C?EQUEtdT ItdTERL’ALS
RAOlYS= OF
THIC~(NE l=LANC(\NG
-BOD)/ PLANFigure 8-l. Plajrking thickucss can 6~ deducted by sin~ply drawing a parullel wction insido the IWP sections by thr amou,tt o/‘ planking thickncss. Howtqler, this is not a zltq accurate method.
deductions
depend
upon the peculiarities
of each construction
plug that will be used to form a female mold for a fiberglass the plug planking jig-
or covering
need be deducted.
call it what you will) for a so-called
in the chapter
on Fiberglass
the outer fiberglass thickness.
one-off
fiberglass
of the hull planking
sandwich
the deduction
plus the core material
To make a male mold for a cold-molded
to the total thickness ribbands.
hull, only the thickness of
To make a male mold (or plug or
and Other Hull Materials,
skin thickness
type. To make a male
thickness
hull as described must be equal to plus the ribband
hull, the deduction
plus the thickness
must be equal
of the mold planking
or
Countless boats have been built from molds where planking thickness was deducted by simply drawing lines inside the sections by the amount of the planking thickness. However, this method is only acceptable when the planking is thin. Let me try to simplify planking
this. If a hole was drilled was measured
through
the planking,
in the hole, the planking
and the thickness
wouid measure
correctly
of the
only q the
90
‘JO LDS. TEMF’LA TES, .4ND THE l-3.4CKROh’E
AEC’
Figure 8-2.
CL
,P:-h
.-_
4-n’ L
hole were at right angles (n,.-TmaI) to the surface o/‘the it&i. (See Figure 8-2.) By the a truly accurate deduction when the hole itselj lies in the same athwartships plane as the stations. Thus, in a shapely hull, the
same token, such a h,ole would only represent deductions
would be fairly accurate
proximately
parallel
amidships,
to the hull’s centerline,
toward the centerline as one progresses become increasingly inaccurate. IJnless the planking deduct
planking
absolutely diagonals
snore accurately.
but as the waterlines
waterlines
run
break away
ap-
sharply
would
To make the thickness deduction even to the extent
almost
of adding
to those shown on the lines plan, but this chore is not necessary in
most cases. Rather than use this procedure, parallel
view
to the ends of the hull, the deductions
it should be done on the diagonals,
in addition
pian
is thin, it is best to take a little more time and make an effort to
thickness
correct,
where the
to the waterlines
at each station layoff the planking thickness
in the p!an view of the lines, then pick up this thickness along
the station line and transfer it to the body plan, laying it off normal to the section. Figure 8-3.) When this has been done at each waterline,
(See
take a batten and draw through
all the points to get tire inside of planking. Once you have done this for a few points the work will go quite rapidly. When all the sections have been redrawn to the inside of planking, the molds for a round-bottomed
boat can be made.
Figure 8-4 shows typical mold construction
and
Figure 8-l shows how the shape of the section is transferred to the mold stock by pressing the lumber down against closely spaced tacks with their heads laid on the line to be reproduced.
Turn
the wood over, use a batten
to connect
the marks made by the tack
heads, then work the board to the line. Do this for each station. It is not practical to use boards wide enough to get out an entire half mold all in one piece. Therefore,
the mold is made in asmany parts asnecessary,
and laidout in anycon-
venient manner to suit the lumber stock. Just remember that the mold must not be too flimsy. Normally the mold should be extended a half foot or so above the sheerline, but if it is planned to build the boat upside down-a logical method for small craft-the molds should be extended to a straight baseline above the sheer that represents
the building
is made parailel
floor.
Depending
to the waterline
on the size of the boat, the inverted
baseline
and at a height so the greater part of the hull may be
planked
from a normal standing position. Lay the mold parts on the sections of the body plan while carefully
fastening
them
!vlOl. DS, 7‘~.~:clPI..~l7‘i-.~~:‘.‘i. .-l.VI) -i‘llif R.-lCKi~O.l’E
yP,Aw.r
c;F
Figure 8-3. 7’his rtto~hod ojdPducting shown in Figure 8- 1.
I‘T,.I 01 L&WcTFF PLaNa. TntCuiNtSs Pmc* UPo,CT.*.s n-n. 02 -rPa.+.(~5L l-0 9cJoy
P-IUICIHG
fLAti
(WC@)
A-4 NORM&L LC*I
planking
-
MALI<
h
t-
LAY OFF ‘l-0 %a-
l?$‘T.RND bI3’o+lD
-I *
A-‘
*
CM-SIDE
I-
-7” CLhESS
A
=-r--i@
9I
01 AOOhlnL LAccclRFZ
MOLD 5ucCR
thic knvss is ntow ncrurn~c~ than that
ORACRS MOLOS
It
Od
I
li
SWttR, L.W.L.
4 c.L. Od MoLD 7
\I I \\
9lMPLlFl~D
‘rl’
\ SECURELY
FATTEd
&Ails HEIGHT
IF
ALL
ARR”&<~Mt A0Ovk
MOLD
T+*RTcTs-- PRRFRRAR~s’ vJIl-bl5ceRNs -
bhXCI+ KCfL
MOLD -TO CohlSRU
Figure 8-4. Tvt)icnl mold ronstrurtion. lain their shape when set up.
Molds must bc wll~fastened
und braced to re-
92
MOLDS, TEMPLATES. AND THf BACKBONE
together
with screws and butt blocks.
mark it at the deck line and L.W.L.
rsefore the half mold is lifted from the plan,
fcr reference
while setting up and building.
Turn
the first half of the mold over so thar. the butt blocks are down and make a second half to match
it. When the mold is aswmbled,
side. Connect
the butt blocks will then all be on the same
the two halves at the bottom with a block, which should be notched if reand fasten a crosepiece, called a spall, at or near the
quired by the keel construction,
deck line. Spalls on all molds should be level, and if they all are located height above the waterline
at the same
or base, the molds will be easier to align when set up on the
keel or floor.
Stem and Rabbet The stem assembly struction
is drawn on the full-size lines, either
plan or, lacking dimensions,
In boatbuilding the thickness
language
as dimensioned
on the con-
from widths scaled from the construction
the widths of the stem are the molded dimensions,
of the material
for the stem is the sided dimension.
Ideally,
plan. whereas
a stem for a
small craft like a dinghy should be made from a natural hackmatack or oak crook as they were some years ago. A template of the stem would be taken to the dealer in this material
to select a crook with a shape similar
builders,
nobody seems to bother
to the stem, but except
for the island
with this any more.
Most often the stem is too large to get out of a natural crook, so an assembly of wood will be made up as illustrated in Figure 8-5 or the stem assembly will be laminated. For the amateur,
who does not usually count labor.
a lamination
is often the easiest way
out. When an assembly of parts is used, templates transferred
with tacks as explained
of the parts are made, the lines being
for the molds in Figure 8.1. Templates are usually Besides !/i r, or y8” thick or of plywood or hardboard.
made of easily worked softwood representing the shapes of the parts, the templates must also provide guidelines rabbeting the stem assembly to receive the planking. The profile struction
of the rabbet
line may or may not be dimensioned
The width or half-breadth
siding of the stem and either
of the rabbet
retains
a constant
boat or swells in width toward amidships It was mentioned before that countless not deducting
the thickness of planking
the stem rabbet. more precise
that consumes
the thickness)
half-breadth
and so it is with
how to lay out the rabbet by a
but little more time. of the stem (the “half siding” or one-half
the thickness
of planking
lines to which the material
shown on the section through Points
method,
has been drawn as well as the half siding of the face of the stem, and on
and bearding
half-breadth
the same as the the length of the
and then narrows again toward the stern. boats have been built from molds made by
I will discuss this first and then explain
method
each waterline
line is generally
width throughout
by the most accurate
Note in Figure S-5 that the half-breadth
8-5.
on the lines or con-
plan, and even though it is shown, it should be checked full size for accuracy
and fairness.
rabbet
for
has been drawn to get the back
must be cut. The nomenclature
the stem drawn on waterline
to plot these lines on the profile are projected plan to the waterlines
in profile and connected
is
4A in the profile,
Figure
from the waterlines
in the
with a batten.
The lines
Figure 8-5.
for the rabbet and the outline of stem parts are all transferred
to the template
material
at the same time. The templates
are laid out on the stem material and arranged so that there will be a minimum of cross grain in the finished part. Cut and plane the parts to shape (if too heavy for your equipment have a mill do this for you) and lay them out on the full-size lines to check the alignment line, all the waterlines, put the stem together pound between Whether
the faying surfaces
(the surfaces
to make the bolt holes watertight
bedding generously
Mark the sheer-
long enough
that touch each other) of the joints. and plugged,
you should take an extra
by using a grommet.
This is a ptece of
to go around the bolt a couple of times. Apply
to the wicking and wind it around the bolt just under the head just
the bolt is driven
centerline
position.
of the bolts; then bore the bolt holes and with thick white lead, t hiokol, or sc rne other good bedding com-
cotton wicking caulking
all the way home.
After
assembly
of the stem, mark
the
of the boat on the stem and the width of the stem face on each side of the
centerline. Referring
to the half-breadth
or thin wood for the rabbet of the rabbet material
in the assembled
or not the bolt heads are countersunk
precaution
before
of the joints
and the centerlines
at each waterline.
at the waterlines,
between
plan in the figure, make a tc.mplate of stiff cardboard
the templated
Use the temp!ates
and then complete
the rabbet
cuts on the waterlines.
The
to cut a short length by working away the
rabbet
may be cut wrth
94
M0I.D.S.
TEMPI.,-I
7'E.S.
:I.VIj
TIIE
RrlCKR0.V~
i=C>-T
r;.:
Figure 8-6. rc~nficienc~ fessionals the time perience it more
if the full-six
drawing
IS accrlrc!ta and complete.
However,
even some pro-
leave the rabbet ,just a little shallow and complete it when fitting ribbands at the boat is set up. In many cases this is because they have learned from exthat
their
rabhet
is not as accurate
as it might
be. Here is how you can make
acc’trate.
In the beginning vals throughout
of Chapter r!re length
7 it was stated
of the boat
that
to define
vertical
the shape
sections
are drawn
of the hull,
at intcr-
but it should
be
realized that sections can be drawn through the hull at any angle, not only at the verthe horizontal planes of the waterlines, or the tical planes of the stations and buttocks, often does this while drawing the construction plan to diagonal planes. The designer get the true, drawn
accurate
normal
sizes of parts
to the part
are the most
such as the stem
is full accuracy
out-of-normal
at the bow,
assured. it certainly
assembly: only when a section is Since the waterlines and buttocks pays to draw
auxiliary
sections
at
right angles through the strm of the boat in order to more accurately cut the rabbet. The less dubbing that the amateur must face after he sets up the boat, the better off he will be. For the same
reason
face,
so.
or nearly
bevels
should
be taken
off lines that are normal
to the hull sur-
Figure 8-6 has been prepared to show how easy it is to draw sections through the stem. The sections should be spaced at intervals close enough so that there is no question about having enough of the plotted points for the rabbet, bearding fines (see Figure 8-5) to ensure a fair line. To save time tions should than
be drawn
separately
right
as was done
on the lines profile, for clarity
as in Section
in Section
A-A.
back rabbet, and and effort, the sec-
B-B of Figure
8-6, rather
MOLDS,
TEMPL 4TES, AND THE BACKBONE
95
W.L.n
L@&WE*IDICULA(ZS To INTW~ECTIO~~
C.!m. 9,
DUAWJ -IiWJ
OF BuTrocK
4‘ PJAT’=LINEC
C&‘SnP @lr’ -j-HE C.L. OF THE. 5=3-lO~. LAY OFF ON -rwz QERPEwIcuLALJ -WE HALF ~%EAD*!: 3~ me ku~-rERLlrJEr t: WnocrCC cZ$O5<-. EFAMPLE: BUTT. 1 AVOVE-
8-7. !G~lt~~~ 111 1 ‘. 1~grid for dmwing
Figure
First
a centerline
enough draw
buttocks a fair
waterlines
place,
For
see Figure
face
of the stem,
on /he prqfi[~
long
enough
to cross
to give a number of points so a batten can be set up to the centerline for Section A-A intersects two
Then
perpendiculars
intersections
of how these
to the
in p/arc
instance,
a huttork.
and buttock
lustration
normal
and waterlines
section.
and
waterline
is drawn
stern sections
and
perpendiculars
8-7.) Next
TO this centerline
at the joints can
the half-breadths
be laid
in the stem off when
at these points
are drawn assembly.
the section
at the
(For an ilis drawn
of intersection
in
are picked
up as in the plan view and laid off on the perpendiculars 10 establish the points for the section to the outside of planking. After the section line has been drawn, the thickness of planking is set off, and bearding line. Instead method profile
of making shown
templates
by Figure
as illustrated
this sets up the points for the
8-5, make
by Figure
8-6.
them
rabbet
for the rabbet, from
for the more
the
back
rabbet,
half-breadth
accurate
sections
and the
plan
in the
drawn
on the
96
MOLDS,
Y‘EMPLATES,
AND
THE
BACh’RONE
REVEL
AT
DE& rT===+
4=-n
I
ITAMES AFT OF STAT-Id5 -
CFRAME?: FC+?‘DOF STATIO~JS
i-lAiF
I’LAbJ
0READTH
AT CHINE
BE\;Ei
=F 0Ei’EL
AT
KEEL
h
-_ .i-u
BOTTOM
FRAME
I
FPAME
Figure 8-8.
4 (~~%ING AFT)
Stopwaters Softwood
dowels
from leaking
called
into
stopwaters
are fitted
the hull along
the joints.
it is imperative
that
full effectiveness:
in joints
in the backbone
The location
they
be placed
to prevent
of stopwaters wherever
the rabbet
joint in the backbone. Any durable softwood such as white pine or cedar there are so few of them that they can be whittled out of scrap.
V-Bottomed Temporary
molds
are
not
bottomed
hulls.
of the structure.
Figure
l-3 and
Instead,
.
necessary
the body
are beveled
(See A of Figure
for
plan
Typical
l-4 in Chapter
tom and side pieces the frames.
fcr
crosses
a
will do, and
Frames
nent
part
water
is important
1, but
the
is used to make
v- and
Figure
of v-bottomed
frames
arc-bottomed
these sectional
so the planking 8-8 and
construction
that become frames
views do not reveal
will bear 8-10.)
hull against
In many
and
the entire
arc-
a perma-
are shown that
thickness
cases the bevel
in
the botof
is not the
MOl.DS,
same
at the sheer
of boat
hulls.
the amount
of bevel.
approximately bevel needed. and
as it is at the chine.
The character,
be measured plan
and
as indicated-
If the frames the same, from
have some
sections frames
the
curve,
Bevels
for the notches are run
chine
To determine
but this is the nature etc., determines
bevel
bevels
with
chines,
chine
points
in the half-breadth The bevels above
from
the
buttocks
are fitted are taken battens for fairing
by planing
however
(and
this is very important
previously
discussed.
--...
4
-..
&-
by the method
shown
off the
the frames.
in the larger hulls with a good number of frames) the bevels much like the deduction for planking normal to the surface,
~-
are just
in the profile.
time saving measured
This can be done
are
and keel respectively.
as described
and clamps At that time,
are made
accuracy,
8-8. the bevels can
between the deck and chine are taken. dnd those for the bottom frames at
taken
is set up.
adjustments more
and between
at major
are
the keel,
the boat
at deck and chine
plan,
the keel
in Figure
and keel in the profile.
at points
half-breadth and
when
in and
bevels
at chine
the bevels
in which
later
like that shown
deck and chine
in the
between or cut
work,
97
be beveled.
but those for the side frames
the waterlines
similarly
for more
BACKBONE
of the deck line and chine,
the side frame
line between
points
frames
must
with straight
those for the bottom
cut in a straight
makes
THE
B-B in Figure 8-8, where the deck line and chine are it can be seen that there is practically no to the centerline, as the deck and chine curve in toward the centerline, forward
aft of B-B, the frames boat
This
or curvature,
AND
At Section
parallel f-fowever,
For a simple
TEMPLATES.
in Figure
to
should be thickness
8-9. The square
.~
Id” ,,irrd
Figure
8-9.
98
MOLDS.
TEMP1.A
.4 ND
TES.
T1i
'E
BACKBOh'E
‘\I j I
ef11
-DE
/ -2% L RE\JEL BOAED
Figure 8-9(a)
can be made ten, then
up by the builder
the bevels marked
should
and applied
be marked
on the actual
right
frame
as shown
on the body
material
so that
proper bevel. The bevels should be taken along mal as possible to all the frames crossed.
to measure plan it can
diagonals
the bevels.
in degrees be sawn
Once got-
for reference to shape
and
with the
laid out to be as close to nor-
Bevel Board Instead
of using
yourself
a simple
3 I,$ rr wide bevel
along
read
it off.
and
a protractor bevel board mark
to measure as shown
off angles
from
the left edge of the bevel
a bevel
in Figure
each 8-9(a).
zero to about board
until
time
you take
one off, make
Use a piece of plyood
30 degrees.
Slide
about
the adjustable
it lines up with one of the angles
and
as When a bevel is marked on a piece of stock t o be sawn, it must be designated either under or standing, marking the piece UB or SB. This is most important, and after
you have
ruined
a few pieces,
you will understand
the principle.
MOLDS,
Lofting
hull lines with dealt
defining
the aid of a computer
with enlarging
the shape
otherwise. are
a male
hulls frames
by computer
pays off if your sections
1oc::tion
complete
If lofting
tion
project
bevels
given
is used,
from
will be furnished,
The
There’s
mold
partitions
for round-bottomed
at uniform
dividing
intervals.
the cabin
Many of the larger can supply
material, shell
boats
are built
full-size
you
how the
An explana-
as many
bevels as you
too many spacing
the
bevels
than
for v-bottomed
of joiner
bulkheads,
arc not located
those
in the same place
of welded
drawings should
steel or aluminum
alloy framing,
For this type of construction
from
which
be ordered
to cut the frames
with the deduction
with a
the computer
to shape
from
for the thickness
flat
of the
plating.
Transom
and Transom
As will bc seen later,
Bevels
the station
the boat can be set up. The molds ment
but
bulkhead drawings are desired, these, too, can be supand once again you should ask for the edge bevels.
of the same marerial.
so the drawings
times
the location
is avoided,
drawings.
but better
etc.,
at any
to you. Therefore,
and the frame
accommodations,
as molds or frames. If full-size plied by the computer service, skin or shell plating
hulls
Sometimes
plotter
you understand
to the section
compurer.
for
of the hull.
that
two or three
that
that
is where fairing
or unequally)
in the yard
Be certain
with probably
no stopping
the outside
will not be available
be applied
Here
equally
or
hulls molds and
A computer-guided
either
of the lofting
people.
fiberglass,
frames
the boat.
the expense. from
or frames
should
along just
spacing
is usually
most
metal,
the
chapter,
of the set of lines
it be wood,
to build
justifies
the computer
by the computer
really need. too few!
service
99
in the previous
to shape
the hull (spaced
with deductions
for the edges of the molds
hulls
BACKBONE
that for round-bottomed
on which
on which
through
by computer
order
bevels
THE
scale drawing
whether
it was explained
framework
are needed
can draw full-size desired,
of the hull,
in this chapter
to make
v-bottomed
bevels
.4MD
was mentioned
to full size the designer’s
of the outside
Earlier
needed
must
TES.
by Computer
Fairing which
TEMP1.A
of the transom
shape
molds,
the stem,
and the transom
and the stem have been
has been
illustrated.
are needed
explained
You also need
before
and the develop-
the bevels on the tran-
som edges. Remember that the developed shape of the transom is to the outside of the planking, and depending upon the type of construction, it may or may not represent the actual
size of the finished
transom.
The
simplest
method
is to let the side planking
overlap the transom and to then cut it flush with the after side. In this case the plank thickness is subtracted from the edges of the transom. The best practice, however, is to make
the transom
to the outside
of planking
and
rabbet
Both methods are shown in Figure 8-10. Figure 8-10A shows that the inside of the transom at the top edge where the shape depends upon boat narrows from amidships to the transom. v-bottomed
boat,
the edges
of the transom
must
the edge
is larger
thaii
the construction Consequently, be beveled
f-rr the planking. the outside,
except
detnirr; because the like the frames of a
to allow
the planks
to lie
100
MOLDS,
TEMPLATES,
AND
THE
BACKBONE
NC BE .‘E (ILcoeeECT:
RE .‘ELE3 -i%.ri70K
ETABBE?FD fLAh.JSOM
A.
/X-T-
Figure i3-10.
flat. The bevels waterlines
are taken
from
the full-size
in the half-breadth
plan
But once again
and
profile
drawing.
curate
it should
way to take the beve!s off, because
the hull by the method
shown
Small doweled
are generally glued. The
boat transoms and waterproof
planks
can
marine Larger
plywood, transoms,
be properly
hull planking
lines as shown
in Figure
fastened
- those for the sides from the
those for the bottom be remembered it has not been
from the buttocks
in the
that this is not the most acdone normal
to the surface
of
8-9.
made boards
of wide boards whose edges are splined or should be sufficiently thick so that the hull can also be made of to the edge. Such transoms
with cheek pieces around the edges to take the plank fastenings. like that shown in Figure 8-lOC, are made the same thickness as the
or thicker
and have a frame
share of the p!‘~k fastenings. There where a wood or metal knee connects sake of appearance,
the seams
the seams
backed
are usually
or cheek
pieces
on the inside
edges to take a
is usually a vertical member on the centerline, the transom to the keel or horn timber. For the
of transom
with battens.
planks Wide
are not caulked. transoms
If single
planked,
also have a series of vertical
FLAT TeAd5OM ________ I___ L-
PM
B0l-K
5KlFF
~_--
i rtiee~s~~
\
EWTTOM PLAN<:lNG 1
A
./-
FXluhJD &TTTOtvl !ZUK’BOA~ OR SAlLlhlC DlUGHb’
TeA&.OM
TWO-PIECE PARBETEP PLAIJlC tit&
ARC
5-rTtM -4
PLANK
lCEEL
SCM
BOTTOM
8’ ,
CErJTER0OAKb Ti?UNK
N
LOGS
UT
Figure 8-l 1. Tyjical
stiffeners outboard engine stringers.
of the centerline.
Most transoms
do not have enough
cold.
In transoms
that
wet rags or steamed
These radius
RA00ET
small
keels.
are sometimes
spaced
to prevent
the planks
do not have a lot of radius,
so they will bend
boat
to the transom
the planks
to take the ends of from
can be soaked
being
bent
with hot,
frame.
Keel and Deadwood There
are quite
the preference
a number
of keel construction
of the architect,
and sometimes
The
types most likely
to be encountered
and
8-12.
to say.
Needless
for
methods,
varying
with the custom
with the type of boat, of a particular
locality.
by the amateur are illustrated in Figures 8-l 1 only sound timber should go into the longevity,
POWER WOOD
BOAT SHAFT
WITH LOG
dMCI % r Bea”LL ~cI%cP L Fe*=- -ctf r- ~. - ~.&z~&LL,, ._-pig=,. -;_ +. - --------&, , ?’ - 4OPC~~CLL ,)*AFT ,TCV
I lk y*;-+ *g;::;
..qj
4 . .-~ -.-_ $ .~~“~~.~~~~~_~~=lb~=f -4 -_-_ --.--
wve.4
l-
BOAT
Lo ---\ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~ -... ._... ~-- ~ _. #t\-‘\ ---A I(*lec
t
PL
“c.c- LAP
.--k-’ __-L-.-y+-’ Eau.C,T
Figure 8-12. A.few qflhc ccnti .~ailboats.
L
many
possible
backbone
structures.for
powerboats
MOLDS,
backbone
members.
members,
but other
White wood
The flat-bottomed building used,
is the
usual
can be used
upside
down,
one on each
side instead
inner
stem,
as shown,
and
then
to avoid
the outer
for keel
in Figure
are notched
of a single
THE
by local
and
backbone
stems
When
then the bottom
Sometimes
The side planks
stem is fastened
other
for the keelson;
aft. Straight
103
is very common.
one on the centerline.
rabbeting.
BACKBONE
practice.
8-11A
on top of the planking.
keel, cut a slot for the skeg on the centerline of two pieces,
material
shown
the forms
and the keel fitted
AND
as dictated
skiff construction
the boat
is cross planked
oak
TEMPLATES.
twin keelsons
Before
are
fastening
are frequently
the
made
up
are cut off flush with the
to the inner,
with sealant
between
the
two. The rabbeted
keel in Figure
was done
for the stem
templates
and then
the planking.
The
the pieces together should water.
8- 11 B is typical
in Figure
8-5.
cut away between
the stations
to make
amateur
it easier
will find
over the molds
A few of the one-design B-11C.
This
thr
after
sailboats
is all right,
to the keel.
frame
board
halves
butt
a continuous
them
composition
because
like that
be taken and
be thick to make
There
shown
to attach
keel.
for
to exclude
(the one next
the floor
to the frames
slot in the kzcl. thr bed logs should
fair rabbet
the pieces
plank
As
from
the rabbet.
a rabbet,
the garboard
boats.
station
keel if he fastens
to form
between
at the centerline,
be well fastened
many
at each
the two-piece
first beveling
to the keel, care should
If the frames
must
to make
be cut
use a keel without
but
keel on each side) is not fastened strongly
for a great
should
be thick white lead or other such All backbone joints are so treated.
Figure
construction
the rabbet
timbers
in
to the
the frames connecting
In way of the ccnter-
for good fastening
through
rhe keel.
Powerboat The
Keels
keel structure
shown
in Figure
8-12A
is typical
of many
modern
powerboats.
The
keel is usually the same thickness throughout and is cut to shape from a template made from the full-size profile. A batten bent into place on top forms a back rabbet for the planking.
The
timber
rabbet
aft is rabbctcd.
tightness
where
continued
aft and
Although
fittrd
not scen
of mention.
amateur
to make
worked stopwaters through piece
do, and the bolts
mercially
a jig must made
the needed
for splines
with
bolts
function
length
packing
bottom
so long
in the
and
of sufficient by welding
may
length.
shaft
the shaft
holes
of rod.
for water-
log in Figure this
8-12B
is easier
is
for the
hole in each half can be
table
saw or with
pine.
are
not cut.
The chances
Therefore,
in a piece
horn
a plow
leaks in the same manner
be troublesome
the hole.
is installed
section:
such as white
as the bolt
B-11B. The
of the rudder.
be cut on a small
as well as when
to align
gland
the bottom
because
of softwood
just
in Figure
of the keel may be cut away or
the wooden
piece, can
boat
is to swell and prevent
an auger
be devised
auger
The
log is shown
a log in a single
with
log with
as formerly,
they are made
and
log is bored
because
as much
of the splines
the splines
against
shaft
with a skeg to support
grooves
‘l’he purpose
as for the little
leaves the hull.
A two-piece than
out and
plane.
A bronze
the shaft
worthy
add
is cut the same
l.ight. The
that
It is all right The
shaft
to cut
splines
swell
hole in a one-
for the inexperienced, are against
have someone
finding
a com-
cut the shank
It is very important
that
and
the shaft
104
MOLDS,
TEMPLJTES,
hole be lined around
with
the hole.
and stuffing
Fin-Keel
AND
a light
THE
copper
BACKBONE
tube
or lead
The ends of the tube
pipe
are flanged
to exclude
under
water
from
the wood
the bases of the stern
bearing
box.
Sailboats
Fin-keel
sailboats
up to about
8-12C.
Indeed
even
larger
enough
to need
steaming
after
Attention
be given
ballast
had
the keel being
shown
Probably
bent
in Figure
with keels thick
the easiest way to build
down
over the molds
a
and the fin
over.
to the sequence
keel bolts usually
of the bolting
extend
keel, and floors,
although
sometimes
carefully
as called
for by the lines,
shaped
keels like that
this type of construction,
the keel to shape.
down,
the hull is turned
must
the fin. The
have
to bend
boat of this type is upside keel added
30 feet may have bent
boats
from
in order
the casting
they terminate
between
and although
to properly
through frames.
it requires
fasten
the deadwood, The deadwood
is
hard work by hand,
a lot of effort should be put into the deadwood to make it smooth and fair, not only for the sake of appearance but also to offer a minimum of resistance as the boat moves through
the water.
and
the rounded
can
be painted
paint
forward
Large Sailboat backbone
in Figure
is sheathed
8-12D
sailboats
is a thick
plank
throughout
the length.
the heights
of the
It is rabbeted
keel stock. shape aligns The
along
the full-size
with
from
it is impossible of marine
sheet
the outline draw
the one on top, of the bottom before.
keel sailboats end
for the planking
brought
to
growth, around
on
but
as shown
is drawn
or combination
in on the full-size
and
similarly
along
up from
After
on the underside
at each section
is then
changing ternplated
then
spacing
sec-
A centerline is picked
up than
and the
and laid off on the
the keel is sawn
of the keel, making
lay off the half-breadths
will give the constantly
profile;
with the base),
the sections
a batten.
The ver-
the keel is greater
the keel is at an angle
of the keel with a centerline
spacing
in width
to the corresponding
of the keel at the stations.
(the station
because
varying
in the section.
to be used for the keel, the station profile
keel
The keel in such boats
to end,
it crosses are transferred
of the top of the keel are picked Draw
sides of the keel. The rabbet mentioned
edge of the rudder
side,
of 20 feet on the waterline.
the half-widths
the baseline
of the top edge, outline
of most
of the keel in the hull structure
on the piece of lumber
half-breadths
copper
stock
with tacks.
thickness
of the keel at the stations
and laid off from the spacing
to each
accumulation
with light
is typical
upwards same
tions in the body plan to obtain is drawn
the forward
over
To prevent
for it to be fastened
out to take the rudder
Keels
and centerboard
tical position
While
it hard
edge of the sternpost.
enough
is gouged
of the rudder. swinging
side of the sternpost
the sides just
The
edge
by alternately
the concave
the after
The aft edge of the sternpost
to the sure it
of the keel bottom.
bevel to which as a guide
to cut the
for cutting,
as
MOLDS,
TEMPLATES,
AND THE BACKBONE
105
Gripe and Horn Timber The gripe
is the piece
that
the keel or sternpost gripe
and
tion
in some
timber
are very similar
horn
timber
is taken
the various
backbone
work is made
Backbone After
the keel to the stem,
horn
horizontal fasten
connects
to the transom
clear
from
all the backbone that
are inexpensive quid should Through-bolts
to each
by construction
members
rabbet
Much
timber
connects
sailboats.
Both
the
for the comparatively
in the body
other.
sections
are shaped,
and well worth
plan.
Knees
are used to
of the backbone
on the architect’s
on the construction so the assembly
construc-
plans.
plan
be driven
are not made
C) that
together
no crevices
Under
of cotton
Very often
wicking
annoying.
are fitted
is stringy
the familiar
after
the parts
white
it is
The li-
for
All parts
in the joints possibly
are finally
in balls
wicking.
later.
it is advisable
would
that
floor timbers
until in and
bolts
the bolts
available
lamp
be studied
composition
or to collect
and drift before
cotton
have been
qualities.
they pass through
leaks that otherwise
woven
preparations
must
in the structure
lead or other
in paint
will prevent
Wicking
does not resemble
because
fitted
of through
soaked
together,
It will be seen as you go along
to seep through
the washers
this treatment
and
have thick
and the fastenings
properly.
at this time
are left for water
rot the timbers. few turns
must
them These
for their rot preventive
for the boat,
(Figures
bolted
to fastening
bolt holes before the fastenings are driven. at length in Chapter 6, are made and fitted
will go together
some of the bolts cannot 8-12A,
but prior
the investment
also be poured down the and drift bolts, described
as shown
least
The
and
they be given two coats of a wood preservative.
sequence
that
to a stem. the sections
members
a;rd the horn
of power
Bolting
recommended
being
types
start
driven
at marine
to
to wind
a
home.
be troublesome
The stopwaters
so
or at
suppliers
mentioned
and earlier
bolted.
Scarphs It is not always
possible
to obtain
bilge
clamps,
and
stringers,
pieces
shelves.
of wood long enough
Fortunately,
for the keel, deadwood,
sufficient
lengths
may be found
for
keels more often than for the’other parts, even though an extensive search is required. The backbone requires enough work of the builder without his having to splice the keel,
particularly
long
members
Nowaday:< glued, Bolts
strain.
are
type shown
pieced
these joints
the joint
when
8-13 illustrates
that
all have
The joint
for stringers
and
nibs
shown clamps.
out
in Figure
are often
be made
up with
thickness three
8-12D.
by means
in wood
should
are staggered
Figure noted
the
to prevent
of through-bolted the usual
one part
hooked
scarph.
be avoided,
joints
called
for good
thick
white
lead
the
scarphs.
measure.
If not
or heavy
paint.
permits.
of scarphs
commonly
from
in A is the very common The
it cannot
waterproof-glued
of lumber
types
When
slipping plain
scarph
B, is sometimes
in use,
and
by the other that
it should when
is extensively
employed
be
under used
in backbone
106
/iI
(ILDS,
TEM
PLrl
TES.
‘4 ND
‘I-II/i
HACKLWNl:
FEATHER
v
EDGE
ROLTS STAGGEPED
KnE’d
TH ICtiNE5S
A. PLA\h)
SCARPH
B.
H03ti
SCARPH
KEY
SCARPH
c.
Figure
8-13.
PEiZM’T5
~~OUIUIOII scarphs
-
rnCnl hers suck
JOT ,jtu’Gu,y lorlg
us ktds,
r.lnnlj!~s, clrld striuprs.
members. Just simply a plain
as effective, and easier to make, is the key scarph scarph mortised to take a tightly fitted rectangular
durable
like white
made
wood
of two wedges
oak or black
driven
sides of the timbers.
from
both
Such wedges
locust.
In large
timbers
sides at the same
shown in C. This is key, preferably of the key is sometimes
time and cut off flush with the
are made
with a taper
of about
fastenings
are carefully
planned
one-half
inch
to the
foot. The
scarphed
drawings experienced keel,
and
by the architect.
the timber,
scarphs
joints
while
most
A rough
the keys and nibs
builder
the designer
their
should
are made
not be able
or a competent
suitable
rule for the scarph
for use with
length
up to one-fourth
to locate
boatbuilder the available
a piece should
and
is six times
shown
the depth
of the depth.
of wood large enough be consulted
material.
on the of
If the infor the
for the layout
of
M
01.13.s.
TE.21
PI..*1
TES,
A ND 1.1IE R.~lI:KHo:v’E
107
Tenons The
mortise-and-tenon
ing grain
the keel in Figure blind,
joint
perpendicular
is sometimes
to each other.
S-12D
are typical.
that is, only part
way across
parts
are fitted
and
put together
together. with
Whatever white
called The
When
to lock adjoining
between
the vertical
the wood is not too thin,
the pieces, the case.
upon
joints
and therefore
the joint
lead on the mating
must
parts.
members
hav-
sternposts
and
the tenon
it is not visible be made
is made when
the
as snug as possible
Chapter
9
SETTING UP
With
the
backbone
and
molds
made,
the
builder
is ready
preparatory to framing the hull. Just as much care and accuracy work of setting up as went into the mold loft work and construction Continued
attrntion
later.
The
method
of setting
hull,
but
in general,
most
much
to detail
at this stage of the game up depends
small
craft
upon
up
upside
boat
in time saved
and construction
down,
the
should go into the of the backbone.
will pay dividends
the size, type.
are best built
to set
a method
of the that has
merit.
Upside Down or Right Side Up? Although
the majority
are constructrd boat
of boats,
excluding
right side up, it would
like a flat.bottomcd
skiff when
small
stock
be impractical
boats produced
on a mass basis,
to copy this routine
it is so easy to fasten
the bottom
in building
planks
a
with the
hull
inverted. By the same reasoning, flat-sectioned boats like v- and arc-bottomed boats hulls are also set up and built upside down. The same is true of small lapstrake that are planked over molds. In this case, the fitting of the lapped plank scams is very hulls, on which the much simplified with the hull upside down. Smail. strip-planked planking is started at the keel and worked toward the sheer, are best built right side up, because it is much easier to nail downhand. and if it has been decided to bend the frames of a round-bottomed boat on the inside of the ribbands as mentioned under Molds in Chapter 8, the boat should be built right side up in order to readily bend the frames. Any other method will be too heavy or bulky upright.
would be impractical. In other instances the finished hull for the amateur to turn over and should therefore be built
SETTING
Building
Under Cover
Considering
that
during
precious
your
cover
weather
if possible.
provides
can be a drawback
spare
also permits
means
of overhead
A good solid floor
is ideal
an. outdoor
construction
have
from
builders
found
somewhat
more
Building
Upside Down
When
building
difficult
upside
down,
on top of it accordingly. in Figure
bracing
of molds
be made
and
can
bring
task
under
well,
or rainy under
lights
backbone
and
to the roof
smooth.
On the other
as many
of bracing
work to a halt
be established
windy be built
evenings
to serve the
and
should
or not it is level and although
a grid must
amateur
the
frame
for weeks at a time.
and the framework
positioned
following
floor, the station spacing laid off along the centerline. and the station lines squared from the centerline. As previously described, the molds for upside down building extended
beyond
the boat
the sheer
and located
convenient
working
to ~II a~ bitrary
inverted
above
the highest
point
height.
The molds
forward
baseline
parailel
of amidships
are set on the wrong
their
proper
position
Use a plumb floor,
sides of the station
due to the shape
line to align
the centerline
and also ‘rse the plumb
and-aft
direction.
against
fore-and-aft
8 that
it would
molds:
Fasten
movement.
it is now that
to the floor
if the mold
cross spalls
this fact is realized.
the ends of the molds
It must
be emphasized
and molds properly. ribbands are fitted, will
not
be the
centerline
to bring that
where
them
the utmost
part and
were fitted
9-2.
on the
of a mold in a forebrace
them
securely
out in Chapter
at the same
level on all
floor is not perfectly
shims must be fitted should
out of
Figure
centerline
that it was pointed
to the proper care
will be forced
in the sketch,
the upper
If the building
of for
side of the station are applied. If the
with the boat
with blocks
You will remember
line of the spalls can be used to determine and
of a mold
calculated
are set up on the aft side
the ribbands as shown
line or a level to align
the molds
be helpful
lines,
of the hull,
off are
to the baseline
of the sheer by an amount
of the station lines, and those aft of amidships on the forward lines. The reason for this system will be obvious when the ribbands molds
is
is a description of how the 12.foot skiff shown A centerline is first drawn in on the be set up in such a manner.
9-1 might
The
hull
to be done
site can weather
be cold
your
work
whether
experience,
and
if it should
for boatbuilding,
time
A building
convenient
rafters. hand
109
LIP
between
level, the the floor
height. be taken
to align
the backbone
An extra hour or two spent on this job will be appreciated when frames are bent, and planking is shaped and fastened. The boat
same
on
and baseline,
both
waterlines
sides
if the
setting
and station
up is not
done
lines are all straight
accurately. lines,
The
and as such,
enable the builder to erect the backbone and molds with the use of vertical and horizontal lines just as the designer laid out his lines plan and construction drawings. Shores structure
and
braces
of sufficient
in any direction.
The
number braces
must may
be fitted
to prevent
be of low-quality
lumber
movement
of the
of any kind.
To continue setting up, drop the keel, with stem, transom, and knee attached, into position over the molds and screw the assembly to blocks on each mold. Secure the
-7
.III
I
110
SETTING
UP
Figure 9-1. The typical shown
before
setup,for building a small the installation q/the ribbands.
head of the stem to the building som after
making
floor with blocks
sure it is raked
to the correct
hull upside
and
square
everything has been done accurately, the station lines marked cide with the molds. If not, the frame is not properly alignzd One test of fairness bet, around the sheer. The
is to bend
the molds. If not,
ribbands
The
a long batten
test and adjust
should
batten, should
until
not be installed
with its forward test fair when
the batten until
Brace the tran-
to hold it in position. angle
touches
the molds
down,
across
the boat.
If
on the ‘n.eel should coinand must be corrected. end laid in the stem rab-
tried
anywhere
from
all the molds without have been
aligned
keel to forcing.
to your com-
plete satisfaction.
Building When
Outdoors
building
probably substantial
boats
the most timbers
outdoors,
satisfactory longer
both sides of the centerline
there
are many
for upside
than
the boat.
and made
arrangements
down
building
These
should
that
are workable,
but
is to use as a base a pair of be secured
level. The cross spalls
to the ground
on the molds
on
are fastened
to the parallr1 timbers. Crosspieces are fastened between the timbers to take the stem head and the transom braces. For building right side up outdoors, timbers are placed on the ground
athwartships
at stations
::F!?Ei-
Figure 9-2.
and staked
solidly
against
M~LW~ej LyM
LINE5-
7
movement.
Keel sup-
SETTING
<.;“,
UP
111
F em
2 c,‘-Trce \yb/ :‘h5’4JC’~Oh
&EL
5
;, ,
1
Figure 9-3. ports
are built
up with
mold
laterally.
(SW Figure
Building
to the proper
height,
and shores
are used to brace
the
9-3.)
Right Side Up
In the same
manner
lines are drawn those
blocks
as described
for boats
for motorboats,
that are
for building
are to be built
set on posts
upside right
erected
down,
a centerline
side up. Relatively at each
station.
and station
narrow The
keels, like
posts must
bc
securely nailed IO the floor and braced against movement, as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4. The heights of the posts arc- carefully measured from the full-size profile and
Figure 9-4. Cow WO?Ijbrms
of ktd
posls
112
SETTING
UP
Figure g-5. The backbone q/a Rhodcs.designed ketch. Note the husky blocks under the deadwood, the shores to prevent side movement of the backbone, and the transonl bracing to overhead.
checked
with the keel template.
turnbuckles Such
set up between
fastening
prevents
Quite
eye bolts
the
hull
forced into any place with shores upward and tilt it to one side. built
on their
from
being
construction,
flat keels,
keels are held down on such posts by
with
floor
near
each end of the keel.
raised off the posts when as this action tends to both
and wedges,
Posts are also used in sailboat are often
frequently,
in the keel and
but
the ballast
only
to shore
keel casting
planking is lift the hull
the stems.
Sailboats
and deadwood
added
after the hull is planked up. Or the complete backbone may be finished before setting up, as in the auxiliary in Figure 9-5, which shows husky keel blocks being used to preSuch keel blocks must be large enough to take subvent shifting of the structure. stantial
fastenings
to the floor
and
to take
the considerable
weight
of a boat
of this
type. Ribbands After
the backbone
the ribbands mentioned
and
are applied under
Molds
all molds to hold
have
been
the parts
in Chapter
set up accurately
rigidly
8, where
and properly
in position.
Ribbands
it was pointed
out that
braced,
were briefly they
are long
3, /
,?,
,~
iP
SE?‘I‘ING
UP
113
Figure 9-6. The tv’cur,from the stern qu.arter qf a double-ended auxiliary after.frantes have been bent inside the ribbarldb. Note the excellent bracing qf molds and sternpost. The a~~~emnre of the ribbauds i.r pleasing as well as practical. aud the third and fourth ri0tmnd.v nbozw the keel are correctly spliced. (Rosenfeld)
strips of wood bent
around
the frames
between
made not
to shape
perfectly cluttered
frames
clear
the molds
in order
the molds.
The function
by the photograph,
up with
scaffolding.
to the ribbands,
to provide
Figure they
of molds
9-6. which
As considerable
it is best that
a form
pressure
be of moderately
against
which
and ribbands
to bend
should
be
is a rare treat
because
it is
is needed
to clamp
the
hard
and strong
wood,
such as fir or yellow size of the ribbands.
pine. Boats vary to such an extent that there They must be stiff to retain the hull shape
is no general rule for when the frames are
bent
but
and hold in place
against
them,
that they force the molds of the hull, the ribbands generally
bent
not so heavy
that
they are hard
to bend
or
out of alignment. As a safeguard against distorting the shape are applied alternately port and starboard. Ribbands are
on the flat from stock
like 1% n x 1% “, and
spaced
about
10 rr apart,
or
Figure 9-7. Above: ?‘irv mm ut right arc’ fitting riblmndJ prior tojiwmirl.g (1 raciq O?IIO/I of Ihc .sloop, Note n;i>ld brarcjs to thcJ mftcsrs ofthc buildi?zg nlld the strongbd (Roscw/dd). Below. Figure 9-8. Thh nlold cross s/~uIls on t bra cent c~rliw q f‘ the hr. molds aw stackrd h nlold i.s /wing sat up cind rclwfilllvchrckcd ,fk itlig” nl(‘rlt. 0th thr backgrou~ld.
,,Jw”,~“<
‘/,
II
II
I
SETTING
Figure 9-9. A v-bottomed hull completeiy set up with snwn~fram~ and ready for double-dia~gonul planking. (Courtesy of Hz&ins Yacht Corp.) -
lj
116
SETTING
UP
1%” x 2” spaced molds
before
The
about
getting
differences
9-6 and
in ribband
9-7. Figure
has already
been
sizes between
Figure
sizes for the boats
have relatively
light frames.
should
ribbands
fastening
various
hull
in the two pictures
The ribbands
be located
should
where
and close spacing
the middle
first and,
mold with screws having be removed
be tried
around
the
types can be seen in Figures heavy
cruising
for a racing indicates
sloop.
auxiliary
that the racing
be in single
lengths
that
A comparison sloop will
if possible,
other-
be spliced as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-6. This type of splice tends to flat spots in the ribbands, but as a further precaution against hard
the splices
Husky
definitely
for a moderately
9-7 shows the setup
of the ribband
spots,
should
for all the ribbands.
9-6 shows the hull
framed;
wise they should eliminate unfair
A sample
a foot apart. out the stock
easily
working
washers
as the planking
bends
in the ribbands
will contribute
under
toward
toward
the ends,
their heads.
securing
Put them on by
the ribbands
Screws will permit
to each
the ribbands
to
top ribbands should go on first. fitted parallel to the sheer and a few inches above it. The rest of them should be run in fair lines similar to strakes of planking and as illustrated in Figure 9-6. The ribbands are spaced
closer
frames
will be fairly
where
the frames
is fitted.
are easiest.
a fair boat.
The
will be bent
to the sharpest
curves
than
where
the
flat.
Careful mold loft work and setting up will make running ribbands an easy job and will eliminate the task of trimming and shimming molds to get the ribbands co touch all molds bands,
and
on the inside Running dition
still remain
fair.
it will pay to check of the ribbands
the ribbands usually
the shape
V-Bottomed It should
If considerable
the sections
to see if it touches
is the last job before
is the cause
trouble
by bending
of excited
all of them
framing
anticipation
is encountered
a batten
fairing
into position while bent
is started,
the rib-
like a frame
in a fair curve.
and the hull in this con-
on the part
of the builder,
for now
of the hull may be appreciated.
Hulls be understood
without
mention
that
hulls
other
Than the round-bottomed
type must be set up, aligned, and made rigid with the same care. There is no point in doing an accurate job of laying down and mold making unless the setting up and the following
work
follow the same
standard.
Chapter
10
FRAMING
There
are
two
basic
systems
for
framing
a
hull,
Transverse framing is the most common and being have become known as “ribs.” Transverse frames are either pieces
bent
from
one piece,
as in Figures
bent on top of each other,
from
boards
usually
and made
have
up of two layers
the bent
non-existent,
sawn from
frames,
as islands
ble sawn according
to both
10-l.)
for v-bottomed
Sawn
frames
and l-4. Some designers their v-bottomed hulls. For the longitudinal the
hull,
but
longitudinals quite
are
craft
likely to be built
undertaking certain
before
V-Bottom The
a craft
lofting
you refer
in wood,
is limited
starting
that
kinds
bent of more
he is aware
of crooks.
of sawn
transverse
is
(See Figure frames
for
Fore-and-aft
This system
for metal suitable
framing,
l-3
are used to shape
system.
and sawn v-bottom
complex
hulls
frames
in Figures
and bent
frames
strength.
but is well suited
of what
to moderate for bent
are shown
in the transverse
frames
sawn”
are sawn from crooks or douhulls
framing
such frames wooden hulls
or “double
Small
material
to the two types of framing
by the amateurwith other
than
up the necessary
for construction
construction. In this book discussion
in general,
apart
longitudinal.
from two or more
of wood,
and the supply
arc-bottomed
use a combination
system
farther
are used to build
complicated
and
and
laminated
joints.
where
the frames
the size of the boat
framing
l-5, crooks
in places
in the Bahamas,
and builders
spaced
l-4 and natural
with staggered
although
such
transverse
oriented athwartships. for round-bottomed
can get
boats of welded for the size of frames.
the builder
Before
should
be
is involved.
Frames and construction to Figures
l-3
and
of frames l-4 and
for a v-bottomed the explanation
boat
should
in Chapter
be understood 8. The
frames
if are 117
118
FRAMING SAWN FPAME
-(A&XT 50% REtiT
CEAdlEbZ THAti Fb?AME)
Figure 10-l. Sawn and double-sawer round-bottomed are not easy. fir the amateur lo construct. made bear
from
the full-size
properly.
The
sections
process
and must
of picking
be beveled
up bevels
frames
on the edges so the planking
is explained
in preceding
will
chapters.
Bent Frames The
bending
peace
of frames
of mind
dispel
this fear.
small
boat
for a round-bottomed
as he contemplates For this reason,
having
light
boat
seems
the construction it is recommended
frames
in order
to gain
to disturb
of such that
a hull,
the novice
experience
the amateur’s
but a trial start
should
with a fairly
and overcome
the mental
block that is the principal obstacle to frame bending. We all know that any piece of dry wood may be picked from the lumber pile and sprung to a curve of large radius, but for bending the tight curves found in frames, the wood must be both wet and hot. The material most commonly used for bent frames in the United States is white oak, because
of its durability
abroad.
Although
as low as 12 percent that
the amateur
heats
rapidly,
quired
and
strength,
responsible is suitable needs
only
elm
wood, heat
is used
have proven
for bending
use unseasoned and
while
agencies
that
if handled
because
to bend
extensively properly,
it is usually
rather
than
in Canada
oak with a moisture
and
content
it is recommended
free from surface
the addition
checks,
of moisture
re-
by dry wood.
The
frame
achieved
stock
should
by splitting
be as straight-grained
a plank
with the grain
as possible
and then
sawing
and
this is sometimes
out the frames
parallel
to
the split edges. The stock should be about a foot or so longer than the finished length of the frame. It is best to bend the framing stock on the flat of the grain (Figures 6-3 and
lo-2),
for not only will it bend
when
plank
boats
call for a flat frame
standpoint when
turned
are driven
of theory, to bend
the frame,
on its other
edge
crossways
this way but it is then
is relatively
strength great.
if it does not readily
Speciftcations
on the flat.
is to make
aft and in practice
bend
However,
to split for some from
the
member and thus does its job best If this were carried too far it would
so a good compromise as it is fore and
the wood’s tendency
minimized.
as 1 R x 1% rr bent
is a transverse
dimension
it is just as strong
easier
through
size such
a frame
its athwartships
be impossible Then
fastenings
in the direction
the frame
square.
it may be quickly first attempted.
/
, 4)
_
I‘
I
119
FRAMING
RIGHT
WRONG
Figure
10-2. Frames
should
be bent
on the J2at o/ the
grain.
Steaming
Arrangements
You may have seen the steam box at a local boatyard in action. However, the source of steam does not have to be elaborate when only one boat is to be built. It may be generated rigged
in an old hot water
boiler
so a wood fire may be built
of water
must
the water
be ample
from
under
for the period
a house,
a large
it and the steam of time
kettle,
or any similar
piped
you plan
device
to the box. The supply
to work.
Watch
this point,
for
goes fast.
The steam necessary,
box is wooden.
and
possible
that
large
made
enough
the garboard
as steam
for a half and
tight as possible
dozen
frames
one or two other
and
planks
by caulking
with cotton
some
to spare.
room
will need
steaming
if
It is
to bend
them in place, so make the box large enough for this job. There must be a door at one end, opposite to the end with the steam supply pipe, and the cracks are packed with rags to prevent steam from leaking out. Needless to say, the box should be located close to the boat,
because
bending
calls
for fast work
before
the frames
become
too
cool. Handle the frames with cot ton work gloves. A rough rule for steaming is one hour A few trials will have to be made to get the hang of it. per inch of frame thickness. Light length end.
frames
are
sometimes
of pipe set at an angle This scheme
unduly
drying
and the upper steaming
Frames
well because,
the frames.
Strings
supple
in boiling
are shown
water
by placing
with a fire built
with water
should
end of the pipe should
arrangements
improvised
Bending
works
made
with the ground,
in the pipe,
under there
be tied to the frames
be stuffed in Figure
is little
in a
danger
for pulling
with rags to retain
10-3. Others
them
the pipe’s lower them
the steam.
of out,
Typical
on the same order
may
be
by the builder.
the Frames may either
and then fitted
be bent
to shape
in the boat
to the boat cold. The former
frames
for your
boat
should
be followed.
are relatively Guided
heavy
by the frame
agains:
the ribbands
is by far the easier
or the hull is extremely layout
or bent
method,
on the construction
on forms
and unless
shapely, plan,
the
this system first mark
the frame positions on all the ribbands and at the keel, marking both edges with a thin batten the same width as a frame and making sure the marks are made at right angles
120
FRAMING
KEEP WATER
. .j ,:
‘,.,:... ,: .,....
Figure 10-3. Steaming
to the centerline.
Start
framing
allows your experience sharp bends are likely The
actual
Then
start
procedure
as possible
the bending
bend
to lie flat more
the ribbands.
against
against
than
inboard
it then
Take
like that
with hands
clamp
a frame
in Figure
it at the topmost
the ends
as you progres-
inboard,
and forced
the frame
into position
may be employed
can be clamped
to aid in
to the ribbands
give it a downward
moved third
learn
from tends
that
the bending
the steam
box.
the box. When
must
If possible, the boat
be done quickly two men should
is designed
the will
against
1s you
wallop
on the
head to make sure that it touches all the ribbands, and then temporarily toenail the ribbands so that your clamps will be ready for further duty on the next frame. will soon
box
it in place.
or feet, all the while twisting
iO-4A
ribband,
where
out of the steam
of the frame
the head
can be flattened
shown
toward
to fit the keel and nail
By pulling
should it be troublesome. are available, the frame
are likely to be easy. This
progresses
on the head
the ribbands
and
A gadget
it, otherwise
the bends
goes as follows.
the ribbands.
enough,
twisting in the bevel If plenty of hands bend
where
cut the heel of the frame by pulling
sively force the frame frame
arrangements.
to accumulate as the work to be encountered.
bending
and as rapidly
amidships
-.
it to You
once the frame has been rework on the bending while a
with frames
in one piece from sheer to
sheer, there must absolutely be two men bending, one on a side, each working from the keel toward the sheer, in order that the frame can be completely bent before it cools. In many in full-bowed sketch
all the frames
hulls
D of Figure
in a short angles
boats
length.
and those
S-12 are often Because
to the centerline
against
the planking
frames
and
may be bent along
are shown
the horn
troublesome
of this,
in Figure
timber
bow and
forward
lo-4B.
above.
However,
aft of the waterline
due to the necessity
it is permissible
in the extreme so they slope
as described
from
The same
to depart to allow is true
of twisting from
the frames
keel to sheer.
the frames in hulls
These
of stern
bending
like
in a bevel at right
to lie naturally are called
frames
cant
in a double-
ender .
Cold-Fitted
Frames
Framing the counter stern, done very carefully if bumps
as the type of stern in Figure and hollows are to be avoided.
8-12D is called, should be In the interest of fair lines,
121
FRAMING
v
/-
CANT FfZAMES
c
TWhSTlhki
BE\/EL
Figure 10-4.
the frames later,
for such sterns
or oversized
straightened inner frames The
frame
to the proper
edge is finally
stringers
dre either
excess
to correspond
to be installed
in cross-section
curvature
over a mold outside
of the boat,
first
bent
to that
later
on the outside
will fit properly.
to the double-sawn into
the frame
frame
These
of the frame cold-fitted,
illustrated
is accomplished
If the use of cold-fitted to Figure
lo-5A
quired
for the forms,
frames
cannot
be avoided,
over which to bend bend
the frames.
a piece of soft iron
you must
by padding
make
so that beveled
in Figure
bands with short lengths of wood in way of the frame location. Curvature out of a frame after it has cooled and set, but none may be added. similar
as described
stock is overbent on the ribbands. after which it is removed, the ribbands. The curve, and then beveled to lie against
beveled
and clamps are similar
bent
10-l.
the rib-
can be taken
one or two forms
To get an idea of the curves
rod or lead wire against
re-
the ribbands
and use it as a guide to build a form. The frames must always be bent to more curve than necessary, and the form can be padded to vary the shape. When ready to bend, the end of the frame is slipped under the pipe shown in the figure and wedged; then Leave the frames on the form at least overthe bending is done with a steady pressure. night
so they will cool and
set properly
and
not lose too much
shape
when
removed.
122
FRAMING
OWNG USE OF 5TEEL S-t-HAP IGHT EIJOUGH To bEUD EA’. ILY) l=‘b?ELk.l-f SPLlTTlhlG OF FVA,ME Ul- Cd FORM SUCH AS ABOVE
0. Figure When
I& FORQ CO wO& Rlb’ETED TO STICAFI
10-5. thrre
is too much
CUI’W,
thr frames can be straightened with a device like of the shop building. Reverse curves can be made at a time, allowing the first bend to set weil, and then nailing braces across the curve to hold the shape while the reverse is being bent. Due to tensile stress, the outer fibers of a frame will tend to split when the curve is
Figure lo-6 on a bench on thr form by bending
sharp, frame
or a corner one curve
found long ago that but someone is a very successful way to combat
10 5~ is typical
of the simple
is also present curves, a strap
when bending similar to that
CaSes the strap
need
such as around
the turn
scheme
a metal strap bent along the outside of the this breakage. The strap shown in Figure
involved
and is very handy.
only extend
somewhat
of the bilge
more
than
of a motorboat.
able to judge which bends may Rive trouble, counter of boats like Figure 8-12D, in which
to split
the length After
of the hard
some practice
bend,
you will be
like those in the S frames forward of the case the frame stock may be split with a
SPLIT
Figure
The tendency
sharp curves against ribbands. If you find some bad illustrated may be devised to do the same job. In most
BEf.J-7 FRAME
FRAMING
fine saw cut as shown
in Figure
of fact this is easier ribbands.
When
use. If splitting
than
10-6 to permit
using
the frames is resorted
a strap
when
the bend
to be made
the frames
are bent
easily.
123
As a matter
in the hull inside
the
are bent outside of the ribbands, a strap is not difficult to to, the frame should be fastened in way of the cut as soon as
possible.
Floor Timbers One
of the most
timber.
These
between
of the hull
ably not remain
material,
and backbone.
planks
frame
members
pieces of f!at-grained
the frames
the garboard each
important
and
tight.
their
Floors
is securely
floors, along
are generally
fastened
usually
Without
fastenings
frame
is the so-called
oak, are the strength severe strains
the rabbet.
placed
floor or floor
and
would
the hull would
alongside every frame but there are certain
to the backbone,
connection
be imposed
on
prob-
to ensure that exceptions to
this rule. You will see plans for some powerboats and light centerboard sailboats with floors located at only every other frame, but in the interest of safety, most boats of the cruiser type, whether sail or power, do not omit any of them. Floors are set on edge on top of the backbone structure and drift or through-bolted to frames are either bolts to it, depending upon their location in the boat. Fastenings or copper
rivets.
backbone
permits,
There
are always two bolts
and good
practice
through
calls for three
to the keel where
the width
or four fastenings
to the frame
of the on
each side. Floors are shnwn ly visible
in Figures l-3. 1-4, 1-5, 6-1, 8-8, and 8-12D and areclearwell illustrates the b- ! 1, 9-5, 9-8 and 10-8. The latter picture
in Figures
bolting
of frames
It should
be
to tl-,e floors. noted
in
Figure
9-8
that
floors
have
already
been
fitted
backbone, although the boat has not yet been framed. This method is common but would be recommended to the amateur tice for the professional builder, reluctance,
because
point.
With
this system,
each
frame,
bolted
and
in position.
the mold loft work involved might try his patience each floor must be preshaped from a full-size
correct bevels In v-bottomed However,
the shape
and
are not so many
not
as it is with bent-frame
as much The
of a chore
thickness
the frames
there
of floors should
in v-bottomed
be as specified
boats.
In bent-frame
is obtained
the floor can be being an essen-
simultaneously
of them
to make,
pracwith
to the breaking section drawn at
must be cut on three edges before hulls, floors must also be preshaped,
tial part of each frame. each frame being built,
to the
with that
of
so the lofting
is
hulls. on the plans hulls
most
and is usually of the floors
the same as are the same
thickness or shghtly less than the thickness of the frame. Those under the mast steps and engine beds in both type boats are made heavier to take the extra strains found in those areas and to accept the fastenings that run through the adjoining parts at these the keel casting and points. Floors in way of ballast keels arc Jored for bolts through the diameter of the bolts. are of a siding equal to the ordinary flour: nlus , that floors be carefully fitted. Like all joints in a well-built boat., it is impt.,--ltive They
are made
ends
of the boat
to have full contact the floors
with the frames,
are beveled
and where
off to fit tightly
the frames
as shown
twist in the
in Section
A-A in
FRAMING -
BAT7-d (OR USE RlBbV%?)
AT LE‘-‘EL
OF TOP OF FLOOR TY MEASURE 0Ek’EL Od OLIT0CARD EQGE
KEEL,
cBEtEL FLOOR ‘ro FIT TIGHTAGAI~~YT FRAME -- PLACE FLOORS CM I=‘OR72 51 DE OF FRAMES FCR’D 015 MbSHll: Od AFT SIDE AFT OF Ii4lMHIP
Figure
Figure ships,
10-7.
The beveling
10-7. Due to the hull curving the
placed
twist
in the frames
on the forward
the frames
from
for one reason
and .fastening
in toward
side of the frames to the stern.
or another
at the option
movement
of the parts
when
the hull
installation
forward
Longitudinal Although hull
Strength
fore-and-aft
is all or partially
because planks
or a short
they on
fitted
stringers
is stressed.
Limber
10~7A) so rain
than
about
one-half
shown
in the photograph
otherwise
holes are cut on the bottom or bilge water will drain
to the
The outboard edges of the floors are This bevel may be obtained from a rib-
may be sprung
and
planked, on the
To save weight
other
and on the aft side of
floor may be located
around
clamps
they
may
or not inside
may
the adjacent
the boat of the
not be fastened
be considered
part
is decked.
frames.
the smallest
and
hulls,
the width
make are
installation
tapered
at the ends
frames
for
before
the
of the workboat
install these pieces in single in Chapter 8 and as shown
in Figure
and
strengthen
the clamps
from
a maximum and
10-8. If material
framing
clatnps
the
Stringers
lengths, they may be pieced in Figure 8-13.
hull
and be carefully oak where weight
easier,
in width
of the boat.
in place of the
Stringers
They
siderahly and to be most effective they should fit snugly They a .e made of hard pine or Douglas fir and sometimes jectionable.
are
Members
arc used whether
edge
of amidships
the floors
to fit the member it rests upon, and many proinch or so over the keel to aid in preventing
(Figure
batten
and aft of amid-
consequently
of the designer.
low point of the bilge for removal by pumping. beveled so the planking will bear against them. band in the vicinity, the same purpose.
forward
the ends;
An occasional
The bottom edge of a floor is beveled fessionals prefer to notch them a half edges of floors before
are important.
the centerline
will bc toward
amidships
of floors
hull
are con-
fastened. is not ob-
and stringers,
in
amidships
to
clamps
are clearly
is not available
out with scarphs
as described
to
FRAMING
Figure 10-8. (Roscwfihi)
Bilgr stringers there
v-bottomed
boats
aground
be severai
and plugged
board
corners
possible fastening.
boats except side
Stringers
of the
give valuable
is usually
where
where
they will be visible
of the stringers
to the position upon
bolts are used.
They
shown
builders.
The
chamfered stringers
on the drawings,
the relative
thickness
In some boais and
sprung
found
in
if a boat should
on each side made tightly together. wood screws, ex-
the upper
and lower in-
on a machine
be located
run as far fore and
of the piece,
ones, and in
the screws are counter-
or beaded
should
“ribs”
are not
support
one stringer
in quarters,
are sometimes
cnllpd
the smallest
hull.
strakes, and when multiple, the strakes are wedged is fastened to each frame with staggered flat-head
by professional
depending
:rn each
of the clrne.
in heavy construction,
appearance
why bent jLarnes nw often
and lay over on her side. There
bored
and
may because
_ up of one or more The bilge stringer cept
shoua
are used in all round-bottomed
powerboats run
T1zi.r photo~gru#
125
for
as closely
as
aft as is practical,
or shored
in place
for
126
FRAMING
DECdED
oPEh1 ROUND BOTTOM
CHIME
Figure
The
Scr&ions
10-g.
showing
BOATS
sht~?r
dam/E
sheer clamp is located on the inside of the frames as shown in Figure 10-9. r;atl 4,r a:~n to show :hat in decked boats the upper edge of !O- !(! has been espe-.-..y
Figure
the clamp
is set down
plus the depth sheerline mum
from the sheer line a distance equal to the thickness of decking It is important to keep this point in mind or else the
of the deck beams.
will not be at the right
strength.
the hull
This means
before
planking,
installing
that the
in place
of the hull, and
then
heights
interfering
The clamps
if the amateur clamps,
temporarily
until
the two planks replaced
from
and
the molds
OEck
with
are bolted
should
the bolts
to the frames
go ahead
would
have
for maxi-
and completely to extend
plank
through
the
fastenings. I am a little ahead of myself, There are two ways of gerting around this, although One way is to fasten the upper two since planking will be discussed in the next chapter. planks
possibly
height.
the plank
planking
are taken
fastened
for good.
to adjacent
IO-IO.
In.
decked
frames,
After
the fitting
the molds
and bolting
are taken
out
of the clamps
The other method is to transfer the sheer then cut away enough of the molds to in-
SHEER LitJE-TRAt-&FEP THlS HEIGHT FROM MOLDS TO FEAMES
0EAM
-i-H~tJrclER CLAMP lhl HU HAdtdG DECK SHELF
Figure sheer.
is completed.
off to enable
hulls,
PLAdE l-C’ FIT AGA IhITi- FIZAMEF
the top edge of the clamp
is placed
below the
STRlhlGte TWItOUQH
00l.TdD FLOOCS
ENGIJE
STLlhlGtP
‘--5TQ
t..iGEk5 Ob’EQ
SINGLE
\ -4%
Jj
EtiGlNE
j\m!-J_
TW,rJ
ii. J
I(
1)
11 ,i..~il~_ii~~,l.-~i~~
‘!
1
ENGINE
~~ml~e_IT;~m ~1; ~~~s~.~~~~~~r~~-
~~.~2z:~~~~71~_ -7, . se: e0.r•r .~ -YY ‘J ~~~~~~~I:~~~~~~ai’“~~~~.
z iI:::-T~~3?.. _ _--._ ll-~$g!===-~----- -. - -~~:~~~-l~~~_a_-al
Lmm-,--m
_------_--
_._-------
_----5
Figure 10-11. Engine
E\G’UE
stringers
and beds in a powerboat
hull.
hOTbtE_7
F PA’.‘ES
8
=L~OZZ%
128
FRAMING
Figure 10-12. Auxiliary
stall the clamps during
before
this work.
rebuilding.
planking.
The molds,
The clamps
sailboat
The
uppermost
of course,
are run from
corners
are sometimes
hold the frames
be used for another
the transom Except (Figure
chamfered
bed installation.
ribbands
cannot
planed to fit snugly against the frames. necessary if the clamp has much depth lower inside
engine
in position
boat without
to the stem and the outside in straight-sided boats, 10-10). Like the bilge or beaded
some
faces are
this is always stringers, the
for looks.
Clamps in v-bottomed hulls are installed and fastened when the frames are set up, and with the chines, are used to hold the frames in alignment. Because of the depth of v-bottom
frames,
the clamps
are more
often
screwed
than
bolted.
Engine Stringers In order
to distribute
vibration,
engine
the weight
stringers
of the engine,
are found
and
in all properly
also to aid in elimination de+ed
motorboats.
of hull
Sometimes
of oak, but more often of such woods as fir or yellow pine, the stringers are run as far fore and aft as possible. To accomplish this, they are occasionally pulled toward the centerline
forward
to permit
top of the floors. board
stringers
tions are usually straight
This
being
The stringers
planned
to the floors.
frames.
(Sep Figure and
craft.
stringers
figured from the horizontal bolts, with allowances made
boat
members
lengths,
conflicting
due to the curving
but if necessary
on
to the in-
They
installaare run
hull shape.
It is
they may be scarphed,
fastenings.
not resting
centerline
fastened and
for twin-engine
the floors and are set on the frames.
stringers
10-l 1.) The
still be securely
stringers
‘/RU to % n over the floors and
Outboard
the engine
and
in a single-engine
The outboard
in single
to avoid
further
stringers
be as long as the inner
are notched
bolted drawings
to extend
to both
too far out to catch
to have the stringers
the joints
them
in a twin-rngine
and cannot
desirable
applies
and through
or drift
on floors are through-bolted
frames,
to the
of the propeller
spaced
center-to-center for the thickness
equally
to each
shaft side,
is laid out from the distance
the
being
distance of the engine holding-down of the engine bed material.
34
FRAMING
Engine
Beds
In motorboats
the engine
beds
may or may not be notched engine thrust to the stringers, the engine
in an auxiliary
stringers,
10-12.) of the
Anywhere
from
hardwood
to the engine
as far aft as possible
In all boats
to determine
centerline
is fitted
are bolted
over the floors. If enough notches are not necessary.
and in this case the beds are notched
(See Figure sulted
129
the vertical propeller
shaft
V4“to 14 ” is allowed
shims when with mounts
the engine that
diagram
is aligned
10-11,
and
itself to the installation boited
for the engine the
top
edge
of
to them.
must
be con-
of the bolt lugs in relation
to determine
between
have a vertical
does not lend
of the bottom
in order
Figure
over the floors and drift
the installation position
stringers,
bolts are used to transfer the The present custom of having
of the
to the beds.
the lugs and the beds for the insertion with the propeller
adjustment.
shaft,
unless
of
the engine
Chapter
11
PLANKING
Planking
a hull
is often
the most
always one of the simplest out the width not
seem
teaching. learn
aspects
of the planks
to give The
it much
stumbling
planking
difficult
part
for the professional.
and
thought
due
gested that he study the planking Through the ages a good many
tion.
Seams
pearance,
open
will become
unsightly
and
does
first-hand
it is not easy to It is strongly
sug-
on boats in yards, especially of the type he will build. methods of planking have been devised, but only the and
for appearance
so the lines of the seams are pleasing
and shut a little
especially
in words.
laying
the expert
because
the subject
and
has trouble
while
experience
is understandable,
to explain
most common ones will be discussed here. The individual planks are called strakes, shaped
seams,
to accumulated
of an amateur
for the amateur
The beginner
the run of the planking
from a book or even
proportioned,
of boatbuilding
due to shrinking
on the topsides,
and swelling,
the strakes
as well as difficult
they should
should
to keep
be nicely
to the eye from every direcand for well-kept
ap-
not be too wide or the seams
tight.
Carve1 Planking It will be well to discuss most
common,
and
smooth
much
planking
of what
at first (Figure
is said
boat will apply also to other methods. Carve1 planking is made with the seams to receive seams outside 130
cotton
is called is about
caulking,
“out-gauge”
which (Figure
x6” per inch
tight
makes
carve1
and should
thickness.
The
as this method
planking
on the inside
the planking
11 -lA)
of plank
about
11-l).
a round-bottomed
and open
watertight. be made planking
is the
on the outside
The
bevel
so the opening material
on the on the
should
be
131
PLANhING
‘de. Ihe edge ma, be 5w3=, 3 the nc,e 3- *ne 3--er
Figure 1 l-l. ordered and
somewhat
thicker
sandpapering,
1 I -1B).
than
Most of the hull
the amount,
planking
planking.
finished
the inside
more.
more
having
planking
than
A straightedge
1 l- 1C. It is not recommended
a boat
dimension
face of planks
will not need
may require
Figure
his first boat,
the specified
also for hollowing
but that on the turns
Cam4
that
to allow for planing on sharp
an extra
turns
!/A”for finishing,
held on a frame
that an amateur
is less than
(Figure
will determine
choose
to build,
as
r& ” thick.
Butts in Planking Some
small
boats
can
be planked
with full-length
strakes.
but
inasmuch
as the usual
available lengths of planking material are from 12 to 20 feet in intervals the strakes will ordinarily consist of two or three pieces hutted end-to-end. standpoint
of strength,
out before
the work is started,
than
try to visualize
rough
diagram
Figure
the location
of butts
taking
the butts
on the frame
11-2 shows
a satisfactory
adjacent
not have butts
strakes
made
blocks snugly drain
block
against water
between as thick
be sawn
Set the butt
a plan
should at hand.
it is much
a pair
to length
the
otherwise frame
blocks
but don’t
of frames,
and
requires
in white
and
should shorter
lead,
clog the drains
frame
spaces
the frames, their
and
easier
be laid Rather
to make
fastenings
a
find
in Figure
between,
between
them.
planed
and Butts
on the outside corners
those
used
to fit
chamfered
Using
a butt
to block
for the normal
it, or one of the modern 11-2.
that
being backed by an oak or the strake of planking. Butt
outboard than
you will note
strakes
on top of the block.
if you can
shown
three
the joint wider than
have
be trapped
without
three
to fit between
might
out the butts,
space
without
as the frame
the planking,
that
thinner than planking. sealers,
should
midway
should
of the boat,
way of laying
be in the same frame
are
and
the material
as a guide.
no two of them should
mahogany
is important,
into consideration
of two feet, From the
marine
132
PLA NRING
,-
pi-Ah-e,
- FF?A WE-5
--~----~~ t P-F-T=
I
*
+ ,
LACCT
Figure 1 l-2.
Planking
Let us consider
carve1 planking
the sheer
the bottom under
is called.
strake
first,
planking
coming
about
I
+
+
,
I
i
I
2= PLAti!vi.hiG 3’dT-r5 for
thm5 diagram)
7. The
round-bottomed
boat
normal
sequence
planking
then
the garboard. of the bilge,
and one on the bottom,
like the 12.footer
the two adjoining and
to then
broad
alternately
with the shutter,
amidships
is the tot:J
at the longest toward
number
frame.
the turn
of strakes
The
to be used,
garboard
of the bilge,
will
is
strakes,
plank
one
as the last plank
determined
be the widest,
with the topside
strakes
As to exactly
how wide to make
the planks
on a given
boat,
the sheer
strake.
for good
appearance,
These
sizes are not hard
and fast,
but it should
by the and
the
the narrowest the rest of the
this is where
spection of other boats can help. The following is offered as a general tion: 6” to 8” for the garboard, diminishing to 4th * for the topsides
Bend
used
for the amateur
and all about the s&me width. The sheer strake can be a little wider than topside planks because of the rub rail often used.
pearance,
L iI
b-+- -12 n the bottom planking and the sheer. (See Because it is difficult to clamp the shutter, it should be a plank that is without twist, and . hat does not require steaming.
widths will decrease
Naturally, boat are
:
midway
first consideration
widths
*
to the turn
the sheer strake
Figure 1 l-l.) fairly straight, The
?
sco e ne~esor\l
a simple
loft work in Chapter
to fashion strake
(hi0
i
Procedure
to illustrate and
ComerS TITdn’r wa-2r
you:
in-
guide to proporand 5” to 6” for
be remembered
that
the topside strakes should not be over 4 th m wide amidships. these widths apply only at amidships, as the frame girths at the snds of the less, and the planks must taper in width toward the ends. Again for apthe taper a thin
batten
should around
be uniform. the midship
frame,
mark
the length
from
the keel rab-
PLANKING bet to the sheer, sheer for
strake the
and
purpose
tapered
frame
of obtaining
a little
pearance
lay out the plank
on the midship at the
bow
and
of the plank
and remove
is the sheerline,
Then
run
the bottom stern
of the line is satisfactory,
on all the frames,
widths.
and
edge
and
mark
lay off the width
a full-length the
batten
of the
plank.
batten
must
The
Of course,
from which
the thickness
for the
the frames
plank
be fair.
the edge of the plank
the batten.
desired
around
133
should
be
the
ap-
When
at the boat’s ends and
it is understood
that the top edge
of the decking,
if any,
must
be
out on the frames,
it
deducted. With must
the shape
of the sheer
be transferred
will fit properly for doing
to a plank
without
strake
determined
for cutting.
“cdgesetting”
this is known
and
This
must
(springing
marked
be done
edgewise
accurately,
into
place).
so the plank The procedure
as spiling.
Spiling The
shape
is obtained
with
the aid of a spiting
somewhat
longer
than
thickness.
Several
such battens
use. The
batten
any individual
is clamped
strakc,
should
for its entire
a little
below the top edge of the plank
of the batten sprung
will be parallel
on edge.
the spiling
batten
and
batten
,~;VIJI~CPin shape accuracy
and that it is not sprung
the plank
is to place between
from
lie more
than
on the batten Repeat
frame
numbers
lettrrcd
square
at every
circle
and
a batten
a couple
sure
edgewise. This
it lies flat against
Its upper
that
and
with a curved
of inches
from
take your carpenter’s
edge should
the plank
pencil
compass
For greater
be made
identifying
at the ends
all points
so they will not become
of the plank,
and set the legs with
labeling
for the particular
confused
plank
with points
if the
marks.
down from the line of the top edge of the plank. and
idea of the d[p
the greatest space between the edge of the batten With one leg of the compass on the plank mark,
frame
been
whole
so determine
and thr edge of the plank.
be
the edge
has probably
will not fit. The
to he made
the
edge should
does not mean
If it is. the batten
the spiling
the edge of the batten
To USC the spiling batten, a gap about 4.1” more than plank marks on the frames. 11-S.)
edge.
it like the plank
on hulls with a lot of sheer, should
point
made
make
to be made.
to the plank
is a piece of softwood
and Y/1,,”or less in they will be mutilated with
because
to the franles;
frames
which
4” to 6” wide,
be on hand,
or tacked
width
batten,
about
and the make a
(See Figure
the points
with
with a numbered
for other
planks
later
or on.
Do not change the opening of the compass while spiling the plank. Mark cuts across the batten for the butt, the stern ending, or the stem rabbet, as the case may be. Now take
the batten
(Figure this time, board. until width:
off the boat
l l-3B).
Still
and
lay it on the board
not changing
the compass
with one leg of the compass
Before
making
the points then
tack
any actual
on a point
marks,
that
opening,
on the batten,
test with
the compass
will be as close to the edge of the plank the batten
against
is to be used for the plank reverse
as possible
the procedure, mark and
points
and on the
shift the batten
in order
to not waste
movement.
Mark all the points and the endings of the plank. Remove the spiling batten and run a fairing batten through all the points and draw the edge of the plank with a pencil. Do not worry if the shape
of the line is peculiar.
If the spiling
has been done correctly,
134
PLANKING
tiotc opcnsnq of compllss me same durvnq +ransfcras
-1
i .L
./i
I-
.
to 17
wmdhen sP~h?q
I t3oordin Denbf .-c
I:;,
I
\
*
l
wmemzeecw
mm .
S”,&
e&cd
Figure 1 l-3.
the plank
will fit in place
when
bent
around
the frames.
boat, pick off the width of the sheer strake that and marked on the frames. At the corresponding the plank
widths
the plank.
and run a batten
If the boat is decked,
the deck,
then
through
Now at each
frame
on the
was previously laid out with a batten frame marks on the board, lay out
them
to draw
allow a little extra
a line for the lower edge of
on the upper
edge for the crown
of
saw out the plank.
Plane the upper edge for the crown and the lower edge square and clamp the plank in place. Unless there is something obviously wrong it can be used as a pattern for the same
plank
in tnind plank
that
rdge.
scarring
fitted
side of thr boat.
the butt end of a plank Incidentally.
from
Garboard The
on the othrr
always
pressure
that,
it can be fastened
has to have outgauge
in place.
for caulking,
use a block of wood between
the plank
Bear
just as with a and a clamp
so
will not occur.
Strake
garboard
plank
in place
is likely
the remainder
from the rest is that its shape rolr as a starting edge from which wider
After
to be the most will scrm
plank
of all, but once
to fit. What
by the contour
sets this strake
of the rabbet
end than
at amidships.
depends
entirely
on the hull
To get out the garboard. a spiting scribed previously, with the exception an actual
pattern
This
is net
unusual,
because
and if it were to be tapered dip down. This is the general
it is apart
and also by its
point for the rest of the planking. In order to have a nice, to start the tapering of the remaining planks, the garboard
at its forward
close to being
all the easier
is determined
twisted into place at its forward end, than amidships the upper edge might application
troublesome
fair upper might be the plank
is
narrower forward rule, although its
form.
is taken for the lower edge by the method dethat the spiting batten should be cut so that it is
for the plank.
This
is especially
true at the stem,
where
the end of the garboard will be well rounded to fit in the rabbet. The spiling marks must be close together where the curve is pronounced, and they are made plumb vertical from the rabaet. When transferring the spiting to the board for the plank, draw an
135
PLANKING arc with the compass (Figure 1 l-3C) instead ofjust plank, run a batten so it is tangent to the arcs. Lay out the width
of the garboard
bottom
edge of the sheer strake,
board.
The
such
that
be fairly should
width
any excessive straight
little
wider)
placed
or there
strakes. forward
before,
but
you look at it. In the case of the 12.foot less than and
at amidships.
take
plane
a spiting
the edge
receive The
As before,
against
upward
curve
test is to sight
the plank,
so it is open
a little
will
ends of
be as wide (or a
the
batten
in appearance
you have
from wherever
at the transom
plane
be
however,
at the forward
will probably
the width
should
straightening,
the edge on all the frames,
Saw out
the rabbet
of the strakes
This
pleasing
skiff,
mark
of the edge.
the remainder
bent.
the
is fair and
like you did for the
for the top edge of the garstrakes
the garboard
as it is amidships,
and see that the line it makes
and,
the edge of the
the two broad
so that being
will be too much
As stated
frame
and
is removed.
they are flat before
not be overdone.
the remaining
and to draw
on the frames
of the garboard
curvature
when
at the midship
run a batten
at the ends
a point,
will be a little
remove
the batten,
the top edge
on the outside
square,
and
for the seam
to
caulking. forward
end of the garboard
will probably
need steaming
to get it in place;
it is
possible that this will be the only plank on the boat that will need such treatment. While the plank is steaming, assemble at hand plenty of clamps, wedges, and material for shores
to the floor.
and clamp
When
ready,
it, then as quickly
Gttt the plank
flat against
fit the forward
as possible
the frames
bend
end of the plank
the plank
with shores
in the rabbet
in place while
to the floor.
first
it is still limber.
Cut a shore
a little short,
toe nail it to the floor, and drive a wedge between the top of the shore and the plank. If the bottom edge does not tic properly in the rabhet. clamp a piece of oak to the frames above
the
plank
sideways.
drive
Never drive
crushed.
Fasten
to do except lucky,
and
wedges
a wedge
the plank
it will not need
normal boat some wasted
directly
in place
to let it cool,
when
more
against
a block
against
on the
edge
the edge of a plank,
if it fits satisfactorily. it can be removed
ateaming
plank
for replacement.
the garboard is the most difficult material before you produce one
there
is nothing
the fit corrected.
If you are
Don’t be discouraged,
plank to fit, and that is right.
it
or the edge will be
If it doesn’t, and
to move
it may
for in a
even cost you
Broad Strakes The spiting
next
plank
is taken
for the upper
to go on is the one above of the edge
edge,
wit1 be straight tween frame, board
and
shown
called and
and
on your
the spiting
the bottom
this time mark
midship
edge
of the sheer strake of the first broad
to straighten
layout
is done batten,
by the planned the plank
it or give it a more
and planks
to the space
by counting
a
a batten
so the remaining
and
between
on the frames.
It may be that
running
it in proportion
This
the distance
the first broad, Before
the plank
by tapering
planking dividing
all directions.
end in order
how to taper
Start
called
the garboard.
the sheer strake.
frames,
only the width
look at the line from the forward
easy to make. plank
the garboard,
will lie against
you have to decide
the garboard
of strakes
that
be-
the number
at every
third
or so
the top edge of the garnumber
of strakes.
Now run the batten will want
pleasing
to be wider
appearance
At and at
when
136
PLANKING
PLANKING
SCALE
E%cample: A~ume Greakst
a"
Least
6straKe5 remaining. girth divided b\/&3= 4k” 'I @w 3" 15 04
4!q’-3”=
lr/?“= 12 eighths
Divide space between girth nvlrKs on scale batten into IZqual part5
Scak applied to any frame will give plank width
at that frame.
Figure 1 I-4.
viewed
from
satisfies.
forward.
mark
If so, make
the frames,
and plane the plank to shape. system so that when the turn tween
there
and
the sheer
planks
between
wider,
the batten,
but don’t
overdo
take a spiting
it. When
the line
for the top edge,
and saw
The next two or three planks are lined out with the same of the bilge is reached, the remainder of the planks be-
strake
Width Scale for Remaining The
it a little
remove
may
ail be of uniform
width
and
taper.
Planks
the last of the bottom
planks
and
the sheer strake
may
be lined
out by dividing the unpianked girth at each spiting frame into equal spaces. However, the work can be made easier if you use a planking scale made with a batten about ‘/RUx I “. Mark I,!!ddie
on the batten of
the
aritilmeticaiiy
boat, divide
responding
with
mark
also
the greatest
Let us say the answer Do the same
the greatest and
between
3” and
marks
41$$ ” into
any frame,
will give the width note
girth
12 equal
11-4.) takes
distance
You will see that
a few minutes’ the plank
by the number
assuming
the
spaces
and
the scale,
label
Divide
them applied
of the strake
at that
frame.
time
a planking
to make on as many
will be near may
be.
the
Then
still to go on.
mark on the scale 4!$ “.
of eighths
12 in this case.
it
of strakes
answer
when
widths
which
wherever
call the corresponding and,
on the scale,
(See Figure
and
girth
space,
on the scale 3 “. Now find the number
the two girth
It only
still to be planked,
shortest
is 4 I,$ “; therefore the shortest
between
along
space the
the cor-
the space
are
on the scale
so each one represents to the unpianked
scale,
of the frames
is 3”, call
of an inch there
S”.
girth
of
and with it you can go as you like for reference
137
PLANKING
when
making
tens,
although
coming
the remainder each
of the strakes.
plank
must
out as they should,
redivide
the remaining
The
ribbands
boat
than
on the
becoming
other.
that
for instance,
the planks
to a pair
Hollowing
now on, it is unnecessary
However,
if you find
a batten
that
to straighten
to run bat-
the seams
things
are not
out and
then
again. as they become
distorted,
As you
do not put more
fit a plank,
the pl.anks are not truly on opposite
an interference make
opposite.
to making
planks
a mate In other
sides are not exact
a plank.
on one side of the
for
the opposite
words,
side,
due to hollowing,
duplicates
and may
be com-
of shoes.
and Rounding
Hollowing bottom.
once
are only removed
remembering pared
be spiled.
it is best to run
space
To keep the hull from
From
of planks, After
Figure
a plank
1 l- 1 B, is best done
is hollowed
with a wooden
to fit the curve
thickness nn the edges with a marking before fastening it into position. This
plane
having
of the frames,
gauge and roughly round will save work later.
mark
a rounded the finished
the face of the plank
Stealer Planks The
typical
frame
auxiliary
sailboat
hull,
well aft of amidships,
start
at the rabbct
post, depending
with
requires
in the sternpost upon
and
the number these
will show
that
planks
as the turn
of the bilge is reached.
short
mold,
the stealers
along
the keel. (Referring
and
keel will be fitted
to avoid
plank
ends
in the process
that
(SW Figure
board
running
for the length
urged
in Figure that before
to the one being
I I-6B. beginning built
of being
turned
to remarks
for whatever
of the hull.
A study of such the remaining
shows the shape
of
chap: ers, the deadwood
1 l-5 after
it is right side up.) Often, stealers
type of planking
, but it still is possible possible
be made can
of the stern-
I t-5, of a hull built
over, clearly
to take a fastening,
pointers
at a
generally
in preceding
In this particular
a study
forward
Figlut
located
These
to straighten
photograph,
are numerous
the job,
positions
necessary
of the keel rabbet There
to be planked as stealers.
and the shape are
to the hull in Figure l l -6A.)
girth known
at varying
The
are too pointed
neighbors.
lustrated
end
planks
over a permanent
their
planks
of stealers
a hull
ballast
the greatest
short
variations,
into
there is no garto have one as iland it is strongly
of the planking
be picked
are nibbed
on a boat similar
up.
Plank Fastenings The
type of fastening
Normal width
planking of the plank
will be as specified
is secured will permit,
in the narrow topside width of the frames, driven
into
with three
the floor.
on the plans fastenings
such as throughout
or according
to your own choice.
per plaL~k at each the bottom.
and
frame
where
the
wo at each frame
strakes. The fastenings are staggered to the extent allowed by the and planks that cross floors have an additional fastening or two The
butts
are fastened
with five in each
plank
end as shown
in
138
PLANKING
Figure 1 l-5. Stealer planks are used to straighten turn
Figure
11-Z. Butts
ings and
in larger
plugging
size auxiliaries
are discussed
you are liable
down with palm
to plane
and finger
are frequently
in Chapter
After planking, the hull is ready jack plane and using long strokes plane
the remainingstmkes
as the
of‘ the bilge is reached.
bolted.
for preliminary smoothing, to smooth off high areas.
hollow
areas
tips will reveal
Drilling
for fasten-
6.
in the planking. high spots that
done by planing with a With a shorter smooth Rubbing
the hull up and
are not readily
seen with the
eye.
Caulking Before tight.
Carve1 Planking
smoothing This
the hull further,
is a verv critical
the plank
seams
step in hull building.
are caulked
By caulking
to make
too hard
them
water-
it is possible
to
pull the plank lightly driven,
fastenings and force a plank away from the frames; if the caulking is too it will he forced out of the seam by the swelling of the planks when wet.
Just
amount
the right
of caulking
adds
considerable
stiffness
to the planking.
The entire job of correct caulking is a skilled art, and if the amateur plans to employ professional help with his boat at any stage of construction, here is a good place to do so. Don’t When rolled Thicker
let this discourage the plank
into
the seams
planking
marine
supply
a clean
floor
unfold
strands.
They
break
and roll them
you from
thickness
with a caulking
must
have
in a hall.
caulking
packages
the bundle
to the full
so handle
Also make
the job,
a strand
them
a couple
however.
or two of cotton
wheel or driven
regular
stores in one-pound easily,
tackling
is ‘/8H or under,
cotton
made length
wicking
with a thin-edged in the seams,
up of folds of multiple of the strands;
with care.
then
single strands
iron.
obtainable
at
strands.
On
separate
the
Now take two strands
of balls from
may be
making
at a time
for use in nar-
row seams and plank butts or for adding a piece to a double strand for use where the seam is wide. Keep the cotton clean, or else you will have to pick wood chips and pieces of trash Start a little
L
off the strands
as you use them.
at one end of a seam sticking
out to drive
and into
tuck an end of the cotton
strand
the seam at the end of the plank:
in the seam,
leaving
then gather
the cot-
PLANKING
139
0A Figure
ton in a small Normally seams
loop with the caulking
you may need
the seams
another
the seam.
of the cotton
hack
iron
you will use one with a blade
and so on down hulk
11-6. Two methods
The
is correct
have not been
to the beginning
the seam
iron about
composition
11-7, If at any point
of using stealer
and drive it in the seam with a making iron. ‘/,6” thick at the working edge, but for wider 7, rr thick. Next to the first loop drive a second,
trick is to make
for the width
madr
uniform.
and
drive
is put in later.
the cotton
the seam should
The
cotton being
should
not
driven,
it shoulrl
in the seam
done
enough
Careful
all the
fitting
mahogany.
calls for the right
good
caulking
not only by the thickness amount
of mallet
the right
depth.
of the strand
pressure Don’t
to make
forget
amount
force
the butts.
of the planking
for
drive a
will reduce
of the seam. formed
When
in a tight
for itself in the plank edges. in hardwood planking like of cotton
a depression
Caulking
room
go
in Figure
to take the caulking,
hulk,
hut also by the size of the loops,
the strand
to caulk
to make
by the caulker
of the seam depth,
make a slight depression mallet will he needed
vary if
a few feet of loops,
way to the bottom
be in the middle
rope-shaped strand which should Heavier blows with the caulking Thus,
this will necessarily
far enough
is being
not he open
be driven
and
you have driven
This
dumb iron into the seam to spread it wider. the work with a dumb iron to a minimum. finished
the size of the loop just right so that the
of the seam, After
that
planks.
tools
determined and the right
in the plank are shown
edges at in Figure
1 l-8.
Smoothing After
caulking,
paint
for the purpose.
Wipe
the seams
with thickish
off any paint
that
paint, gets
using
a narrow
on the outside
seam
brush
of the planking
made while
doing the seams. When the seams are dry, smooth the hull again with a plane, set for a firer cut this time to get the remainder of the high spots. All the while, rub the palm of your smoothed and then
hand
diagonally
across
the planking
to find
the bumps
and
hollows.
If not
perfectly at this time, the unfair portions will show up when paint is applied, the hull must be left as is or else a part of the job must be done over. Sand-
140
PLANKING
Figure 1 l-7. Caulking is looped just muck caulking can harm planking.
enough
to property
/ill tile seam.
Too
paper the hull after planing, gradually using finer grit until it is as smooth as you want it. Garnet paper is better than sandpaper; although more expensive, it cuts faster and lasts longer.
A tinr~ finish
can be obtained
with a diagonal
with this tool. Give the hull the first coat of paint seam
composition
made
scraper
and carefully
if you are skilled
fill the seams with hull
for this purpose.
More About Caulking The
caulking
procedure
today
as it ever was,
pound
for the seams
hands
have sworn
deed caulked the matter pensive,
but modern
is the old standby
materials
the cotton
permit
the cotton
caulking
I would
stay with
less of it will be needed
It is my understanding
that
absolutely
for so long,
clean,
and
to be omitted.
the whole
the method.
if the seam
method
the use of a different caulking
tightens
have been so satisfactory
of expense, and
above
and even permit
that
boats
described
filling
com-
So many
hull structure,
and
old in-
that,
for that reason
and also
These
new compounds
are ex-
is partly
bare
is as good
wood
filled
with cotton.
in the seam is required
for
proper adhesion certainly would
of the modern compound- 3. This is no problem with a new hull, but it take a lot of work to prepare the seams of an old boat. The cotton and
seam
not
sides
Douglas
are
fir, and
painted
perhaps
in the yellow
old-fashioned
pine,
have
way,
an oil that
but
woods
impairs
such
adhesion
as teak and
and
conse-
PI..1 Nh’ING
14 1
?
J
P
H
/
// 7
‘i :/.
.-
I
c d
i
CAU,KI~J!G WHEEL
Figure 11-8. Sca~n caulking whrel
quently sulfide
need coating with compounds. Check
priming.
Hull
The
polysulfide
is rollcgd into seams
with the
a special primer made by the manufacturers of the polythe makers’ recommendations carefully in regard to seam compounds
are a two-part
mix;
the silicones
are not.
the hull can br given
a priming
Painting
For preservation of paint.
while
the boat is bring
A few remarks
not do for boats. and beautify that
pools. Cot&m is Y8” thick or ltm.
when planking
paints
pin;
is cheap
work.
Most of the marine
Good
your hard
tell you how to do a good
that you stick to the rules. instructions f~urd
iI1
planking
are in order. insurance,
paint
There
Take
job from
are different
so use only marine paint start
paints
and
all of them
will
to protect
firms have descriptive
to finish,
systems,
coat
my word that house paints
booklets
it is recommended good nowadays,
and
should be followed carefully. The only suggestion I have that may not be d paint company bookiet is to cover the entire inside of the framework and (except
nothing
finished.
about
where
visible
in quarters)
else. If you do want
to paint
with two coats of a wood
later,
the preservative
preservative
and
acts as a primer.
Lapstrake Planking Sometimes planking. plank
directly
completed. start
called
clinker
In the first over
Secondly,
at the garboard
order. The each plank
planking,
place,
the molds,
proceed
as one
and before painting. are lined out and spiled
of the laps must
be taken
into account
being
plank
upward
nature of the planking prevents is planed before final installation,
after planking The strakes
planking
of the stiffness
the frames
inasmuch and
lapstrake
because
bent
in place
when
laps over the next,
to the sheer
strake
efficient smoothing but a light final
the same when
is very different of the planking
carve1 to
the p!anking
is
the planking
without
must
any change
in
after completion, so sanding may be done
as for carve1 planking.
laying
from
it is possible
out the widths
but the width
of the planks.
Lap-
142 PIA NKINC;
Vd/inTH OF PLA)rll(:IdJsOE EDGE’
0A
LAP
BEVEL
rV&DGE
11-9. I.npmlrc
Figure
strake
planking
l I,:- .I.L,..“U -othnJ L.L.0
material utilized
/hnkirrg
is used principally
cic*trcils.
for small
boats
where
light weight
nf nl-nL;nm ic -~PPI~ rtiff f-actpninm “I y.” . . . . ..‘b ..I .L., ., . . . . riarn u..- tn .” &..” .c--.ae a the .-*-
can
be turd,
for boats
for high-speed
resulting
like yacht
fishing
in a saving
tenders
skiffs and
of weight.
and lifeboats sport
edam --b-v
that
is preferred,
of the laps,
For this reason, are hoisted
for
aned th_innpr
the method
out of the water
is and
cruisers.
The section in Figure 11-9 shows how the upper edge of each plank is beveled so the next one will fit tight against it for the width of the lap. The bevel varies from one end of the plank bevel
may
specific little
to the other be gauged
width
wider
to scratch
due to the shape
with a rule
of lap, but the minimum
as the plank
thickness
the lap width
At each mold
or spiling
frame.
the plank,
using
the short
cuts
bench
Your
l l-9A plans
W ” on planking As a guide
with a marking
the correct
becomes
Figure
or mold.
is about
is increased.
on the plank
inch or so. The job then
of the sections.
at any frame
when
gauge
shows how the
should
as thin beveling,
or mark
bevel is cut on the plank
rabbet
builders
prefer
with an equal rabbet
plane
(Figure
l l-9B)
a tapering lap like Figure with its gauge
as t/t 0 and a it i., helpful
it with a pencil.
for the length
work to cut the bevel for the entire
of an
length
of
as guides.
The planks must be flush where they fit in the stem rabbet or against This is done, beginning about two feet from the plank end, by changing beveled
call for a
in order
half-lap l l-9C.
joint, This
to avoid finishing
a feather
edge on the outside.
off at the very ends
can be done
set for the width
quickly
of the plank
the transom. the bevel to a
and neatly
lap. Naturally
Some
of the planks by a Stanley all beveling
of
143
PLANKING laps must
be carefully
this part that
done
or leaky seams
of the work goes along
while
the shape
once
of any one plank
frame
positions
completion are then
riveted
is the same
on both
and
the
bedded
the ends
in thick
eliminate
white
bet without
The shallow so builders
at each
or one
This
of ordinary
the clamp
to hold the planks
Double The
C clamps
shown
manner,
6-6.)
and
transom,
are riveted. the planks
screws
wicking sealers
in the
are
(but
not glue)
tightly builder
rabbet.
unless
it to clamp
A half dozen
If the boat
are clamped
to
in the rab-
is to use a caulked
11.9D.
are
in Yl -inch
ends in the stem rab-
does not permit
in Figure
After
planking
1 Id rr apart
ends are fitted
alternative
the
The planks
for the amateur
The
while the edges
over frames in the conventional smooth planking.
marine
off
between
for guides.
for lapstrake
of cotton
the plank
is marked
riveted
(See Figure
the plank
of the modern
required.
spacing
about
At the stem
fastening
is not recommended
depth
have devised
fasteners
the bevels
left-hand.
the marks
a length
carve1 planking.
and
be spaced
remember
sides of the hull,
in position.
(Rivet
how rapidly
Always
laps are copper
planks. lay
gained.
the frame
using
Before
generally
workmanship
throat
lap.
it is surprising
right-
placed
lap rivets should
lead.
outgauge.
of the neat
and
3” in %-inch
Unlike
The
are bent,
of the planks.
experts
caulking.
capable
is made
the frames
up to about
lapstrake
needed
plank
6.) The
are made over molds.
as it is fitted.
to the frames
in Chapter
used to fasten bet,
as each
of planking.
discussed planks,
plank
but
has been
In other words, the planks are opposite. If the lapstrake boat is being planked on the keel and on each
will result,
experience
he is seam.
the laps,
or so will be
is lapstrake
planked
to the frame* just like
Planking
purpose
recaulking, pensive,
of double and
because
of pianking
planking
a sleek
finish
the planking
is thilmer
than
is twofold.
It insures
is relatively job is really
normal
watertightness
easy to maintain. done
and easier
without
Double
twice, notwithstanding
to apply.
The total
periodic
planking
is ex-
that each layer
thicknessof
planking
is the same as single planking. but weight can be saved over a single-plarlked mahogany job by planking the inner layer with a good, lightweight wood, such as white or Port Orford cedar. On the other hand, some of the weight saving is offset by the additional
quantity
of metal
used
to fasten
the two layers
together
between
so that
be replaced
the
frames. The
garboard
plank
is usually
made
single
it can
easily
if
necessary; the sheer strake and the first broad are also single thickness but are rabbeted for the outer layer as shown in Figure 11-10. The seams of the inner layer are arranged
to come at the middle
the same as for a carve] job, layers. inner fitted, outer
Of course,
the width
sit akes ate fastened the fastenings strake
pound.
of the outer
sufficiently
to the frames
is fastened,
All seams
of the outer
are
tightly
The planking no difference
strakes
with small
without
with
that there are two consideration.
and when
as for single
on the inside
together
is lined out and spiled except
is the primary
screws,
are the same
it is first coated fitted
strakes.
for there is actually
the outer strakes
planking. a double
outgauge.
The are
Before planking
each com-
as no caulking
is
necessary. Between frames the layers of planking screws along the edges of the inner strakes
are fastened together from the inside with and also along each side of the middle of the
144 P1.ANKING
1dhh5R SEAM AT MIDDie OF IhiPslER PLAJK -
1 l-10. IhuI~l~ pltr~~kiu~ rklnils.
Figure
inner strakcs to fasten the edgrs headed screws with washers under two layers enough would
are so complctrly
to takr
the screws
be a ‘7;” outer
of the outer strakes. These fastenings the hrads. The whole job is very strong
tied from
layer
together.
Naturally
the inside.
against
the outer
An example
l!n” inner
layer
are roundbecause the
must
of layer thickness
planking,
making
be thick
proportion
a finished
thickness
of I ‘I.
Batten Seam Planking This
planking
by battens Although plication
system
owes its name
to which the planks are fastened along it is possible to plank round-bottomed is for v-bottomed
stock cruisers has been
to the fact that
used seam
popular
hulls. batten
its seams
with amateurs,
because
Marine
batten
keel is caulked ordinary glue, To clamps
seam glue is applied
caulking
build fitted
the seams,
as usual. it remains
a boat
the seam
The batten seam pliable indefinitely.
by this method,
and fastened
to the battens
although
in place.
glue
producers
many
out the plank
The frames may be spaced relatively wider because battens. Figure 11-12 shows a well-built frame ready eliminate
largest
for many, lining
on the inside
the edges, as shown in Figure 11-11. boats in this manner, the best ap-
One of this country’s construction
are backed
just before is not
the v-bottomed
of v-bottomed and
edges
the planking for planking.
between
The seam battens
years,
is fairly
is stiffened
fastening
the garboard well named
hull
the method by the
the planks plank
to
and the
because,
is set up with
are then clamped
simple.
chines
unlike and
to the frames,
BATJE~ SEAM l=iANG(rhl~
------
William
A Ilull framed for G. Hobbs Yacht Sales)
11-R
batten seam planking.
(Photo
courtesy
of
146
PLANKING
having
been
located
depending
by dividing
on the width
greater
than
sighted
for appearance,
look fair,
with
frame.
will be flush each
with
of the plank
and there
is no clamp
ing batten
(or added
may
against
around
along
adjusted,
where when
The
if necessary,
fitted.
is notched The
may be
battens
are
so that
they
stem,
and
they cross the frames,
a batten, Thus
and
the shape
so the battens
battens
pencil
of the batten,
so half
edge of the plank.
are fastened
are drawn
in
at the sheer, the top edge
Screw fasten
along
but remember
the batten
If the frame
by spiling
the frames.
lines
is obtained,
the planking
be preserved
sprung
the battens
to) each
of 6” amidships.
the spacing
widths
screws.
so it overlaps is to the middle
from
parts,
The plank
the framework
of the planking
from the inside.
deducted
the sheerline
are marked removed,
one or two flat-head
is clamped
edges of the batten width
edges
of equal
material.
they have been
the battens
the inside
into a number
planking
say an average
and when
With
with
notch
A plank
frame
carve1 planking,
the top and bottom
transom
each
of the available
width
spacing
must
be
is very wide
as in the boat in Figure of the sheer strake
the planking
the
the net
11-l 1.
from
a fair-
to the frames
and
to
the edges.
Strip Blanking Strip planking enjoyed
planking
popularity
a hull with narrow
in certain
areas
edge-fastened
for many
years,
strips of solid lumber-has and
the interest
has
become
greater with the use of fiberglass or other synthetic fabrics and resin to cover the outside of these hulls. The edge-fastening consists of an adhesive plus nails to hold the strips
together
ticed before ing had
during
the curing
cycle of the adhesive.
the era of waterproof
to be as near
adhesives,
perfect
as possible.)
fastening
produce4
a dimensionally
stable
fiberglass
or other
such synthetic
materials.
The
skin
structure
boats with strip-planked
that this type of planking guess
one
planked.
rould
was common
say that
left to those
skilled
Strip planking how many any means), parallel-sided
is usually LOanother
vary,
there strip
something
m;lst
The dimensions thick,
and
half times
anvwhere
be done
the length
edge-
itself to sheathing
area of North wooden
canoes
workmanship
girths
with
of one
Carolina. were
1
strip
and should
of the hull dictating of the hull
nbrmally
more to strip planking a hull just like it. It is easy to understand to compensate
from the same There
the shape
Unless
of the hull (and
of the ztrips are a matter
the thickness.
of plank-
modern
1 was told by the owner lsland
precise
easy for the amateur,
will be encountered.
throughout.
from
be
building.
is reasonably
sheer are the same
and
canvas-covered
type of boat requires
in canoe
complications
hulls,
lends
was also prac-
the strakes
or v-bottomed hulls, and I have I have seen a number of 65-foot
in the Harkers
old-fashioned
but this lightweight
planking
resulting
that
Strip planking can be used to build either round even seen strip-planked trunk cabin sides. In Florida passenger-carrying
(Strip
but the fits between
dimension
for this, just of design. in width
from
just
keel to
they will not be by
than just nailing one that when the girths
as with carve1 planking.
but they are usually up to a width
at least
l/z M
of one and one-
is an advantage to using square strips, and that is it expansion and contraction gives the chance to select the best grain. Due LO the natural of wood, the strips are best laid with the grain running in the direction shown in Figure
PLANKING
147
Fi.gure 11-13. Strik plcmkin~ ridails
1 l- 13C. ‘l’hickness hull without stiff enough Sections vature
through
regulates
Note
is governed
by the shape
strip
planking
the amount
the open seams
around
the turn
the greater
the relative
one edge
and
the other
round
are drawn
of beveling
the boat.
of sorts for doing radial The strips. not
this by hand,
saw. Thr
length
should
be glued
length
of thi
l’hc
choicr
matter.
either
choice. mon
When
wire nails,
ing and
strips
must
of metal Moncl
getting
to eliminate
number
of nails
beveling.
they must
or the cutting should
be about
for the nails Anchorfast
down
because
to be reckoned
on the workbench. sltould
The
be seen
to pennies, be just
with.
can
strips.
be about
be
of cur1 l-13A.
The smaller
builders
hollow
ll-13B.)
You can make
be done
on the
amount
in Figure
Some
(See Figure
be scarphed.
on a bench
five times
a miter
box
saw or with a
the strip
thickness.
not on the boat. two and one-quarter
is largely
a matter
or Stronghold
they are buried should
I 1.13.
as can
bend
the strips must
of the bilge on the unbeveled
of the scarph
nails
in Figure
required,
curvature
If the strips are not long enough,
Scarphs
of the hull---the
coming close to breaking. At the other end of the scale, to remain fair when sprung to the shapr of the hull.
silicon
it is all right
bronze
not exposed
to clamp
the width
of economics. nails
to use hot-dipped
in the wood, sufficient
times
If cost does are the first
galvanized to water.
the strips
of the
com-
The spac-
tightly
in place
while the adhesive cures. Nail heads are set slightly below the surface of the wood with a nail set. Some like to drive the nails at an angle to the strip for a locking action. If the hull should
mold
contains
be fastened
bulkheads to such
or other
a member
permanent with
a nail
Before epoxy resins became available, resorcinol strip planking. Resorcinol is a very good adhesive;
framing,
every
other
strip
or so
or screw. glue was used between the edges of however, it needs pressure during
9
~‘~~~;~~
\
’
:
148
PLANKING
curing
time
and
is not noted
for its ability
to fill gaps. but fastenings,
cient pressure possible from the strakes of planking must be pretty which
there are epoxies, added, thickening
nail close or the resorcinol
do not
the adhesive
In strip planking the fits between
need
much
so it won’t
will run out of the seam.
pressure, run
out
there is suffithe adjacent
and
to which
of the joint
a filler
Now
can
be
if the fit is less than
perfect. There
are options
strip planking. be needed the
when it comes
The edge-fastened
normally
frames
for the same
might
to setting
up a mold
skin is so stiff that
be omitted
thickness
over which
the number
carve1 planking with
altogether,
the
to build
a hull with
of frames
that would
is drastically
hull
planked
reduced.
over
Or
temporary
transverse molds of suitable number to shape the hull. Bulkheads and a few frames, if needed, can be added to the structure later, or bulkheads can be part of the setup and left in the hull.
The
hull is best built
best set up in a building enough
off the floor
with plenty that
there
right
side up, unless
of overhead
is a minimum
it is to be quite
clearance
large,
and is
so that the keel can be high
of working
in a stooped
position.
Some of the best strip planking workmanship ever turned out was done by Ralph Wiley in his yard on the eastern shore of Maryland. A few of his strip-planked deepkeel sailboats
that
parallel-sided where Wiley
strips extended from the sheer and ran to well below the waterline, then tapered the strakes suitably and worked the edges to bevels for
perfect
glue
advance would much
I saw were planked
fits. The
to determine take
over.
of a job
Before simple eliminates
used
tapering.
Figure 11-14.
where
was, of course, the
In my opinion,
for the first attempt
tapering form
planking
frightens by Fred Referring
with mahogany
unduly. Bates,
tapering beveled
strips
started
would strip
about
1% 0 square.
The
at the keel and was planned
stop
and
planking
the parallel-sided
thicker
than
in
strips
‘/R” is just
too
by the amateur. let us look at a layout designer-builder
10 A in Figure
for strip
of Damariscotta,
II- 14. planking
planking
hulls of
Maine,
strips are laid starting
that at
149
PLANKING the keel and are temporarily equal
to a number
a tine
is drawn marked
manently
replaced
parallel-sided
for exact
scrap
the strip
:‘d N plywood,
strips
they started
for keeping varying
and
a distance
or mold,
the points.
The
cut to the tine,
The remainder
the strips clamps
the depth
of Rhodes-designed
with rounded
and
at the keel and
another
version
and
strips
and
are
are per-
of the hull is planked
of planking
sketched
aligned
in Figure
with
while nailing.
11-13.
L, with a slot width
pearance
as one looked
Plywood
Planking
planking into
fact that a hull is v-bottomed
with
plywood:
These
of slightly
He
are cut
more
than
can
design.!d
There
as indicated
I have
seen
arrangement
Lakes yard using of the strips;
in Figure
II-14B.
was a method
resulted
does not automatically
be bent
for
by a Great
was no tapering
where
hull
in a herringbone
ap-
the hull.
only be used to plank
of vessels
that
This strake
The
thus should
were built
edges.
ran out at the sheer,
down
plywood
sailboats
hollowed
of strip
were laid on diagonally.
tions
through
removed
Then
frame
to the sheer.
or so of the horseshoe
A good number
strips
a batten
then
fastened.
the sheer at each
thickness.
parallel Still
by springing
with glue and fastenings.
strips
a dozen
not permanently
is laid off from
location,
has a good scheme
makes from
widths
on the strips
carefully
Fred
held in place,
of strip
without
hulls designed
plywood
mean
distortion
that
it can be planked
in only one axis at a time and
with its limitations
construction
generally
in mind.
consist
The sec-
of developable
curves that consist of portions of cylinders and cones. It should not go uncurves noted that experienced builders have succeeded where theory dictates the impossible. However. that
the methods
you should
plywood
used just about
review the plans
defy written
description.
of your boat carefully
before
Suffice deciding
it to say then, to plank
it with
panels.
Plywood is a stiff material: with conventional wooden
therefore, planking thickness planking. Also an advantage
can be less than it would be is its ability to cover large
areas quickly. Often, standard plywood panels wit! be too short for you to plank in one panel from bow to stern. If so, either special panels must be ordered or else the regular panels
must
be butted
are generally and
made
well fastened
White
being
it in place. frames, there can
Some planked
apply
many.
invisible
builders hull,
should
Work with
there
be detailed
should
be fastened
on the plans.
be waterproof
with just enough
the panel
marine
and then,
or waterproof
on again,
again
of the glue,
drive
glued
of the panel below
instead
surfacing of solid
is considerable
screws to hold
depending to chines,
a few screws
the remaining
from the middle slightly
glue
with just
the heads marine
use plywood
even when
should
The joints
remove
either
because
and countersinking
which
blocks.
or rivets.
the plywood
as fast as possible
be made
butt
the tit is satisfactory,
and bend
are a great
for screws
These joints,
the plywood
for the boat,
etc.,
Working
wiih screws
fitied,
When
specifications
end to end. with good-size
toward
the surface
on the rabbet,
to hold it.
screws,
of which
the ends,
drilling
of the panel
so they
putty. lumber
for the inner
curvature.
They
layer
apply
of a doubte-
the plywood
in
150
PL.4NKING
pieces as large planking
as will bend
on the hull and in this way save labor over the usual
doubte-
method.
Cold-molding A cold-molded
hull consists
boats)
bonded
skin.
or strips Generally,
centerline
the first layer
to the second,
as many
White
as five layers
sometimes
removed
modern
Although
method
which
are
build
the glue
the
As noted
usually
consists
and
spaced
part of the hull:
mold.
ribbands.
down,
and
shell is lifted
which are
on adhesives,
a skin Another
method
and structural
membc~rs,
framework
are laid on diagonally.
and
then
successive
has definite
layers
for particular
mind.
specifications
with the intended
In the last decade,
tific research to specify
the cold-molding
and developmem.
hull construction
The end result
srantlings
Whatever
the method
planking,
or if desired.
desired
rhickness.
needed
to construct
heightened materials. the epoxies. that
with strength-to-wright
Thus,
Tied
way,
a wooden because
closely
of cold-molded
it is possible
the hull
hull
be built
construction
by the traditional
high quality
is easier
the dimensional
ratios
beyond
to build
his ability
attractions.
that
Brothers.
who
A hull
built
of the stiffness
of the laminated
by laminating
the hull
entails
lighter
work
method.
Tht
interest
of the superb
adhesives,
a tough.
with other
in
scien-
approaching
when working
stability
arc
have been able
to achieve
hulls can be fiberglassed
for the amateur
been
can
there
of much
of Gougcon System.
has several
very tight because
to this is the availability
To cap it all off,
have
cold-molding
a very stiff hull
Either
for many
the outside
otherwise
chosen.
skin can be built
a skeletal
and its purpose
that desi,gners
of aluminum. The leader in this field has been the firm devclopc~tt the WEST (Wood Epoxy Saturation Technique) with a cold-motded
such
method
and
has been the subject
has been
a
of planking layers. and the The designer draws up his
vessel’s size, its shape, process
over
applications,
variations within each method as to skin thickness, number number and weight of internal strengthening members. construction
Stilt another
is strip-planked
of planking
advantages
is to
does not become
as necessary.
method
(some of
plug or a form
as bulkheads and transverse frames, are installed combines thcsc two: the first layer of planking Each
a skeletal
forms
a strip-planked
off the form,
by various
over
transverse
structure
the
temperatures,
they can be built
In this case, the supporting
the finished
thickness.
stringers.
may be either
at
some-
up the desired
is to laminate
longitudinal
which
the third
nails or screws, up at room
of some sort of backbone,
frames)
on a male
upside
amateurs
--set
to the
specifications,
in the section
epoxies
are built
by most
with staples,
a stiff, strong
45 degrees
to the first.
architect’s
are used to build
sets up.
hulls
used
bulkheads
up a hull
with closely
at 90 degrees
are secured
as x6” for small
to form
at about
layer
glues
all cold-molded The
framework,
strakes
(as thin
adhesive
upon
resorcinots and for the term cold-molding.
thus the reason methods.
the second
of thin
veneers
is laid up diagonally
Depending
the strakes
after
waterproof
layers of thin with a waterproof
of strips
etc.
the glue is curing,
which
other
of the mo!d or frame,
90 degrees times
of multiple
to each
of laminated for protection
strong, methods.
tong-lived
up to a
than
that
has been with light
particularly
planking
means
from abrasion. hull that might
>,*, @” *
4 .
15 1
PLANKING
t l-15.
Figure
l~rrllrhfwtls,
tiowever,
‘i’hv
although
is child’s
tht:rr
is no substitute
it
lofted,
great
of spiling
one another.
molded
boar,
meaning prove
and
a huitdcr
tricky
a [rue and sturdy to bc done
Indeed, must
depending to build:
upon
There by John learned by those
about
o/
the details
with a great
deal
mfdds,
The tines must stilt
be constructed.
between
curves
under These
Gougcon
of cold-molding of experience
hulls
should
Recommended are Moduw
Brothers from wirh
on Boat these
tightly
and perhaps as many some hI1tt shaprs can amount not
Yacht
Construclion. which
of trouble,
be attempted
Reading
Wocldrn
books.
is stilt a
to butt
that, to build a cotdroutine for each layer,
seem to give a great
that such craftsman.
There
the planks
but at least three of layers. In addition,
the number
length.
Thr
and
must
not just once.
books listed
at considerable
Guzzwrtt
11 /irlnrcwork t~rrz:u~fdl.)
some professionals have opined go through a complete planking
hulls with reverse
are two excellent
mold
to get the joints
and onr professional builder has stated anyone less than a realty skilled, patient cold-molding
If,
SWIII to the amateur that laminating up a hull of thin to bending frames and spiting and cutting out planks,
that thy hull is ptankrd
as five times.
rlpp/ivd
for skill and care in any facet of boatbuilding.
be accurately against
hvl’trfi
(I~~lf~lf~ f~orcrtf~sy o/‘,/ohli
might play compared
strips
amount
.$kor
/i’rst
ccrrrl .strr’ugf*r.s.
that
by
deal with
Construction Much
can
be
have been written
this type of construction.
PLANKING
152
Figure 11-16.
Diagonal
Planking
Although
it predates
similar
cold-molding
to cold-molding.
the planking
layers
In fact,
instrad
done,
it can bc considered
is that
it employs
two layers mostly
strakes
of planking.
less severe
fastened
to a framework a fever
of diagonal
angle
to the keel and
keel or sheer Toward
clamp,
thr topsides
as long
The
second
with screws tween clout
tends
nails
tenings
is glued
must
between
the framing
over the heads
planking
is smoothed
When can
or nails
this method that
each
is used
strake
en-
is generally frames
(or
with longitu-
and can be seen to be of uniform
width,
2”
glued
as the convergence too much
approximately
chine, and
to frames,
also being
to one another. of the bottom
out of parallel into line;
and
with those
the angle is not
frames. is also edge-glued
and frames. and
planking
To provide outer
strakes
be wood screws
on the outside
by sanding.
screws
of the planks
of the inner
are then countersunk.
puttying
and
be tapered.
clamps.
of only
The first layer is laid up at a 45-degree
of the strakes
cross several
consists
together
11-16,
back
as was formerly it a bit different
and transverse
or bulkheads
is made
glue
agent makes
The planking
clamps,
frames
to the first and
the intersections
hulls.
material
the planks
to the keel, chines,
frames,
in shape
in Figure
the angle
brings
as the planks layer
thickness,
planking
with
with the edges
IO change
Tapering
strake
is very
glue between
that it often
the change
the size of the hull.
is secured
and
planking
waterproof
is shown
The
the bow, the planks
amidships. critical,
upon
veneers
of keel, chines,
planking
diagonal
using What
on round-bottomed
of transverse
of cold-molding.
depending
than
where
consisting number
similar
to 4” wide,
time,
now.
in a waterproofing
of the greater
than
dinals). The scheme to that
soaked
are thicker
Because
is much
in some cases,
of fabric
powerboats,
counters
some
to br a form of cold-molding. that
on v-bottomed
by quite as it is practiced
of the hull.
driven After
strakes
and fastened clamping
pressure
are clout
nailed.
are 5/H * thick or more, from
in place
the inside
the adhesive
beThe
the fas-
to eliminate
has cured,
the
Chapter
12
DECK FRAMING
The
decking
of a boat
is laid on transverse
beams,
which
not only provide
the deck but also help to hold the sides of the hull together. tant
in all boats designed
to be decked,
powerboats and sailboats that are strength to do without the stiffening hulls
the thwarts
do double
duty
especially
The
in sailboats.
latter
support
aspect
The many
for
is impor.
types of small
not decked must be designed to have enough that the deck structure provides. In many such
as hull
stiffening.
Clamps and Shelves The
deck
beams
contribute
heads
member
is generally clamp
it instead
craft,
with
screws
screws through
the clamps
edges
boats they are fastened
is fitted
as the clamp,
landing
and
area for the beam
toward should
beams
of fastenings between
lengths,
a pitch
are used as fastenings,
Bolts have the extra
concentration
located
or deck shelf,
material
a greater
In small
to the hull if they are to to the clamp
in size, an additional
on each side of the boat. its position ends,
stif-
The shelf
on the flat against
which
are fastened
the
through
of the clamp.
used.
single
of them.
connected
12-1A and B). As hulls increase
a shelf.
of the same
In small whereas
required (Figure
callrd
provides
always
be of good size and strongly
the strength
and the frame fening
must
when
advantage
are not accessible
in the vicinity
frames.
(See Figure
necessary,
be planed
to fit snugly
against
to the camber
once the boat is decked.
of the deck pieces
The inner
vessels through-bolts
able to be tightened
12- 1.) They
or, in several
the ends of the boat. corresponding
but in larger of being
beams,
shelves
are sprung
joined
the clamps. of the deck
by scarphs, The
beams
To lessen the are fastened
in place
edges may be left square, shelves so that
are
if necessary,
on edge
to in
with the joints but the outer must
be fitted
the beams
will 153
154
DECKFRAMlh'G
-M
2---EebA-r 2 ---EebA-r V-A-F- BEAL4 BEAL4 ca.4EcTlahj~ ca.4EcTlahj~
//
V-A-F-
‘1 ‘1 /yq /yq
ROLTS lee sceEv.5,+.J CDL*5-e. C’~Od) CDL*5-e. C’~cd)
DECK CLAMP
@
4 SHELF DECK BEAll
K’IT+ K’iTi
CLAMP
Figure 12-l. bear on the shelves’ few deck
beams
When
the
found
best way to get the bevel
is to temporarily
may
few feet,
of the shelves
and
great
The
so the bevels
edges
clamp
having
shelf
strength
are
be measured
can
bolted
and
then together,
stiffness.
every
be planed they
form
Such structural
be fastened
breasthook,
which
hook is often good
sawn
a connection
(Figure
12-3A).
out of a natural is a piece assemblies
this connection
and bolted underside
in place must
wood
of oak
crook,
laid
join one another
a curved
have the proper mold
loftsman
either
plate
knees,
the transom and
and
‘AICE
FeOM
For a flat
are sawn from crooks cross framing
is more difficult.
fit the transom
T
5tEi.F
curve
BE&L
CLAMP 4
0A LOCATI& m AGREE
Figure 12-2.
0E,w H~YQER WITH CAMBER
l3Eb~L Old OUrEi2 OF SHELF
EDGE
at the In this as well.
of the deck
PLAt45 CLAMP
Just as
through-bolted
CiAMP &EAM cc BEAM MOLD TtMlWLAClLy ‘TU MEASVeE 5~IELF BEVELAT 5TATlOd5
rs
a
The
way is also suitable.
who can work out the intersection
CUT OFF SHOWIJ
with
to them.
via the transom. which
the connection
camber
the twosides
of oak or hackmatack.
at the stern
and against
transom, deck
and bolted
used the same
of quarter
are, of course,
out of them,
the shelves
(See
angle-shaped
members
on top of the shelves
or metal
takes the form With
you are a skilled
FPAMCS AS
between
a single
angle.
At the bow this is done
of the boat.
on top of the shelves
of the deck.
case the knees
at the ends
A piece of plywood
The shelf/clamp transom,
together
is a knee of sorts fitted
set a
or at least at
to the proper
on both sides of a vessel, and to get every bit of benefit
should
Unless
width.
in place
every station. The Figure 12-2A.) member
entire
-v;-- -y -: 1.. c-5 ‘* 1; :v:j$ ; I d+J” * ,a : --- 7~.-*+& .;*:=-*-q : =-----~-~:- .-m--3 : z _~ ..~ -r.-:.zsm?‘-‘-.,p- ~~ - -__I -< 9 : i++:, *..w-:-1: -7,’ /F: 1+-x~: Sws~ ,J, !: ::I #===qr ;: “,, :,j;;
::, .T:: ?$yp$ 1. Lb, :.‘-.r-.~~~ci~’ at ?y ...= p . ..z-
‘; 4 ” j
I ’
156
DECK
FRAMING
5’ET
I. D,,,de AB A:( c‘17 r-o A~J*Ico~~s. STEP Z cl, ,‘i Al, C-D c-c mo*e *se 35 sbwr and dmr. ~ornkr wr,e yr(+r 0 m*+en.
II410C’L~ OF c&.K~~Z-,
Figure 12-4.
and
transom
on the floor,
The plan boat.
view shape
The
shape
deck beams
of the top edge
on each
edge just touching each
time
of the knees
side of the centerline, the inside
these
is clamped;
by the cut-and-try
on the deck framing
is best obtained
method. plan
for the
on the boat.
Install
at intervals
of three
of the transom
and
clamp
on top of the beams,
of the transom.
the batten
pieces
as it is shown
for thr* five or six feet ahead
four inches batten
it is best to make
is easy to obtain,
a batten
Mark the transom a line through
at the underside
the marks
the or
its aft of the
will represent
the
underside of the decking as well as the top curve of the quarter knees. The battens can also be used to measure the bevel needed for the aft edges of the knees. Shaped as they are in every
Deck The
dimension,
these
pieces
are really
quite
a job
for the amateur.
Beams deck
beams
bility
are desired,
beam
at each
will quickly
should
be made
and of spruce
frame,
and they should
shed any water
cessive,
the beams
curved
grains
of oak or ash where where
that
lightness
be cambered,
comes
aboard.
can be sawn to shape,
are obtainable.
When
there
maximum
is a consideration. both
Where
an especially is severe
strength
and
There
should
for strength
the camber good
camber,
method
durabe a
and so the deck
is not unusually when
boards
such as is often
exwith
found
in
DECK
tops, the beams
cabin bent
to approximate
has much
merit
can either form
because
and
be steam-bent
to shape,
then sawn exactly
of the resulting
or over-width
to shape.
strength
FRAMING;
Another
157
stock can be
method,
of the deck beams,
one that
is to laminate
the
glue. Beam construction beams of three or more pieces over a form, using waterproof is shown in Figure 12-4A. Most of the beams will have the same siding, but at hatches, mast
partners,
percent
and the ends of cabin
than
the t,egular
beams.
trunks,
the beams
(See Figure
should
be heavier
by about
75
12-3.)
Although it is customary to represent the beams and frames on the plans in the manner shown in Figure 12-3, Figure 12-3E shows that the beams must be beveled to fit against
the frame
planking,
which
combination
heads.
curves
This is because
toward
of deck camber
the frames
the centerline
and flaring
are twisted
toward
hull sections,
must
sometimes
be cut away so the beams
This
is sketched
in Figure
will land
to lie flat against
the ends
of the boat.
the inboard
corner
on a flat surface
the
Due to a
of the clamp
instead
of a point.
12-3F.
Deck Beam Camber The
amount
depth
of camber
of curve
is given
of so many
beam.
To make
Figure
12-4B is followed,
method and
shown
should length
when
you run
method,
three and
a beam
or the camber
into
a cabin
straight-edged
are
at the battens,
driven center
longer
placed snugly against the nails the angle between the battens. batten
assembly
always
holding
from
each
than
in Figure
is needed,
beam
beam
the
with
12-48
board,
one
and very useful camber.
at each
end
at the top of the
the required
beam
in
mechanical
is self-explanatory
but C is faster has a different
length
procrdure
thr
In this
of thr
arc.
beam
Then
two
by at least two feet,
are
as shown and tacked together rigidly enough to hold The camber curve can then be drawn by sliding the
the centerline
the battens
shown
in the pattern of the
as it is called,
bc laid out easily
curve
top where
each
mold
may
The method
only one camber
nails
one
12.4C.
or in the specifications and is stated as a using the length of the longest length,
for a given or a beam
pattern,
in Figure
is suitable
on the plans
inches
to one
in contact
with
end
of the beam
the nails
and
then
to the other,
at the ends.
Half Beams and Headers At the sides of deck beams.
The
opening
fore-and-aft Figure practice shown
12-1A.
The
into
is still followed
today, The
the strong
springing the header Figure 12-2B.) In powerboats
and
always
must
is to make
beams,
then
to its planned small
sailboats
mentioned
the half
a couple
the header
dimensions with
very
from
previously fastened
beams,
and
clamp
up to the mold.
side
and
the
as shown although
in this
with the camber
molds,
the centerline
narrow
half
by the easier method
to coincide
of beam
are termed
and
is more often made be elevated
pull
12-3) and
are notched
dovetailed
the connection
(Figure
beams
the half beams
headers
and the procedure
are short
by the strong
which
old-timers
in the sketches. between
the beams
is bounded
headers
the beams, space
openings
decks,
them
of
in the
all the while
of the boat.
(See
the normal
half
158
Db:CK
beams
E;RAMI,YG
are sometimes
case is simply heads.
on which
for the length (See Figure
replaced
a filler
piece
by a shelf fitted as thick
is laid the decking
of the narrow
When
consists
is stiffened (Figure
between
header These
with
12-3C). and
knees in the derk masts.
the usual
beams,
The shelf in this
notched
around
the frame
board.
This kind of shelf extends
clamp
being
fitted
only
from bow to stern.
12-3D.)
the decking
headers
or a covering
side deck,
Deck Tie Rods and Lodging
framing
on top of the clamp.
as the deck
of planks tie rods
These
half
frame
knees
Knees rather
beams.
to provide
additional
strength
of plywood,
heads
stiffening
the deck
or clamps
there
at ends of large
hackmatack They
pieces
frame
and
the
also take some of the load off the connections
For
are sawn from
large
between
fastenings
conform with the deck camber. clamp. (SPP Figure 12-3.)
than
running
openings
or oak crooks
are bolted
or riveted
may
be “lodging”
in the deck or at
and are planed to the beams
on top to
and shelf or
Deck Blocking Wherever blocks wood
there
fitted
are fittings
between
on deck
the beams
for the fastenings
to bear
such
as cleats
and
tackle
blocks,
there
to take through-fastenings.
The
the load to the beams
they distribute
provide
I he case of shearing forces, and over a greater area of decking when upward encountered. The blocks can be of oak. mahogany, or plywood and should on
top
to conform
Whenever bolts.
to the
possible
Blocks
deck
the blocks
arp shown
be
against,
and
blocks
should
camber
are
best
in the deck
and
sawn
to a tight
if through-fastened
framing.
12-3.
12-3 is for a sloop
having
in
strains are be planed
fit between
to the beams
Figure
more
beams. with
long
Mast Partners ‘The deck
framing
the cabin
trunk,
beams.
These
plan
in Figure
the top of which
blocks
they are fitted,
are always
has large
as thick
and they are always
blocks
called
as the depth
made
should
be coated
serves to keep
Haqging
large with thick
out water
deck
frame
of hardwood
white
should
lead
there
surfaces. or other
mast
partners
such bedding
and
as blocking
between
between
through-bolted.
mast partners,
through
fitted
of the deck beams
plcmentary sketrh, Figure 12-3G, shows a set of typical in thr trunk top or the main deck. All comparatively
its mast stepped
which
The sup.
whether
located
or lodging
knees,
as the decking
is laid.
This
be a leak in the vicinity.
Knees
The forces exerted a manner similar
on a boat by seas and by masts in sailboats work to collapse to the way that a packing box from which the ends have
a hull in been re-
DECti
FRAMING
159
+iAC
OArC
HANCLING
KdEE5
tNEE.5
Figure 12-5.
movt-d
collapses
at thr
deck
when
corner
a man
and
stands
on it. These
are only one of the
forces
reasons
try to hinge
the hull structure
why properly
sized
and
located
fastenings are important if long hull life is to be expected. Brackets called hanging knees are fitted for resisting such sideways strains. Like lodging knees, they are made of natural Metal,
crook
oak
in the form
or hackmatack
of flanged
kners
and has the advantage
knees
are grnrrally
and
plates,
are
plates
and
of not splitting
Figure
ners of a sloop having
and singly
12 5 shows typical
its mast
stepped
angles,
insofar
or castings,
wooden
through
at the ends
hanging
the cabin
as possible.
is often
with age as wood is liable
used in pairs at the masts
long deck openings.
through-fastened
used for
to do. Hanging and midlength
knees
of
at the mast part-
trunk.
Modern Construction The
quarter
traditional
knees,
lodging
construction.
a reasonable
price
niques
Maine
flanged
plates.
of hanging
hanging
be realized
to Woodr~z~onf that
that can eliminate can be laminated
knees.
described
earlier them
magazine,
there
are modern
Morse,
materials
of wood or plywood
in
and then to pay
the need for traditional
sup-
Cherryand
tech-
crook knees or be made
not be used at all due to the enormous
a well-fitted and secure plywood secured plywood interior joiner
are used
a longtime
in late 1979. He is Frank
craft
Or. knees need
knees
with such knees is to find
(According
Knees
provided by modern materials: of lodging knees, and properly the place
problem
It should
for small
hackmatack.
metal
and
knees was still in business
04622.)
available
of oak and
The
for them.
plier of hackmatack field,
knees,
of
stiffening
deck can do the work bulkheads often take
160
DECKFRAMING
In any details
case,
be guided
of the structure
by the
plans
labor savings. If there are a number
of bulkheads
common
cruisers
in many
consisting
of two layers
heads
and
beams
or
areas.
power
partitions longitudinals
with
a minimum where
when
panel
The- designer
material
and full-height
packed
of plywood
boat.
for your
in way of masts
joiner
full of cabins,
glued
together
of other
it is necessary
deck
partitions
head
can
the
in
enclosures,
be supported
framing-
to reduce
should
provide
is used for weight
just span
a
hull,
etc.,
and as is
a deck
by these bulka few transverse of unsupported
-DECKING
In general,
there
first,
can be the lightest,
whirh
it watertight
are really
only two basic
kinds
of decking
consists of a wooden rot. Where the materials
and minimize
for a wooden
deck covered are available.
boat.
with fabric it is logical
The
to make to make
such a deck of waterproof plywood and cover ing, one still used in areas like the Caribbean
it with fiberglass cloth. A cheaper dcckislands, is made of tongur-and-groovr-
type boards,
sometimes
deck.
The
enough
sometimes other
covered
type of deck
to be caulked
with canvas, is the so-called
for watcartightness.
not:
the latter
laid deck made
And
then
there
Depending smallest tightness. tion
upon
your
or aesthetic. boats
viewpoint,
Regardless
the deck
serves
Both these aspects
each
type
of the decking the double
contribute
of deck chosen,
purpose
to safety,
strakes
are variations
(The builder of a boat with a fiberglass hull might opt for a lightweight having fiberglass skins over an end-grain balsa or foam core.) economic
is a short-lived
of narrow
has
an
sandwich
advantage.
remember
of providing the latter
thick
of both types. deck either
that in all but the strength
to comfort
and
water-
and rot preven-
as well.
Tongue-and-Groove
Deck
Tongue-and-groove
boards
material,
anywhere
from
make
an
4”to 6”, permits
inexpensive
deck
because
the deck to be quickly
the
built,
width
of the
with the boards
parallel to the centerline of the boat as in Figure IS-IA. Very often these decks are made of non-durable material, unseasoned in the first place, and quick to rot if the deck
covering
leaks.
tongue-and-groove groove
tends
The
straight-run
construction
to warp
between
deck
is not
has the disadvantage the fastenings
(Figure
as strong that
as other
the thin
13- 1 B). The
types
upper
and
the
edge of the
only covering
for a 161
162
DECKING
“-%.ac~ BeT*CCr UkDEP BUT--
rEC& *i 3CCu.
9EA.4, kc%
TO”riGj’E ~__
tongut~-and-grnovc~
deck of wide boards
in the air is old-fashioned as ridges
and
canvas
the canvas
that
duck.
will come
The groove
life is shortened
ends must
be well fastened,
Instead,
planking
the ends
butt
these
leak.
have
Better
still are bronze
in time
Strip-Built
Deck
strip-built
and suitable perhaps just sprung
upward
wood screws are much
and
The
between
decks are fastened
a way of working
A tongue-and-groove cost.
along
the canvas
the ridges.
to make
the deck
such a butt
beams
to blocks
and the
on a deck similar
to
blocks.
Calvanizcd
drive.
shows through
there must be joints in the decking, For strength and to prevent curling,
it is not practical
are fastened
Most tongue-and-groove age,
and
and go easily with the moisture
warping
by wearing
Unless the boards are laid in single lengths, these should be scattered as much as possible. butt
DE&K
SrEieP-p,f~L’” C>ECh *.PltJL ,‘P 5-3 -~ . ..--11\ 7 \+.. ml! h, .VCP . BLOC* \,-neo *3-,.
Figure
beam.
4‘ GPOOVE
threaded
deck really
even
with common
and better
poking and
galvanized
holes
nails,
in the canvas,
are inexpcnaivr,
and with making
it
but cost more
to
nails. cloes not have much
to recommend
it except
low
this is doubtful.
type of decking
shown
in Figure
13.IC
is strong,
rather
quickly
laid,
when the deck is *c, ” thick or better. The strakes are usually square, or a little wider than their thickness, and for maximum rigidity they are
to the curve
of the deck edge.
It is best to cut any laid decking
from
rift-sawn
163
DECKING
boards
and
lay it with
shrinking
and
finishing
nails
not exposed bronze
up,
at many
strakes as shown
of the wood.
to each
in Figure
of the sheer
13-1D.
Around
strake
If a strip-built
and
of course,
The
deck
because
the
practice
the edge of the deck,
is built
Figure
4-3.)
of
Galvanized
they are hidden nonferrous
and
Monel
or
all misgivings.
between
It is good
will be a minimum
(See
can substitute
eliminate
other
of planking.
deck
deck.
are satisfactory
the cost and
are fastened
beams
of the
The fastidious,
times
for this way there
the width
are used for fastening
surface edge
across
to sea water.
nails
The
the edge-grain
swelling
beams
and
toenailed
to set the nails
the outermost is planed
with waterproof-glued
slightly
below
strip is fastened
off smooth
seams
to the
when
the
to the
finished.
like a strip-planked
hull
(Chapter ll), it will be enormously strong if the seams are fitted reasonably tight. After being planed smooth and sanded, such a deck can either be painted or covered with
light
fiberglass
Plywood
cloth
and
painted.
Deck
A main
deck or cabin
rangement
top of marine
of the pieces
strength
for the deck
openings
and
in the deck
must
for hatches,
In the previous
under
the deck at openings the same
waste
cockpit,
chapter,
and
is strong,
light,
be planned
for minimum
available. Following
plywood
of plywood
panels tioned.
then
of material,
and
cabin,
taking
into
horizontal
racking
tions
are not
because The with
as important
this adds deck
panels
rlosrly
if thr
considerably should
spaced
fastened
plywood
be fastened screws
A well-fitted staples
plywood staples.
driven
underneath.
glued
Joint
to the deck
the edges
and
threaded
along nails.
to the deck framing
I,$ ” thick
by compressed-air-powered
the deck
beams
Countersink
can
staplers.
can be fastened
be fastened The
coating
with
coated
increases
ficult
and sheer
might
or even impossible.
to the surface,
Canvas Covering
which
the deck
be done should
by using
in a single that
the flat panels
a double
be waterproof
thickness
thickness,
glued
with Monet
the staples’
either
oak. due
very dif-
will not conform
such as two layers
together
to provide
of
the most
Decks
Plywood
is best covered
and
decks
laid
laying
As soon as it is obvious
the job must
%” or x” plywood, st rengt 4.
economics--
make
the putty,
holding power so it is just about impossible to withdraw these staples from whitr When a plywood deck is specified to be :?$ R in thickness or more, the curvature to camber
loca-
beams,
and cover them over with a surfacing with fiberglass cloth and resin.
glued
up to
The butts should the beams whrrr
strength.
or annularly
deck properly
Plywood
block
is waterproof
around
fastening heads slightly below the surface non-oil base if the deck is to be covered non-ferrous
to a butt
to the horizontal
flat-head
knees
was mcn-
the plywood should be cut so scams do not come
reasoning.
br sccurety scirw
ends can
the size of the of lodging
at the ends of large openings in the drck as shown in Figure 13-2. overlap as shown in thP skctrh. and joints should be located bctwern the panel
maximum
consideration
with
in construction
to minimize
laid. The ar-
to provide
together
the function
at masts
and quickly
with care
being
canvas
with fiberglass, covered
covering
with of decks
but inasmuch
canvas
as I recently
in the Caribbean-~
is still worthy
of mention.
saw both
;)robabiy
plywood
because
of
_I\I in- -I-
164
DECKING
FAGi CANV’AS
r eATTeN -,_ /___-1”.,.,-Ccl
Fi0EeGLA55,
FlBEtZqLA55
-
JR
TOtiirLJE
ifn
i
~
lUTED
ob?
~.-~ V4PN’GED)
COPAMOk, At& I I
t3EaMr -l-o OF DECICZ -I’
ml4
FtBCKGLAS5
;
0
*
062
4 GE% -5.
0LOCF.l RETIGEEN SurrJar eDG5
DECK
PLANICSHEEEZ
.\
PLnuwLFuEER
-,
COVEk3ZD
cCn.,VAS
C4NdA5 JR
l’-rvjoJD
C
WlTCI
oa
_-
____
.AWtchinq
,
lldil
M&,ODTYPE ~~DEC<
---___----_
‘;
•t
I
- Seun-
I
THE ,,ECk< -r\6U\E bltaY WAti’E E,TnBa T,.‘E pL.--“. .--cm -
kc,ITlri OVTrr KIT*iLnrE:Y , ‘4iED5rEtr.STORLOCL DECV.IUG IbT’r.2E.d “ECr.RE4W C”TFl?Oh\ pL,bQ,-..o i’AriELS ,h
Figure
13-2.
Canvas
for covering
piece
if possible,
suitable
width
together
so that
should
allowing cannot
be bought
enough
be had,
there
wide enough
width
to turn
get a sailmaker
will be a seam down
The cements
weight
of the
for decks
that
canvas
varies
are liable
on the market,
from
8-ounce
it is recommended
be sure the canvas
risk of applying loose covering. First stretch stretched
moist the
as tight
or other
is clean.
canvas
canvas
that
fore and
as possible,
and
canvas
that
worker
When
fold.
Seams
are shown
boats
to lo-
wear.
Although
you use plain
If a
to sew two strips
of the boat.
for small
to get considerable
deck in one
over the edge of the deck.
with a double
should bc applied to the deck immediately paint is smooth so there will be no lumps reason,
to go over the entire
down
the centerline
use sewn canvas, tack it on the centerline skctrhcs in Figure 13.2B. 12-ounce
FOPM&h OMULI STCEIIGTcl
there
marine
before you lay the canvas. to show under the canvas.
unable
to
in the
and
even
are canvas
paint,
which
Make sure the For the same
Select
a dry day for the laying, or else you run the in a will stretch later, when it dries out, resulting aft this
along
the centerline.
is at least
a two-man
The job.
canvas
should
It is better
be ac-
DECKING
complished worked
by rolling
on than
edges
of the boat
should
be copper
spaced
in order
After
the ends
and
and
the edges.
tacking
Where
will be turned When
to hold
the canvas
further
shrink
structures
the canvas
can be added,
an effort
to get a slick, glossy surface,
Tacks
be very closely
from
and hatches,
around
cut it about
idea
to apply
later,
it will start
the first
is to wet the canvas
Do this with a scrubbing
a final coat of deck paint.
4” in-
and beams; it
to the boat.
it is a good
one of the best methods painting.
sides of
tack it to headers
as they are added
fastened,
opposite fastened
brush
to and
one or two more coats of
If too much
to crack early
paint
is applied
in
and will also cause the
to crack.
Covering
Surfaces with Fiberglass Cloth
1 am going such
by moldings.
is completely
is dry. At any time
flat paint canvas
for cabin
later
completely
it or not,
then
area can be down over the
and should pulling
the canvas
and temporarily
it just before
before
will be hidden
amidships,
until
covers openings
has been
and stretch
the surface
working
it tightly,
deck
Believe
which
more
Pull the canvas
the pressure.
start
stretch
sticks so that
steel or even galvanized,
as you go along
up inside
of flat paint.
paint
it with tacks,
the canvas
around
by just your two hands.
never
or Mone!, for them
side of the openings,
coat
secure
the ends are fastened,
the boat
of the canvas
can be handled
165
to touch
as plywood
disagreement
only on covering panels
about
the most dimensionally
or diagonally
covering
planked
t hcsr surfaces:
hulls
should
stable
wooden
(Chapter
structures.
11). ‘There
is often
the cloth be laid on bare wood and
then saturated with resin, or should the bare wood be coated with resin. and the glass cloth laid in the tacky resin, smoothed. and immediately saturated with another coat of resin?
Ask an experienced
applied
covering
There adherence
that
resin
called
Stable adhesion
it for use as a putty.
Cabosil
surfaces
such
can
of the wood decks
If the cabin should
sides and be
you know who has
is to be painted,
strengthening
are and
items
the
also making
sanded. smooth,
coamings
method
or two and in tape
watertight
putty,
a white
the
woodwork
deck
with corstrips.
the cabin,
being
bright,
joinerwork.
the edge
The
primer
are to be finished
in the finished These
of cloth,
doubling
a fiberglass
is to build “feather”
form.
exterior
of
layer with
sanded
so it is not visible
available
a single
reinforced
installation
the watertight
it for an inch
with
if rough
being as hatch
before
it with the sander fabrics
after
for an epoxy
the resin. boat,
is improved
such
covered
up against
with
of a v-bottomed
surface
the fabric The
or someone
the wood.
For instance,
can be coveted
are painted
everything tapering
be mixed
like plywood
as thr chines
Fiberglass used first. decks
from
of fastenings or in cracks must be removed to bare wood and material. A materials supplier can sell you powders to mix with
to thicken
powder ners,
of these materials
seems to be no disagreement over the fact that epoxy resin has the best to wood nr over the fact that the wood surface must be clenrr. Any oil-based
putty over the heads replaced with another the
supplier
has not delaminated
etc.,
the
When and turn
of the covering
by
job.
narrow joints
strips that
are great
for
v~ill be painted.
166
DECKING
with
Decks
Planksheer
A very attractive,
old-fashioned
fabric-covered around
deck
the
edge
planksheer, scarphs. lines
Its shape
from
is obtained and
best to cut the outer
marking
from
the planksheer
is fairly
at the edge can
of the planking
narrow,
block
(Figure
in either
to shape
of two ways. run
on the deck,
the edgr
of a fabric-covered
a and
they are
In some cases where
on edge. The
The fabric
inner
edge
is
of the
into the groove
tacked, and the groove filled with a tightly fittt=d batten of wood planksheer. Another way is to employ a toe rail set al the inner edge of as shown in Figure 13-2E. The fabric is tacked along the edge and the 13-2F shows the tened over the fabric with plugged screws. Figure mc~thod of finishing
Then
case it is
otherwise
down
a
with
by the dotted
in which
them
the deck.
the fabric
called
on the underside.
assemble
bent
piece,
is a
board
are joined
as shown
are edge-bolted;
and
13-2D),
This
planksheer,
underneath
it is steamed
of the planksheer
be rabbeted
needed,
deck
covering
segments
on the deck
a batten. heavy, the joints
the top to a butt
the
it is a tapered
edge on all the pieces
screw fastened
planksheer
unless
colored
13-2C.
and
a board
the edge
for the width,
draw in the tapered width with When the deck is sufficiently
stopped
by Figure
-wide boards
by laying
canvas-covered
or contrasting
as illustrated
to shape
line is drawn
of the completely
by a varnished
of the deck,
is sawn
in the figure
parallel
variation
bounded
and
to match the the planksheer toe rail is fasmost common
deck with a half-round
mahogany
or
oak molding. The outermost strakc of a stx-ip-built deck is edge fastened to the planksheer for support, but the outer cdgcx of a tongue-and-groove deck would bc sprung downward if on brt ween
stepped canvas
fiberglass
splitting
the edge
deck planks deck beams.
Caulked There
where
unsupported,
of the decking.
when,
perhaps
a tongue-and-groove To prevent
rhey run out at the edges,
to the extent
of tearing
the
deck is not recommended-and and also to support the ends of the
this, there
must
be blocks
fitted
between
the
Decks are IWO types of caulked
too much wherr
beams covering
difference,
weight
deck
is important,
decks.
planking thinner
In larger yachts, where weight does not make is laid. In smaller boats, 1” thick and upward
decking
is laid over a sub-deck
of marine
plywood.
A tyllical laid and caulked deck is drawn in Figure 13-3 for a sailboat and The planksheer is fitted first as described struction also applies to powerboats. thtsn thy narrow
strakes
are sprung
parallel
for the narrow strakes are twofold: the narrow material will not shrink must be clear
and should
to the edge of the planksheer.
the conbefore;
The reasons
they may bc sprung without too much trouble, and and swell much or check. The wood for a laid deck
be in long lengths.
Any joints
are located
so they are quite
far
apart in adjacent strakes. The wood must be rift sawn so the grain can be laid on edge, because flat grain will eventually lift and splintera condition that is both unsightly and hard cedar,
and
on bare Burma
feet. Suitable teak.
The
woods last named
are good
white
is the best and,
pine,
Douglas
fir, Port
like most good things,
Orford by far
-Raftawn,ckr drcwiog I-? PLbtiB3HCLR
ac
SEAM FOR rHlOISOL COMPOUhlD
hJ0CMA.L SCAM
-GAULIcIdG
od
ALL bWEL cue CWE
SEAMS-
•~AG~CRED FASTCdWG5
Uh
6Erc
---_ .--, ._- CA0lhi SIDE J
ICAL b’AiCpE d-IV
-CAUU&D
SCAMS
Ruti
LAID DECK’--
-L--
Figure 13-3.
ObCdcldDER l’D -YAK?? FA5TEhlldG5 Iti hhS ErlDS
-. L STCA&S HERRNG 00dtD AT %-rz~P-BUILT DECK) BR tJIbbE!D IIJ-IU STCAIGW OR TAPCREO IdlhJO PLAhJ<
CL. (sac
168
DECKING
It has a natural
the most expensive. does not have bleach
it out to a whitish
equal
oil that seems to make
or painted.
color so that,
Scrubbing
together
the deck everlasting,
with
salt water
and it
in the sun will
with its long life, there is no deck quite
to teak.
Teak trim
to be varnished
decks
do get dirty
is being
there
used
has been
of them Until
a flood
do a good
to bevel the edges
sections
the seams. square
secured, regular keeping
to offset
teak
appearance,
put on the market.
up new seam compounds, to make
The seams were glue, ” a preparation
are available
like the one shown are masked
Most
practice
watertight,
caulked heated
tape.
with cotton, and to make it run for
sealers After
The seam
that
away after
can be run
the decking
filler
was
as shown
and the excess was scraped thiokol-based
in the figure.
with
standard
them
13-3. “seam
The seams were over-filled
seams
antiseptic
systems
for caulking
in Figure
was called
seams
but since so much
otherwise
are easy to use.
Now there
the open
their
and treatment
of the deck strakes
the glue hardened. simple,
boats
got busy making
space was left for what “paying”
do not look well if neglected,
of teak cleaners
job and
the chemists
by the enlarged
and
on fiberglass
is then
is laid
applied
in and
with a
household-type caulking gun. Care must be taken to avoid air bubbles by the tip of the cartridge at the root of the seam so it is filled from the bottom
up. The seams are over-filled and the excess filler is cut off with after the thiokol has completely cured a few days after paying. A 1 ‘/R* or 114 0 thick
deck will have strakes
about
1 W II wide,
about right as the thickness of the decking becomes greater that will specify what your architect wants. It is suggested listed in the table,
Figure
a very sharp
chisel
and this proportion
is
in larger boats. Your plans you use flat-head screws as
6-2. The screws will be countersunk
and plugged
with bungs
of the same wood as the decking, and due to the size of the plug, there will be room for just one fastening at each deck beam. Note in Figure 6-2 that the screw gauge may be reduced
for decking,
It is noted
1.3-3 that the strakes
deck
into
run under
made
wider,
king plank.
or nibbed
cabin
sides, Quite
requiring
bing
into run
out at the sides. but
are caulked smooth.
payed;
Planking conventional directly
and
laid
deck,
beams.
with
the
the
into
as the taper plank
the plank
that
entire
surface of marine
exception
that
way there
like
must
be
It is not desirable
to let deck
next
opening
to the cabin strakes
are run
the planksheer
is
parallel
as well as the
on some of the nib ends will be
around ends
at the centerline
Either
the decking
to the eye. When
The decking
of proportions,
this, the strake
You will find
is pleasing then
as drawn.
is to run the planks
a margin
a laid deck over a sub-deck
to deck
an example
and
and fastening
not only common
may be herringboned plank
to be nibbed
is needed,
way of decking
too, are straight)
the lengths
the ends
the planksheer
at times.
13-3. Sometimes
a lot of fitting
Still another
sides,
in Figure
bung
to take fastenings.
sides, and to avoid
as drawn
very long. both
a king
the deck at the centerline
seams
to the cabin
in a smaller
in Figure
the strip-built blocks under
resulting
straight
fore and
the cabin
(unless
to blocks
the method planking of the plywood
under
the deck where
used in Figure is complete4,
deck
is planed
is similar
the strakes
aft, nibthe cabin 13-3 is
the seams and
sanded
to constructing
are not
being
a
fastened
should be thicker than the plywood sub-deck; as would be covered with a 5/gn a 3/gti fir plywood sub-deck
,pc~’
I
I
!
DECKING
thick
teak overlay.
Plugging
the teak to the plywood the sub-decking builders
allowing
ttle teak it to cure,
If the teak strakes cient
from
for counterboring
holes can be avoided
underneath.
there
cover the plywood
As an alternate, (without
should
fastening
Pains
be taken
be a leak in the seams of the teak
with lo-ounce can
be laid
fiberglass on plywood
of course)-a
are not back-screwed, and
must
if desired
plugging
screw
messy
cloth
to prevent laying
with
but effective
the “/eWthickness
by back-screwing
strakes.
before
covered
169
rotting
In fact,
of
some
the teak deck.
thiokol
compound
job.
mentioned
holes in the conventional
above manner.
is suffi-
Chapter
The
14
amount
and
likr
daysailers
boats have
your
cabin
be done hull.
of deck joinerwork
will havcb simple
a deckhouse.
work should built
character
trunk,
carefully
the occasional
cockpit
hatches, and
paint.
Even
though
it is said
while
larger
yachts
cockpit, and bulwark rail. This regardless of how well you have
because.
will make
a snap appraisal of your boat based too, is necessary, for Pr0pf.r maintenant-c*. woodwork. peeling varnish, or scarred and
on thr appearancr* of the deck structures. nothing looks wet-se than bare and stained dirty
Open might
watertight
neatly
visitor
will vary with the type of boat. coamings.
that
a book cannot
btb judged
by its cover.
my ad-
\ice is to take a great deal of care when finishing parts that meet the eye and to keep them shipshape. A discussion about finishing follows, because the builder must keep thinking
about
the ultimate
appearance
while
doing
ever);
hit of the exposed
deck
joinerwork.
Finishing
with
Traditionally,
Varnish the finest
mahogany.
Today,
yachts
for various
had vast areas of varnished any large
reasons,
areas
deck joinerwork of varnished
of teak or
fine
woods
are
most likely to he faces of plywood rather than solid lumber, and hopefully the faces are of veneers thick enough to survive a few refinishings to bare wood. Nowadays, varnished
wood
lines such Teak
(“brightwork”)
as the sheer
and
mahogany
them can be dented and such a finish open grain 170
that
is limited
moldings
used
to accent
fore-and-aft
of the hull. are moderately
by abuse.
Their
hard
natural
takes work to produce must
to trim
and
initially
he ftlled for a smooth
resistant
appearance,
to scarring, though,
and to maintain. Clear, natural
finish.
but
has appeal
either
of
to many,
These woods have an filler is used for teak,
~“”
I
I
DECK
while
paste
filler stains
be sanded
of desired
to a perfectly
brushing
consistency,
is spread
time the excess is wiped after
a little
When work
and
area
must
ture
a finish
be clean
and
amount
remain
filling:
then
The wood must
‘i 2 filler,
to dry to a dull
with a fine-grade
thinned
appearance,
abrasive.
you will be proud while
to
at which
about
what
Repeat
opinionated
kind
people
of varnish
who freely hand
to use. As you become
you, too, may also swear by a particular of the kind
cleanliness,
absence
for six coats
to show off. The work and
varnishing.
are full of highly
But regardless
the same:
allowed
that
of advice
and more experienced, of brands.
to the mahoganies.
before
free of dust
and boatyards
out an enormous more
on and
be sanded
you will have
The waterfront
finish
171
off across the grain with clean cotton waste or rags. This is easy After a day of drying, the first coat of varnish can be applied.
practice.
this is dry, it should
or more
color are applied
smooth
JOINERWORK
of varnish
of moisture,
used,
brand,
the essentials
and sanding
or a mix-
of varnishing
in between
coats to kill
the gloss.
Finishing
with Paint
Jy. painting in Chapter 16. but 1 merely want to point out here abr..* ...aurni’ you may he painting wood deck joinerwork, such as Philipinstead of varn:-’ fir or Duraply plywood, or fiberglass-covered mahogany (solid fJr plywood),
There
is a section
th-:. pine wood.
For the finest
appearance,
as well as easy to maintain, nished.
With
because well.
a paint
finish,
countersinking
This
Use only
a good
to smooth
glaze coat.
if necessary, lightly again
again Sand
Starting craft marine
yachts
trade.
hren
available
For the
previous
superior
finish
that
button-bursting
plans
as if it were to be varneed not be plugged,
sand
with a polyester
material
Start
paint.
can be very attractive
that
putty
with an undercoater,
smooth,
apply
apply
a second
depending tion
glazing
undercoater,
touted
leave
polyurethane
form by several or so, this high-gloss,
10 years form
reasonably will
two-part
in brushable
not at all adaptable
affluent, the
coatings
for amateur
use of the polyurethanes
applicator
(“painter”
used on air-
firms catering to the durable coating had
is really
application. can
not
result
proper)
and
in a truly
of your
Cockpit Coaming boat
will show you the
kind
of cabin
and
coamings
(along
heights and half-breadths), type of toe or bulwark rail, size and location and other related information: the best 1 can do is discuss joinerwork general.
will do as
is thin.
proud.
Cabin Trunk The
the highly
only in a sprayahle and
finish
and sand lightly and carefully before painting the first finish to kill the gloss, then apply a second coat of finish. marketed
are brave
with
irregularities,
were
If you
and covering
working
of marine
out
in mid-1979,
and
the surface
when
grade
compound
an all-paint
the wood must be just as smooth the heads of screw fastenings
below
is an advantage
and indeed
The
largest
upon
of the cabin
structure
the design. side,
you
will
If the curve
tackle
is the
of the cockpit
it will he best and easiest
cabin
coaming
to make
both
trunk,
with
of hatches, details in
or deckhouse,
on deck is a continuacoaming
and cabin
side
172
DECK
.JOINER
WORK
COAM
Figure
out of one available
14-1.
long
glued splines. can be made
of the bottom
it was laid
The
down
old-timers
from
of the cabin
work screws.
deeper
reasons
the cabin
for the amateur the cabin joint
sides
is difficult
up against bright, cabin
sides as shown
and caulked 14-2C.
This
deck
from
but the results the deck
beam
fabric
of the
more
cabin
the best way is to make
a rabbeted
with
and
after toward
Sometimes
for
This can be a chore pleasing.
It is easy to fit
14.2B,
but
and the fabric
If the cabin
to say the least.
them
inboard
outboard.
in Figure
such
a
turned
sides are to be finished
care must
covered
practice
posts, make
sides,
be sloped
than
exacting
general
corner
considerably.
watertightness.
the deck is canvas
job is a real challenge,
making
to lean
great
on the top
unbelievably
posts and to fasten
as shown
of inches.
impractical,
at the
loft floor,
extra
whtle
the deck is fiberglassed
the deck edge to ensure only when
corner
are often
these
held in place
a little
-~ almost
thickness
headers
panels,
top.
to behold--
inboard
with
from the mold
to leave
appearing
unless
side for a couple
turned-up
sides against
the
are usually
the board
standard
carefully
to a perfect fit. being vertical, should
sides are sloped
to keep watertight
the cabin
making
the cabin
builder. inside
wood
a sight
rabheted
boards
it is to rest on the deck or
whether
of the trunk
by ‘/,,,‘I or so than
to keep them
than
14-1B and C.) When
assembly, work off the radius corner The sides of the cabin, rather than fhc ccn(erlr’~c~ slightly
side,
Remember
was truly
(See Figure
longer
of the trunk
the corners that
mahogany
up by edge joining
of thin
the plans.
is to fit the ends into suitably
aesthetic
wide
The top edge is taken
to the camber
dovetailed
glue and plugged rahhet
Long,
can be made
to the shape.
be planed
time-consuming
nowadays
14-1A.
with a template
and scribed
edge so it can
the
edge
it, is best obtained
opening
where
and
as in Figure
but if not, the width
If the cabin side is to be of plywood up in the same way.
The shape drrk
piece
for this,
overlap
!hiG
be taken Thus,
to fit and bed
it is best to set the
or fiberglassed.
sill piece
as sketched
With
a laid
in Figure
DECKJOINERWORK
-FA~~E~~~~GsTKz,P BE2..NS K’!-Ed
LIA0LE
m
Fe cafqr:
SlmE15l-rritd
/ N eoaer
.Sli
173
ICAti
Figure 14-2. When fastened
trunk
sides of solid lumber
with bolts through
to the top edge.
are specified
the deck and
Drilling
must
to be as thick
beam
header,
be very carefully
done
as 1 ‘/I “, they should
be
with the bolts countersunk so as not
to ruin
in-
the lumber.
When the cockpit coaming is thinner than the cabin side, make it out of a separate piece and let it into the trunk dt the after end as shown in Figure 14-1D. When the cabin and the coaming are not in a continuous to the cabin sides through a rabbcted block. Strangely built
enough,
sides, nailed
through
the trunk
counting
amateur
1 have seen only one
and glued
top, the cabin labor.
curve bend solution
the intersection
at the edges.
whether
is to strip
,+JAiiED
athwartships:
shown especially
trunk
for a sailboat
of this type.
With
had strip-
thr mast stepped
I saw, female
forms
14-3. or even more it might
and the trunk
in plan
;l-RIPS
Figure 14-3.
was
with considerable
so. Depending
be impossible
in view of the curve
dis-
were set up, against
roof and sides is desi,gned
planked.
that
fastened
and this is one way to do it easily,
the edge as shown. 4 &LuED
is usually
the work went quickly
in Figure
or double
edges, plank
has to be strong
of the cabin
like that
the roof is single
to the plywood
cabin
as planking
In the one case that
which the strips were clamped very strong. Sometimes
the samr
curve, the coaming Figure i4-1E.
upon
to give a quick
view. In this case a
:<:
(”
\,
:I
by
I
I-
,
I
174
DECK
JOINER
WORK
Toe Rail Small
sailboats
foothold
are
when
fitted
the boat
ing decorative
scarphed. sheer
with The
so that
thickness
14-4A)
rails are either
that
are used
to be looked
set slightly
inboard
as a
on as be-
of the deck
edge of the covering board, as mentioned in Chapter 13, and the butting pieces are screws. Where jcints are necessary,
under
edge of the rails has scuppers
rainwater
and spray
throughout,
shown
The
(Figure
long use, have come
plugged
but more
rails may be of constant being
and from
as well as practical.
edge or at the inboard are fastened
toe rails on deck
with
is heeled,
height
on the lines
will drain often
from
they
cut at and near
overboard.
The
are tapered
end to end,
the low point
of the
rails may be of the same
on the inside
but frequently
face.
they taper,
Small
toe
the heights
plan.
.-. .--
!.J”-
n-s
c‘s
Figure 14-4.
Bulwark Larger
Rail
boats
tapered
have what
in thickness.
Details
drift bolts run about with a neatly for economy.
every
a bulwark
are shown IS” through
rail.
always
in Figure
tapered
14-4B.
in height
Bulwark
the deck into the sheer
and usually
rails are secured
strake.
by
and are topped
shaped cap, screw fastened and plugged. The cap is sometimes omitted Joints in both rail and cap are always scarphrd and the bottom of the rail
is scuppered
to drain
pers
that
(pipes
is called
water
drain
that otherwise
water
from
the
would deck
be trapped
overboard
on deck. through
If no deck scup-
the
hull
near
the
waterline) are fitted, then the bottom of the rail scuppers must be at the deck level to drain rainwater. When there are deck scuppers, the bottom of the cuts in the rail are placed scuppers
about
tm ” above
to streak
stem rabbet, and Figure 14-4B.
the deck
the topsides
so that
with dirt.
the cap is shaped
ordinary
rainwater
The forward
at the stem
and
will not run
through
end of the rail is fitted across
the transom
into
as shown
the the in
DECK
Installation builder.
of the
Templates
tom edge in place not
rail
will call
be of thin
to fit the edge of the deck.
and a batten mind
bulwark
should
and
that
Then
for
some
sprung
ingenuity
in place,
the rail heights
the magnitude
will vary
vertically
Jigs from
of the problem
face of the rail conforms on
a normal
the cabin
175
the
shaped
part
of the
on the bot-
at the stations
It will be a problem
the outside
on
and
is run to fair the top of the rail.
installed
changes.
wood,
JOiNERWORK
are laid out
to hold
the template
with the type of boat.
to the hull sections,
that
Bear
in
is. the rail is
boat;
thus the bottom edge bevel constantly coamings and across the fore and after decks
sides and
must be devised to hold the template in place, and then the rail while fastening. It is very likely that at least the forward section of the rail will need steaming to get it in place,
and
joints
much
care
must
be taken
to fair
the rail
sections
into
each
other
at the
so they will be smooth.
Bulwarks for the larger boats can indeed try the patience of the inexperienced builder. In certain cases, laminating can eliminate some of the heavy work. However, laminating
requires
laminate
bulwarks
Monkey
Rail
Powerboats
when
as a foothold
chocks
for anchor
hatch
hatch
it. The
one boat
a short
handling
dock
and time to construct:
is to be built.
monkey
an anchor
(See Figure
rail forward, in a heavy
it is best to 4-4D.)
Figure
sea and
14-4C.
can
This
be fitted
is
with
lines.
Hatch
A sliding The
than
up with
when and
takes some planning
more
are dressed
handy
Sliding
a jig. which
must
is necessary
to give headroom
be rugged
enough
cover may be flat across,
over companion
to take the weight but looks much
ladders
of a man
better
and elsewhere.
sitting
or standing
when cambered
on
like the deck.
It can be of plywood, either one or two layers, but is usually made of solid lumber, as shown in Figure 14-5. The cover is made on a pair of beams sawn to the camber, using edges grooved for soft white material ‘/; ” thick and about 3” wide, with the butting pine splines, glued
and
The which tongues
the hatch
the top piecrs to make
on the beam with
brass strips
than
ends
a piece of split that interlock
as well as prevent
are fastened
logs may be constructed are easier
tected The that
which stiffen
to the beams
in a variety others.
tubing,
with plugged
of styles as shown
A common
to slide in grooves brass
leaks. The joints
are waterproof
screws.
in Figure
slide is shown
14-5, some of
in sketch
A with brass
in the logs. The edge of the cover is pro-
while
with the split tubing
the tops of the logs are sheathed to keep spray out of the hatch
with
opening.
arrangement in sketch B is similar in operation, having a rabbeted beam header slides in the log groove. The top of the log may be sheathed if desired, and the
molding on the edge of the cover makes it adaptable to canvas covering. The logs shown in sketches C and D do not have grooves, for the covers slide directly on the logs, making
it necessary
friction
is minimized
edge only. project
to sheathe by having
them
to prevent
an angle
wear
between
of the surface.
the brass strips,
SO
In C the sliding contact
In D there is a piece of brass let into the cover at the ends only,
slightly,
so the wooden
cover will not touch
the log. The
is at one
and it should
arrangements
shown
176
DECh’
~J~~i!VER
WORK
Figure 14-5. in the sketches steel,
but
are typical
brass
is quite
An elevation 14.5. The
at the centerline
length
by the distance opening.
and others
can be devised.
of a sliding
of the logs as they extend from
Beyond
The
metal
the aftermost
the required
the logs to the deck beams
hatch
length,
and
hatch
is illustrated
beyond
hatches
by Bomar
Companicmway The simplest
with plugged
way of closing
a brass
cabinet
guides,
locking
lock may
to circu’late
to keep water
is determined end of the hatch
with an ogee curve.
screws.
The bottom
Bomar, hatches
Fasten
edges of the
to drain trapped alloy and Lexan
water. sliding
Inc., South West Street, match in styling the deck
others.
be fitted.
from
the opening as shown
tongue
air through
are sometimes
as those made by 03603. The sliding
E, Figure
Closure
that slide between take
and
by sketch
to the forward
the logs are finished
headers
hatches, such New Hampshire
made
can be stainless
the companionway
cover beam
logs just forward of the apron must have scuppers cut in them In the end, it can sometimes be less costly to buy aluminum companionway Charlestown.
parts
easy to work.
in Figure
screwed The
to the
running
it is locked
of the
hatch
cover
also have ventilation up. A shaped
off the slides or main for the drop
is to fit drop
boards
14-5. A slot can be cut in the top slide to bottom
top slide should
the boat when
substituted
in the aft end of the trunk
deck
into
beam,
or a
holes or louvers
sill is fitted the cabin.
on the deck
Double
doors
panels.
Hatches Openings At sea,
in the deck are covered particularly,
hatches
with hatches that
leak
are
made an
to be watertight
unspeakable
or reasonably
nuisance,
making
so. for
DECK
’ A5SEM0W 54 SWELLING ‘L-OFUWEP wiLL td0r FOfZCE FRAME HPAR-I-
6-l
hATCH
CDAMI~G
-I I
177
CDPdElZ
0D
HATCH COAM Ihb
JOINERWORK
CRUDE b-l ‘L ryPf!z
COU LIGHT
HUSlc’\/ HAl-Ctl
BROhlzE HlblGE
SECT:
-l-HRU
HATCH
bWl72? WA-I- TYPE l%uSH HAl-lW
0 II
Figure
14-6.
discomfort
during
the watch
below,
so they fit well and function splined half
as described
lapped
consider sketch
satisfactorily.
for the sliding
at the corners
to be too difficult A of Figure
so every effort
(here,
The
companion again,
be exerted
pieces forming hatch.
The
if the half lap is reversed that
the swelling
joint
screws
across
the width
The hatch coamings either through-bolted corners
of the hatch
as shown In fact,
in sketch bedding
Use either
will force
of the top must
around
used
the corner
be in the same
them
from
piece
which
that the detail that shown
is parallel apart.
the cover is
dovetails
and it is very important
the end screws in the top pieces are in the side frame of the top in width
to construct
the cover are preferably frame
the old professionals
for the amateur),
14-6 be followed.
should
I in
so that
to the top pieces, In other
words,
all
of frame.
vary in detail according to preference or practice, but all are or fastened from the bottom with long, husky screws. The coamings
are dovetai!ed
G, Figure compound
a time-tested
together
or rabbeted
14-6, and set in marine
bedding
is used to keep out water
under
marine
bedding
sealant
and screw fastened
compound eveything
such as 3M Number
on the deck. fitted
on deck.
5200 or a thiokol-
base compound. Sketch although
B illustrates frames like
modified
into something
a crude workboat-type C are used, they are like D, which
hatch not very suitable for a yacht, and too light to be any good and should be
will stay together
and is fairly
watertight
when
178
DECK
-JOINER
WORK
I_
:
2. , 4. J6. 7. 8.
#LE.
1-A’
*(a’. I’ AL41 $,: , ‘; RF?..-r PEec f> 777 . bSE.’ **‘l I’CC.. -re r ?Y z j*. 1. UA435 I2 .,A”.,> C.rT’” c AC. 4 Ig ..‘A..--k’>W
-E-
-----I
Figure
SECTlOPJ T-KU *AT‘=* CC‘AW’hs * CdEq
14-7.
dogged
down.
The
gasket.
A refinement
type shown
too light.
they must
E has
of this is the hatch
the best of the lot and hatches
in sketch
n3t too difficult
Flimsy
hatches
the
coaming
construction to build.
and hatch
shown
hardware
like the galley. with
with a plastic Unless
a plastic
on the hatch
top.
a strong
the
plywood-
material
covers
pins
just do not stand
with a bronze
The
builder priced
such as Lexan
is to
if fir-is
from
below
with
cast
of the type shown opposite
be pulled some
be
all
is used,
of
up to the abuse
Some
by fitting brass
a crewman
is wanted frame.
a lot of light
in a wooden
a
hatch
like to hinge hinges
hooks
in sketch
and
main
cover
of
the hatches
eyes, or dogged
in the marine at both
side. down
from marine
Such fasteners
to
deck
and replacing
on the desired
F (available
the hinges.
is liable
like the one shown
two sets of hinges both
to spaces
it is a bit risky to use a
where
painted,
rod to engage
the The tight
hardware
are especially
good
down.
no-w has the option hatches,
If a light
satisfactory. is effected
at the corners must
but it admits
one with a bronze
joinerwork
fastener
located
a gasket
lowest
is
the parts
hardware firms and are quite Note that the hatch in Figure
deck of a sailboat force.
with a removable
are locked
concerns) where
deck
and after sides, which
individual
is optional,
with considerable
fiberglassed
forward
This
top on the main
hatch, it is safer to use a round hatch section in Figure 14-6. When
14-7, which
to make
take.
14-7 is shown
jump
for a rubber
in Figure
It is a mistake
The hinges shown are made by a couple of the marine satisfactory. Through-bolt the hinges wherever possible.
hatch
grooved
of buying
of which
hatches
are good
value,
instead
of making
are made
mostly
them.
The
of molded
p!Lstic. Hatches :,f cast aluminum alloy frames with strong lights of polycarbonate sheet such as Lexa;l are considerablv more expensive. Some of these hatches are designed
with
sailboats
in mind
and
have a minimum
sails can be hurriedly passed through the hatch without Some complain that the plastic-topped hatches sweat,
number
of protrusions
so that
catching on anything. and this is also true of metal
DECK
hatches. tirely
Sweating
of the metal
by applying
granulated
minimum-sweating Flush
hatches
can
he considerably
cork to the underside.
hatch
,JOlNER
reduced
Of course,
out of one of the older
WORK
materials
179
or stopped
it is possible
en-
tc make
a
- wood.
Hatches
Cockpits
usually
have
are constructed washdown
water
This
method
usual
sha!low
gutters
from
hatches
in sketch
running
is pretty
or much
channel-shaped enough
flush
as shown
to project
into the bilges
and storage
and dripping
spaces
and often
to keep rain.
spray,
on equipment
and
on the way.
it does not take much water to overflow the A better method is to use a system of to clog the drain.
metal
under
tanks,
14-6, in an effort
poor because
dirt
sheet
over engines. H, Figure
gutters
attached
the opening,
and
to the
having
hatch
opening
a good-sized
framing,
overboard
wide
line, say 1%U
at least.
Watertight
Self-Bailing
A watertight
cockpit
with scuppers
The
boat
as fitted
to drain
of the cockpit teak.
can
Cockpit
water,
in sailboats whether
it bf: from
be fiberglass-covered
plans
should
provide
is simply
below
rain or heavy spray
plywood,
details
a well sunk preferably
ifor the cockpit
and seas. The sole
made
scuppers
main non-skid,
or bare
and whether
or not
they should be crossed, that is, whether the port scupper discharges through the hull on the starboarrt side and vice versa. There arc various ways to fit scuppers flush with the cockpit
sole;
probably
marine
hardware
cockpit
well would
the easiest
outfits.
Above
drain
rapidly
is to buy
ta.:sh-fitting
all, the scuppers
should
shoul1.l a sea break
scuppers
from one of the
be generously
sized so that the
aboitrd.
l’he cockpit sole is laid on beams that may extend to the hull sides, or it may be supported by beam headers, which in turn are suspended from the main deck headers by long rods with threaded ends for nuts. (See Figure 14-&I.) Two types of water tables around the edges of the sole are shown, either of which may be used with a caulked sole. The cockpit
ceiling
may be permanently
instaiied
access
spaces
not occupied
and
to storage
Many feeling
prefer
of security
the lowered seats
cockpit
seats lowered
it gives.
beams
and
headers
deck beams
below
If the boat
seats wilh care
are most comfortable
main
by fuel
in order
for support,
has a raised and
fitted
the latter tubing
with hinged
tanks,
exhaust
deck level (Figure doghouse,
with a slanted
to drain
water,
lines,
for
etc.
14-8B) for Ihe must
of the helmsman. lazyback.
are secured
(See dotted
doors
piping,
the architect
the visibility
of which
at the ends of the cockpit.
seats must be scuppered with copper hinged sections over storage spaces.
They
to blocks Figure
plan The
require
under
the
1478B.) Sloped
and may be arranged
with
and Locker Lids
Seats Hinged This
the main
not to restrict
if sloped
or fitted
water
seats and
occurs
in both
locker
lids on deck
solid lumber
are prone
and plywood.
to warp
due
to changes
One way to minimize
in moisture.
this is to make
a
180
DECK
JOINERWORK
r7f’l-lobJAL: f$T.Ed=?D
RCA -I?2 H
FAORiC
CdEKEO OF? CAULIdPC’ Sod
CAULVfSP
SdE
00
5-CUPPER
Figure
14-8. &GPCE
i
i-E
3’
t..,c
.w
crrr
ilr
-..-i.EC
LIP
\
I -_rl
--
-CLL.YT sau
;.ir5
_
_
63 ll
Figure 14-9.
series of cuts parallel done Figure
on a table
to the long
saw or with
direction
a portable
and on the underside circular
saw.
Cleats
of :he piece. are fitted
This
as shown
is in
14-9.
Sheer Guards The hull guard half round hulls.
at the sheer of the boa?,
GY rectangle
The latter
for smaller
type can be difficult
if it is deslgneA U Lzvl une, cxn vary from a simple boats to a izirly heavy, built-up guard for larger to make
and install,
considering
the shape
of the
DECK
deck in plan and the changing
JOINERWORK
181
bevel of the sections of the boat from bow to stern. The
most difficult job is to install a guard at the bow of a powerboat forward and a lot of flare: a guard must be laminated
having a full deck line
to the shape of the dec : line and
sawn to the bevel of the sections. The fastenl’ng of guards is very important, are there for the purpose of protecting
for they
the hull and must not come loose when called
upon to do some work. Lower guards to protect
hulls at the stern where there is tumble
home (hull wider
below the sheer than at the sheer) take some hard knocks at times and also must be securely fastened.
Depending
the sheer guard sometimes which,
for heavy-duty
upon the construction
of the hull and deck at the sheer,
needs blocking between the frames to take the fastenings,
guards,
are preferably
through-bolts.
Chapter
15
INTERIOR
From the beginning reasonably ects. With
of this manual
designer’s
drawings
some typical structural details to be planned,
and fronts,
but
and
drawers,
the galley
in the nature
than
fabricated
from
them either more The
than that
182
with fine
boards.
of plyivobd
or as fancy
as
show details
of
should
are lacking
or sparse,
persons
joinerwork
I will show
parts
and
there
consisting
the all-important
work is enhanced
by neat-fitting
pushing
sandpaper
are only a
of berth
tops
ice box.
Any
joints
and
really
pays
work much easier than in years past because parts to be quick!y cut from large sheets rather Bulkheads. --- an-d-large p+tions are a good exam-’ -.-. in a fraction of the time formerly needed to make
or of tongue-and-groove
material,
and plywood
is by all means
the latter.
plywood
most, attractive
plywood faced panels, stained down
narrow
made
of paneling
attractive
Assuming
be as plain
the interior
work top, and
of cabinet
plywood makes interior saves labor by permitting
ple, as these cati’be
and
basic household projto be the easiest task in
to sleep four or more
the rest of the interior
a smooth finish, so the time spent in fitting off iiith the satisfaction of a job well done. Waterproof this material
is familiar
methods. In a small craft there are not too many different although there might seem to be a multitude of them the first
doors,
lockers,
carpentry
rhrough
in case these
Even in a hull large enough
few bulkheads finished
of sections
methods,
the builder
tools, having undertaken joinerwork should prove
The joints and finish can with the ability of the builder.
construction
time around.
that
of the boat.
commensurate
The boat joinerwork
it has been assumed
skilled with woodworking this experience, the cabin
the construction desired,
JOINERWORK
will be used,
of these
is a real
with mahogany, or natural, and sandpaper
the finish wood
finish.
Can be of any of several This
can
teak, or other such veneers finished with multiple coats
or bronze
wool
between
coats.
be achieved
basic
types.
by using
a
available in waterproof of varnish, each rubbed Natural
wood
can
also be
f’!TERIOR
finished
with wax-based
can be applied
material,
by hand
with a soaked
afterward.
The
wool and
recoated
until
must
be made
ings,
etc.,
selected. Formica
to match
pensive
the luster
natural
plywood
trim,
like Duraply
such
to cover
the galley
locker
open-
as the plywood
face with
In such cases, the plywood
painted
as mahogany.
can be of less ex-
who has the time.
skill, and
or a combination
of paint
and
finish,
the use of faced
it will save one or more coats t,f paint
Even though
counter
finish
For a painted
because
of the wood.
off soon
with bronze
throughout.
is recommended,
helps kiil the grain
oil liquids
wiped
around
181
the like are best covered
is for the perfectionist
jomts
tung
buffed
species
and
WORh’
being
then
for trim
of the same
is to go with a completely
wood
it is practical
Moldings
shelves,
wood finish.
perfect-fitting
choice
lumber
The
the excess
to dry for a day,
tops, exposed
wood decor
oil varnish.
rag or a brush,
is pleasing.
of solid
as table
oil, or tung
be allowed
the natural
to make
Another
and
should
fir. The natural
patience with
surface
Flats such
tung
JCIA’ER
most of the surfaces
other
flats that
receive
will be painted, hard
wear with
Formica. A third choice is to cover most of the vertical washable vinyl wall coverings and to paint the parts a harmonizing Formir,a
color.
covered
be natural
wood
Still another vertical
Again,
or painted.
surfaces with one of the tough, that are not practical to cover with
the horizontal
surfaces
The
be painted
trim
can
that
take wear to match
and tear should
or contrast,
be
or it can
finish. finish
surfaces,
is to use Formica
either
in colors
as much
or wood
as practical The reader
grains.
on both horizontal and should realize that the
word Formica is a trade name for but one of a number of brands of phenolic finishing materials available. It is a little tricky IO work with until you get used to it, but an attractive
and unusually
with so-called
contact
durable
finish
results.
cement,
which
is applied
The
panels
are adhered
to both surfaces
to clean
plywood
and allowed
to set up
dry to the touch, before the surfaces are joined. Once the two cement-coated surfaces contact each other. they are stuck for good. so they must be carefully positioned. One method
of preventing
of a piece
premature
of brown
paper
contact
the same
is to use what
is known
size as the Formica
part
as a slip sheet,
made
to be cemented.
The
cement-coated surfaces ate allowed to set up dry to finger touch, the slip sheet is laid on the wood while the Formica is lined up perfectly, and then while holding the parts aligned, joined.
the slip sheet
Plywood
is pulled
helps reduce
the weight
in the fortn of furniture specify l,,, ” ( &
over
the thickness :t:,
that hulls; where
can be k ” or t,$ ” depending
from
upon
the surfaces there
tops,
counters,
so the parts
is no sense in installing
over strength.
but if they don’t,
dresser weight
between
of joinerwork;
is needlessly
of the plywood,
U in the larger
t/s ” in any boat
out
The
plans
a general and
minor
can
be
weight
for the boat should
guide
for bulkheads
partitions
need
is
not be
saving
is desired. Shelves in lockers and elsewhere sense, because with the area. Be guided by common
glued and screwed parts, high strength can be achieved with plywood structures. Sometimes in sailboats the mast is stepped on deck and somehow the thrust must be carried to the hull. In some cases the bulkheads in the immediate vicinity of the mast are used for this purpose: When
bulkheads
the pieces must
thus they may
or partitions
be joined.
are larger
The simplest
be heavier than
than
normal.
can be cut from
way is to use a butt
one plywood
strip of plywood
panel,
glued
and
184
INTERIOR
JOINER
WORK
I‘I \\
lJ 0 .li \ F
r 15-l.
Figure
screwed to the buikhead pieces, but this does not look good unless it can be concealed from view. The neatest butt is made with a splint as shown in section A of Figure 15-l. using
a glued
plywood
the rabbets plywood
spline,
accurately
panels
but you must
or have
is to scarph
a mill
them
the woodworking
do it for you.
together,
cutting
circular
Sections bulkheads,
B through E in Figure 15-l show different while F is a vertical section through a galley
shown
Another rails that should
at the base of the counter
good
cleaned
detail
have
been
be about
brought
This
is well worth
is shown
down
is shown
to counter
or even
higher
way to join
two
with an attachment
in Figure
for
4-6.
it takes to construct.
G of Figure
level at their
when
to cut
ways of building corners for or bathroom counter. The toe
Sea rails are used to keep things
1” high,
another
the trouble
in sketch
machinery
15-l.
ends
tg enable
from falling
you want
This shows sea dirt
to be
off counters
to retain
something
and like a
radio.
Where berth against the hull, ing planking. templates.
platforms, shelves, and the edges of bulkheads and partitions lie their edges are curved and must be fitted by a process similar to spilThis
requires
the
use of heavy
In the case of a horizontal
athwartships must
to incorporate
out of corners.
portable
a “Scarffer.”
Still
the scarph
a portable
space
saw called
have
for the most
be held normal
carpenter’s
compass
horizontal
accurate
part, results,
to the centerline must
be held
part + and level when
cardboard
or light
the template
board
while
of the hull.
normal
scribing
the template Similarly,
to the centerline the shape
wood must
board
the points
be held
level
for a bulkhead of dividers
when scribing
for a bulkhead.
for making
points
or a for a
If these procedures
are not followed, the parts will not be correctly shaped, and further fitting will. be required. The bevels for the parts can be taken off at intervals and marked on the template
board.
(See Figure
The
template
board
is cut to the scribed
line and used as a pattern.
15-2.)
Bulkheads
are
often
bulkhead
to a frame
shimmed
to true
located
on
one
side
or
another
of a frame.
Fastening
a
is simple . lun!ess the flame is not plumb vertical, whi.ch is often the case -when the frames are bent rather than sawn. In such cases, the frame must be up the bulkhead.
Thus,
when
framing
a boat,
it pays to be particu-
~?CRlRlkl~ OF
t4017MAL C.L.
FQR
To OF
BOA-l--
TCRI~ING
Figure
15-2.
~HAPC
!?ULIdHHF,rlD
Q-~APE
FotZ
186
INl-ERIGR
JOINER
WoRK
,/CLEAI?AUCE
‘.A FACE
-:
OIUIWCP CAM flC LIFTED -0 CLLAe WEOGE I
l7~~hEC
Figure
between
to have the bulkhead
frames,
be fastened
a strip similar
to the hull.
can be bent
cold
this, you must pliable
IO the inside
either
steam
must
Figure never
have
a device
in interior
of solid
saw a frame edge.
For bulkheads
so that there
and a strip
ones,
is too much
to shape,
(See Figure
located
the bulkhead
round-bottomed
but where
or bend 15-3A.)
can a strip
shape
for
in a strip
The spacing
like this is best placed
many
fastening
holes
putty
if the fastenings
work are set in either Do not expect survive for long
with
where
it
steel
nails
unless can
are nails
set below Plastic
hardware, Although
or chrome-plated
and
they
a berth.
Glue
are
be hidden plugged
the surface
Resin
and
Masonite. at sea. (See Figure 15-3B.)
opening
through
t,$ ” sides,
such as tempered
are screws for the most part.
are counterbored
plated-steel in a boat.
plain
from
section
of the fastenings
Elmer’s
191” for the fronts,
using
or hardboard
them
detail
woodwork
falsely
the
lumber,
of t/t ” plywood
to prevent
joinerwork
e;Ler
and error,
shows a typical
trim,
bronze.
hulls and in some
the wood,
by trial
for a bottom
economize
plywood
be installed
saw cuts on its inside
best made
15-X
Fastenings
must
in the cabin.
are
backs rabbeted They
be as true as possible.
of the planking,
bend
by numerous
be visible
Drawers
frames to a frame
In v-bottomed
of the cuts is determined won’t
0B
IOtd
15-3.
larly careful
made
CcL.‘;T~UCT
Where
hot-dipped
are used,
galvanized.
by the trim.
In
In varnished
6r concealed
of the wood.
or spar
nails
by matching
Plugs
in varnished
varnish.
such as hinges, drawer expensive, the hardware or stainless steel.
pulls,
or lock sets, to
should
be brass
or
INTERIOR
JOINFB
WORK
187
Meta I qril Ia
Loud-e5 JXXX
&tXlfsAT~Oti
Figure 15-4 I
Ventilation Proper
ventilation
of the hull is one of the most important
the long lift of a wooden while
keeping
remembered protected
that
practical
baffle
against
water,
openings
in ceilings
Other
than
the chance
to remove.
and becoming
as illustrated
devices
made
is the cowl ventilator in Chapter
(the hull lining)
and
that will con‘ribute for at all times, trapped.
IG. This
the boat lockers,
after
of molded mounted
will bring
all the be
or a slip, un-
plastic,
etc.,
the
on a box having in air from
it gets inside.
and where
to
(It must
for most of its life at a mooring
patented
developed
bulkheads
There
a
the outmust
be
are watertight,
must be provided with a source of air for ventilation. and cupboards should have vents for passage of air at top and botof the hull,
to dry out before
ventilation and typical door frame Ventilation is also of importance ficult
be provided
the boat
may be kept
not only for the preservation
will have a chance
minimize
of air must
be able to flow through
each compartment Doors to lockers tom,
Passage
from entering
the boat
ventilator
but air must
boat.
water
by a roof.)
most side,
fresh
items
of mildew
they
but also so clothes
mildew.
and stop details in boats built
and musty
odors,
and other
A few suggestions
stowed
gear
for locker
door
are shown in Figure 15-4. of materials other than wood
which
are sometimes
extremely
to dif-
188
INTERIOR
.JOINER
WORK
1 .~-s,c-Jr-cl
S
z--e.!
.---*--
=e
‘c‘
cgp
ce’,
e,--,~+
r- r c--r
03
Figure 15-5.
Ceiling Ceiling is a lining on the inside of the hull that is used to conceal to protect stowed gear from sloshing bilge water. or to strengthen ter purpose, planking.
in larger It is spiled
wedged
tightly
the outside
bevelrd
quarters.
This
two brlow In snlall
boats, the
is painted
upward
ceiling
‘/:1” to ‘4” thick
of a sea. For this purpose
and-groove
can
be used.
strength,
and excessive
fastened
with
In boats
nails
where
Small
thickness
or screws. the shape
Ceiling
This
can be of light
perforated
with
many
where
the
small
In the finest be visible
in the
sole, to an inch or of air.
used for the sake of apside of a bunk,
your
seams
must
should
White
is shown
plywood
fastening,
body,
but
one
the ceiling of the best
gear stowed under berths and in the botbilge water when the boat is heeled down
ceiling
of the topsides
into place, In boats
boat
is sometimes
against
the ceiling
is useless.
they would
are
of the ceil-
left for the circulation
At the outboard
pressing
of the
the strakes edges
and before
at least the cabin
at the top being
if desired.
of frames
where
from
reasons for ceiling m small boats is to protect tom of lockers from being wetted by sloshing in a lump
it. and
the inner
with a wood preservative.
and plugged
the space
be slatted
discomfort
f... ~VZ? requires
For appearance,
or treated
bored
extends
clamp,
light
may
the hull
members, For the lat-
of the thickness
the seams form a vee on the inside.
type of ceiling
and
prevents
so that
40 percent
is usually
fastening.
are counter
the sheer
pearance
when
before
of each strake
I he fastenings
the ceiling
to shape
together
ing are lightly yachts
yachts
structural the hull.
be tight,
be kept
cedar
tongue-
for it adds
or pine is suitable
in Figure
little
and may be
15-5.
will permit
or hardboard.
light,
and thin
it, a sheet-type
ceiling
the latter
either
being
is bent plain
or
holes such as pegboard.
ceiling
is decorative
rather
than
structural-
particularly
in
motorboats-light plywood lining used to hide structures can be painted or covered with vinyl fabric or Formica-type material. The inside of fiberglass hulls, particularly can be covered with carpeting stuck to the forward where hull curvature is greatest, hull
with
materials
an adhesive,
or there
are vinyl with a foam
are “hull
liners”
now
made
for this purpose.
These
backing.
Cabin Sole Cabin hatches
sole is the proper to enable
ready
name
for the flooring
access
to the bilge,
or decking
tanks,
piping,
inside valves,
the hull.
It must
etc. In small
have
boats a
,qy%yg~*p g&~~&;~
~>*“;a
-719
4, <‘,“~>~,f~,L :/. :x, ii ,~, I:
<-,- ; -
I
r-‘%
I
INTERIOR
removable
panel
sure of this, leaking
is usually
is nothing
more
sufficient
frustrating
pieces.
flooring
material
for the sole because
The plywood
can be painted
either
hatch
bindings
the plywood In a sailboat coat of paint.
enough
it is practical
In cabins
and
where
a carpet
properly
shipshape,
and
not
The
sole is the first of the
but make
to get at, say, a Plywood
be fitted in
can
or covered
with vinyl
and stainless
the hatches
steel
too tight,
for
ty adding
A bare
a compound
to the final
teak sole is nonskid:
however,
it
stains.
morning,
should
and
189
bind.
will be used, the sole needs
made of synthetic fibers with boatmen. It is light
carefully planned quately supported
Do not make
a sole nonskid
grease
labor finish,
are aluminum
a hatch
but it is practical.
it will hold
on the feet on a chilly
carpet, popular
There
able
in an emergency.
It savrrc much
to make
to make
It is not pretty,
is very expensive is warm
dangerous
for use with the vinyl coverings. will swell just
not being
for the simplest
in one piece or laid in squares.
WORK
to serve all purposes,
than
sea cock: lack of access can be downright
is an excellent large
on the centerline
for there
JOiNER
only one coat of paint.
but it requires be used
near
cleaning
open
A carpet
with a vacuum
hatchways.
to be
Indoor-outdoor
that will not absorb moisture, has become very enough to be taken up and cleaned on the dock.
interior
joinerwork
ahead to establish the hatch by beams and headers.
to go in the hull. locations.
and
In addition,
it must
it must
be
be ade-
Headliners Headlining like homes
- unheard of until people starred making than boats -- is a covering for the underside
The most popular pose, and hardboards vinyl
headlini
is a vinyl fabric
material
made
just for that pur-
the best ones have an anti-mildew treatment. Other headliner having decorative finishes, acoustical tileboard, and light
or Formica-type
Thermal
*.g material
the insides of boats look more of deck beams and cabin tops. materials are plywood with
covering.
Insulation
Inexpensive, lightweight fiberglass insulation on the underside of decks and cabin tops adds to comfort both summer and winter and whether or not air conditioning is installed in the boat. The easiest kind to use is a type having a thin face of white plastic material on what is meant to be the down side, away from the deck above. It can be cut to fit between cent,
though,
deck beams
is to cover
and stapled
in place.
The
only way to make
it look de-
it over with headlining.
Icebox The
icebox,
construct. much about
which
looks so simple
For this reason,
better off buying one. 4.5 cubic feet, which
when
used,
is very time consuming
if any of the ready-made
boxes suit your
and boat,
difficult
to
you will be
There are several makes on the market with a capacity of amounts to abont 50 pounds of ice. They are all plastic
190
INTERIOR
JOINER
WORK
~t5310td
Figure 15-6.
permits,
also made
When
an icebox
Space
tion of air, and preservative
should
that
but
not
into
I am
a wooden
be left between
Space
to the icebox,
installation,
or stacked.
going
to get
These into
there
are some important
the hull and the box structure
that
is always
boat
will be hidden
limited
the outboard
should
in a boat,
side should
the the
and
to make
dnd
are
batteries, smallest
of
points
to
for the circula-
be treated
be shaped
boxes
with a wood
the most of the
somewhat
to the hull
The section in Figure 15-G is typical of the situation in many boats, and here plywood simplifies the job. Basically the box consists of an inner and outer shell,
with insulation
in between
Make the outside not
for under-counter
side-by-side
part of the hull
or paint.
area allotted
are built
be placed
and shore lines that are needed for even the service conditions can vary so widely.
because
building
remember.
%7X
They
can
refrigerators,
generators,
refrigerators,
form. again
insulation.
two of them
as electric
chargers,
-rkieu
--ICE
and have polyurethane if space
A-A
to obstruct
termediate
and
a watertight
box first, leaving
passage
stiffeners
of air,
liner
inside.
the top off, and brace
it to the hull,
making
sure
as noted above. Add posts in the corners and inand sides to support the inner shell and to take its
on bottom
fastenings. Then coat the inside of the outer box with bitumastic paint and while it is still wet, line the box with tar felt paper laid with overlapping joints. This is a vapor barrier.
The
to fit between
insulation
~- I suggest
the corner
posts and
polyurethane
foam
available
in planks-is
then cut
the stiffeners.
Next make the inner plywood box. As for the drain, it must lead either overboard or, if the bottom of the box is below the waterline, to a sump tank. It is an invitation to rot to drain fresh water into the bilges of a wooden hull. The sump tank can be removable for dumping overboard or piped with a two-way valve to the bilge pump. Of course the drain should be at the low point of the bottom Before
with soidercd, stead,
of the box.
making
even though
to make
the box top,
watertight
cleaning
joints
smoothing easy.
the liner
must
be fitted.
is ideal,
but the inner
the corners
is tedious.
A liner plywood
The
of stainless
steel sheet
can be fiberglassed
final finish should
in-
be smooth
INTERIOR
Whenever when pour
out quickly,
The
finished
fiberglass
is best for the icebox, a front
so will the contents of a built-in
door when
rolling
box is significant.
to 3/g”. In fact,
because
is unavoidable,
191
less cold air is lost but the cold air will
at sea. Limit
you might
WORK
omit
the outside
the inside
of the box to
wooden
box and
on the insulation.
the box with
to separate
Ready-made
Sometimes
the inside
right
Finish
and weight
I,$ U thickness,
tions
a top opening
possible,
the box is opened.
JOINER
food
light
wooden
from
ice.
gratings
in the bottom,
and
fit adjustable
parti-
Woodwork
If you want
to save time
ready-made
parts
made among
as your boatbuilding up by a mail
fornia
that
makes,
other
racks;
grab
rails and
tillers.
I have seen a set of doors made
binocular
things, boxes;
order
project supply
a complete paneled
and
for a Florida
first class. The name of the firm is H & L Marine Street, Compton, California 90221.
nears
house.
completion, There
line of dish, louvered
magazine,
doors; Inc.,
in Caliand book
and gratings
boat manufacturer
Woodwork,
you can use
is an outfit
and
and they were
2965 East Harcourt
Chapter
16
MISCELLANEOUS
There
seem
to be optional
thing. Just remember seaworthy boat. The inspect
boats
coupled
DETAILS
ways, some
of them
good
and
some
that there is no compromise in quality reader is again urged to take advantage
of all types and
with opinions
to study
the details
of the cxpcrienced.
bad,
every-
if one is to produce of every opportunity
of construction.
will soon reveal
for doing
a to
Such observation,
the best way to handle
any
job.
Patterns for Castiqs While
a great
hardware amateur To came jibstay
many
fittings
manufacturers, can save money
a few of the fittings fitting,
gudgeons
and
under
the cabin
peller
shaft
permanent pintles,
that
may
are
backstay
be purchased
usually
light
from
special
for the sailboat,
propeller
cast bronze
Parts usually made of cast material it is seldom that off-the-shelf
struts
aprrturr floors
Cast parts, there
especially
are several
for use underwater, different
alloys.
are usually
ranging
in tensile
of these alloys are not very resistant
to salt water,
put out by some of the marine
makers
192
should
there
casting,
when
tanks
is the rudder
are located
can be homemade,
made
nf manganese
strength
from
pounds per square inch to upwards of 100,000 pounds per square aluminum alloy castings are sometimes used where saving weight paint
of marine
for powerboats include prostruts fit properlyrudders,
and transom platform brackets. Some of the standard fittings but this does not always pay unless you have time to burn. and
the stocks
a few items that are special. Here the and having a foundry pour the castings.
fitting,
and sometimes
floor.
bearing
for boats
there are always by making patterns
and protective be used.
about
inch. Above is important.
finishes
Anodizing
too, bronze, 40,000 water, Some
for aluminum also offers good
MI.SC~~l.I.,-l.~~O~~S IET.-IILS 193
sprrre / w’;“4
PATTEW
Figure
16-1.
protection
if applicable
for sand The
castings
kind
wood
of wood
is Alcoa and
for
molten
hrcausr
metal
expected.
easier.
shrinkages
during
rules
of $“, ‘J,,“, etc., meaTtire
corners
of molding.
thin
tool as shown,
For a small
several taper, better
at good
per foot of length.
making
rubbed
hardware
work,
and
but soft
rule made
using fine
Because
the
by the amount
of
if any amount
of
to make
stores,
at an angle
strength
to each
other
be made
it uniform
and
or with a dowel,
the pattern
of leather
with paraffin
and
the layout
are made
in
for Y,,,fl shrinkage
such
in the castings
and for ease
have proportionately
or varnish is made,
and fastened
wax.
smooth
as boat
fittings,
Knead
with
larger
to smooth you should
a small
rod.
in place
with glue.
the soft wax and work it
a fillet
or with a metal
tool,
which
is simply
Give the finished
a
pattern
it so it will not stick in the molding give the sides of the pattern
called draft, so it may be easily removed from understood by referring to B of Figure 16- 1.
For smali
Any
finish,
sections. (See Figure 16-1A.) Fillets may be purchased from house in wax strips, which are stuck in place with a heated
coats of shellac
Also, when
ovcrsizr
be purchased
A two-foot
have fillets to provide
or they may
steel ball on a handle, sand.
he obtained
peo-
a pencil).
is Y{hn per foot,
rule should
as many already.
on the wood,
than
is made
them
a smooth
is drawn
rather
the pattern
of bronze
job you can get along
the corners,
The fitting
outlined,
all about
it is given
shrinkage
sections
fillets than thicker-walled a pattern-maker’s supply fillet
alloys
249,, “.
on patterns
Large,
wilt know
use a knife
shrinkage can
One of the best aluminum
will be but briefly
provided
cooling,
a two-foot
Such
will actually Inside
for patterns
it is easy to work.
The
work is to be done, work
processes experience
(pattern-makers
will shrink
fittings.
35.
metalworking
accuracy
shrinkage
Almag
and casting
may hc used
pine is prcfrrred lines
to the alloy of your
pattern-making
ple with
into
FILLET-5
the mold
p!atform
called
by the molder. a molding
a slight This
board
is
will
194
MISCEl,l~,~NEOL'S
Figure
16-2.
LXI~AI%.S
‘l’hv /)cl/lrr,r, con’, nnd mold Ibr u .5inl~~l~~ hollouf rrtsling.
be usrd. and on it will be placed a box without ends to retain mold. The finished
the sand used for the
mold consists of two boxes one upon the other, called the cope and
the drag, and togrther
the assembly
is called a flask. Dowel pins on the cope fit into
sockets on the drag and keep the two in alignment. and covered with sand of such a nature the drag is then turnrd
The pattern
that when packed
is placed in the drag
hard it will stick together:
over. With the pattern still in the mold, the surface of the sand
is coated with a powder so that when more sand is added,
the two surfaces will part.
Then the rope is added, tilled with sand, and rammed solid. The cope is lifted off and turned over, and the sprite, a passage for pouring the molten
metal,
vent holes to carry off gases arc cut with molder’s tools. The pattern the drag, leaving
a space to be filled with metal.
A flat pattern
as shown in Figure
with a complicated unless the pattern cope is replaced The molding
and some small is removed from
shape,
is more
16-1 is easy to remove, difficult
sides have proper draft. for the simple
breaking
the sand
The casting is ready to be poured when the
on the drag. The sprue is cut off the finished procedure
but a deeper one, or one
to take uut without
block pattern
casting by the foundry.
in Figure
16-1B is easy, but a
study of the mold shown in Figure 16-2 will indicate that to produce a casting shaped like the pattern, the pattern would have to be split along the centerline. Further. if the cpsting is to have a hollow portion,
the hollow area must be kept free of molten metal;
this is done with a core of sand shaped like the desired hollow. A simple core as shown is made by ramming
sand into an open-top
box until full and then baking the sand to
MISC’EI-L.A.VEC’L’S !?ET.d!LS make
it hard and strong
enough
to withstand
the pouring
of the lead.
regular
shape are molded in a split box with dowel pins. In the pattern,
tended
beyond the length
of the casting
so the imprint
!95
Cores of irthe core is ex-
of the core extension
in the
mold will support the core. This is shown in the figure. The core print, as it is called, is painted black so the molder will understand the core. When the casting has cooled and been taken from the mold,
Ballast The
the core is easily broken out.
Keel
ballast
keel casting
for sailboats
will be of cast iron or lead and will be bolted
either through the keel or through both the keel and floors, as preferred by the architect. Bolts will be shown on the plans and are the largest -diameter fastenings used in the construction
of the boat. They are made of rods threaded
on both ends for nuts,
and on the inside of the boat are set up on heavy washers under which are grommets consisting
of a few turns of cotton wicking soaked in red lead. Tobin
bolts are used to hold lead keels, while good galvanized
wrought
bronze or Everdur iron or Monei bolts
are used when the keel is cast iron. Because
of the weight of the metals --~450 pounds per cubic
710 for lead -~ the size and location designer made
and just as carefully
of the ballast
reproduced
must be carefully
by the builder.
from the mold loft lines and, as noted earlier,
shrinkage
rule. Shrinkage
foot for cast iron and
of lead and iron castings
Templates
figured
by the
for the keel are
the keel pattern
is made with a
is VH”per foot.
The boatbuilder can make the pattern for a cast iron ballast keel. but the casting must be done by an iron foundry becauve of the high temperatures required. On the other
hand,
for a lead keel,
the amateur
or professional
boatbuilder
can make the
mold clrttl pour the casting.
Cast Iron When
Keel
the keel is iron,
(Figure
the pattern
is made
work, and in either case the sections should pattern
of soft pine, and for a rectangular
16-t3A) the job is quite simple. For a more shapely keel the pattern nears the finished
shape.
be constantly
The pattern
checked
for accuracy
with model building
can see that the “bread and butter”
tion may be used here by drawing waterlines thickness
as the
for a shaped keel is made of layers of
pine anywhere from 1” to 2” thick that are screw fastened and glued together. familiar
keel
entails more
through
Those
method of construc-
the keel, spaced the same as the
of wood used, and sawing each layer roughly to shape bcforc
fastening
them
together. The holes for bolts through the cores in relation
an iron keel are cored,
to the bolt spacing,
core in the bottom of the keel is enlarged
and care must be taken to locate
always taking shrinkage in diameter
into account.
l’he
to take the nut, allowing enough
depth to cement over the nut to close the hole in the casting. A core box is made only for the longest core needed, as the molder can break cores off to proper length for the shorter
ones. When required,
The iron casting should,
a centerboard
slot is also cored.
if possible, be given a coat or two of red lead before it starts
(,“A
“~1
I
I
196
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
_5ECT:Sh; -I-HRL’ OWhi w5” VOLT ~A-3E
LEAF l-H
-SE',-:?I,b b
---TU6
4 c2A-r mbn5rEE
&EL
EL
‘..:,?lf -
3._
_ i,
‘T--!=‘Ft? *EEL E+,-fj\ES-,FJP Ah’ ATEJrZ
.5--e”
ker
v13c~
-LEADkiEiz ----.-__-
Figure 16-3. AH irm kvcl must h sand-cast in aloundry, cnn hc ccrst I’)) N mold nt /kc Suilding site. to rust. L.atrr on it can be finished
-EL
while a had keel
by applying coats of trowel cement
and sanding it
smooth.
Lead
Keel
When a willing foundry is within a reasonable a male pattern
for a sand-cast
distance.
boatbuilders
sometimes
make
lead keel and let the foundry make the mold and pour
the casting. Making the pattern is a relatively easy job as compared to making the sand mold at the boat shop. One firm named Keel Makers solicits this business, either for one-off or production
castings.
Keel Makers can be contacted
at 101 New Bern Street,
MISCELLANEOUS Charlotte, 11746.
North
Carolina
Of course,
Accuracy
28203,
or at 43 Old Brook
if you have a local foundry
is particularly
important
0.26
pound per cubic
A rectangular necessary.
Dix Hills, New York
patterns
for lead castings.
As a comparison,
Each
cast iron weighs about
inch.
lead keel mold is quite simple
made with planks,
197
that will do the job you are in luck.
when making
cubic inch of lead weighs about 0.41 pound.
Road,
DETAILS
to make (Figure
with either wood or plaster
It must be remembered
16-3B),
as it can be
fillets used to shape the corners when
that the keel will be heavy,
and this requires
that
the mold be strong so that it will not break apart when the lead is poured and that the mold be supported
by husky braces and shores.
dry before starting,
The inside of the mold is given a thin
The plaster and the mold must be perfectly
coat of plaster to prevent it from burning. as the lead will spatter
if poured into a wet mold and workmen
may be burned. Making the mold for a shaped lead keel (Figure reason
to have the keel sand-cast
in a foundry.
16-3C) is quite a task and is a good As shown in the section,
forms are
made to the outside of the keel, plus the thickness of the mold, at stations and half stations. They are then set up rigidly (Figure 16-3D) and the mold is strip-built inside of the forms. As the strips are fitted they are edge nailed to each other and to the forms. The inside is finished to a set of templates representing the finished keel plus an allowance for shrinkage. Gouges and round-bottomed planes are used for this work. The casting will reflect Lead,
fortunately,
iron melting
the degree of smoothness
has a low melting
pot, supported
point,
of your mold.
but at the least, you will need a large
by bricks so a roaring
wood or charcoal
fire can be built
under it, and several ;ron ladles. Better still is a melting pot with a pouring spigot or pipe leading over the mold and a metal trough to distribute the molten metal over the length of the keel. The top of the open mold must be level. A centerboard taken care of by a plank of proper thickness must be on hand to allow for discrepancies, mold before pouring.
to act as a core.
slot can be
More than enough lead
and some of the pigs may be placed in the
Several hands will be needed,
because
the pouring must be car-
ried on to completion before the top of the lead already in the mold starts to solidify. Start to pour when the lead in the pot is hot, distribute it in the mold, skim the slag from the top, and puddle the molten lead to prevent the formation
of air pockets. Add
pigs to the pot as you pour, and they will quickly melt in the hot lead if the fire is kept blazing. Allow at least a day for the casting to cool before removing the mold. The top surface
of the lead casting
can be smoothed
holes for the keel bolts are drilled
with a woodworking
with a barefoot
wood auger
hand plane.
The
or with a twist drill
lengthened by welding a rod to the end, preferably used in an electric drill of ample capacity. Eirhk r drill must be frequently withdrawn to clear the lead shavings, and kerosene
is used as a lubricant.
Where
necessary,
the outside of the keel is smoothed
with coats of trowel cement, and the cement is then sanded. The keel casting is liberally coated with thick white or red lead where it fits against keel and deadwood.
Standing
Rigging
Chainplates
Unless masts are designed to be free-standing, from breaking by wire rope standing rigging.
they are kept straight and prevented The mast loads are transmitted to the
198
MISCEI.I.ANEOlJS
DETAILS
hull by straps called chainplates. and the designer chainplates
The chainplates
should show on the construction
along with the size and number
It is a simple matter
to calculate
to the hull can be insufficient. the planking
Blocks of this type eliminate Inside chainplates
the necessity
the chainplates
it is better to bolt them to backing the clamp.
of cutting
frames
(See Figure
16-4A.)
with fastenings,
which
as on the outside they will show unless neatly
and the metal may bleed and discolor the topside paint. metals
steel for both plates and bolts, because
such
2s
bronze,
due to corrosion,
Monel.
boat chainplates
peculiar
to various
It
or Type 316 stainless
there have been many cases of
torn out under stress. This may result in a broken mast. There
types of small
are bolted
at that point.
is best to use corrosion-resistant chainplates
However,
are to be preferred,
let flush into the planking,
of the
and are located either on the outside of the plank-
that are cut to bear against
weakens the hull somewhat
and details
of fastenings.
of the shroud. Sometimes
and a frame
frames
to the task,
The area of the wood in the hull against which the bolts
ing or between the planking and a frame. blocks between
plan locations
equal
the strength of the metal parts, but their fastenings
bear must be equal to the strength through
must be designed
classes,
are several
and these are shown in
detail on the plans for the boats. Referring to chainplates in general, the end of the lug extending above deck should have only slightly rounded edges so as not to reduce strength
unnecessarily.
compound
To stop leaks, the hole through
or fitted with a metal
collar
Sailing yachts of the more expensive are fitted with a rectangular bronze which lugs for the shroud turnbuckles trnding
type with a waterline
length upwards of 28 fret
plate between the frames and the planking to are bolted or riveted. Diagonal metal straps ex-
to the keel are riveted to the plate and screwed to each frame crossed and the
keel. This
arrangement.
shown in Figure
large area and prevents the distortion sheerline
of old wooden
16-4B,
boats.
The planking for the straps as each strake is fitted.
Wooden
Spars
Most modern
sailboats
than
alloy extrusions.
There
often noticed in the
the frames
is carefully
are several manufacturers
spars that make them up ready for installation
wood is still extensively Wooden
rather
the rigging loads over a
hogging,
have spars that are hollow, and there has been a definite
the use of aluminum
aluminum
distributes
of the hull. called
notched
toward
the deck should be filled with
set in compound.
in the boat.
trend of
Despite this,
used for hollow spars.
spars are preferably
made of mast-grade
clear Sitka spruce because
it is a
light, strong wood. Clear fir and pine run rather far behind as second choice. Inasmuch as a mast is a column, the maximum sectional area is required at midlength of the longest
unsupported
panel,
so to further
save weight
aloft,
the mast is tapered
from the point of greatest cross-sectional area to the head and sometimes to the heel as well. The edges on which sails are set, the top of the boom and the aft side of the mast, are made straight
so the sails will set as they should.
When using modern waterproof glue, fastenings in spars are not required or even desirable, as they add weight up high where it is detrimental to the stability of the
LUG5 eeur 7-C AbdiLE OF 5i+F2ouD
PLATE FOR5hl,ALi3\3AT5 __.
?ET41-
\
1 ’
\
RAtiGc;Lcs
--
I~j+J$\LN ~ --=Y i.+ I hl&T ‘,,’ ------=i=i= 1,‘1 ,,lPA ‘1,+ __ ‘7. ‘:, - _, __A&z f-i--/*ji& “6 ‘w.8_1 -_,_-_-_I--
B
_r ,_“, _._ ._--CHAlhi
5’3R
0
FL
ATE5
h;?lCf=%??$;,;-;‘i$.IC5E
T
I;igu rc 164. hoat. As a matter
of fact, hollow glued spars were in use years before truly watrrproof
glue was known.
water-resistant
varnish
to protect
long lengths,
the joints
and the majority
the range of available scarphed
lengths.
Sitka spruce,
of amateur-built When joining
fortunately.
feather-edged
patience joint
is required.
the individual
in
Theoretically
pieces are
10 times the thickness of
as well as sharp tools are needed
of this type.
with coats of is available
boats will have spars that fall within
on the flat, the length of the joint being made about
the piece. Considerable fitting
casein glue being relied upon together
from moisture.
to make a perfectly
a glued joint
is as strong
or
200
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
&fj~@!!!Jz?$kQ
+-/so GLUEC
L.&x’
S-‘A~PH MA-X-
OR
0CWt-4
O’.‘A.-
SECT!,?klS
‘d AST
I soL~ca=2
@
n
5%7A-i
T;:
@J
B2A-r
-Qd’-
~~O!vlS
Horn
9ECE
5!+R-3
Figure
Qe,cdTgw,GH;pEm
Q-l=-
Ci-EP
?i%?
ROUT-R
mEct& BOLT
EP!=?Z SF
5,+ii
16-S.
stronger than the wood, so that splices could be adjacent
to each other, but inasmuch
as a glued joint will be locally stiffer than the adjoining unjointed pieces, it is best to stagger the scarphs as much as possible. Figure 16-5 shows a scarph and typical hollow spar sections
in use today.
The simplest forta.antl-aft
mast IO make is a hollow, rectangular
pircrs
rabhetrd.
is prcfcrrcd
box spar. This section,
by some builders
with the
because it is easier to con-
1101 skidding of the glued surtaces. The section next in simplicity is the round spar made of hollowed-out halves. The larger spars, both the oval section and ,he round srction made of staves, are the most difficult
to make and would be quite a job for the
amateur. Of the two, the oval is the easier in the smaller sizes, as it consists of two round halves and two tapered side pieces. The wall thickness of oval and round spars is always tapered
in the interest of weight saving.
Some of the sailboat
classes
use a solid mast
boltrope on the luft ot the mainsail.
with a groove
routed
out for the
This groove can be made by first making a saw cut
with a circular saw and then routing out the groove in the saw cut, using a very highspetbd cutter with a shank narrower than the saw cut. (Sue Figure 16-5.) To make a boltrope
groove in a hollow spar made up of two rounded
gouged or machine l’hc
T-boom
tangular
Hollow
halves, the groove is hand
routed on each half before the sections
is used on smaller
sailboats.
which
are glued together.
also sometimes
have solid rec-
booms.
Rectangular
Probably machine maximum
Spars
the easiest way for an amateur
to make a box spar. unless he has extensive
tools, is to order the spar material section
of the spar.
dressing up and finishing there is nothing
dressed four sides to the dimensions
It is desirable
to add a slight thickness,
after the spar has been glued.
to do but taper
the pieces in accordance
plans. This is done by laying off the width at the spacing spar, fairing the lines. The
the shape with a long batten, width layout for the forward
say
With such material with the architect’s
at the
&“,
for
at hand detail
shown on the plan for the
and then sawing and planing
the edges to
and aft pieces is done from a centerline
MISCELLANEOUS because
both edges are shaped.
and made at the same time. joint
with 100 percent
Duplicate
sides may be temporarily
Be sure to keep the edges square,
surface
contact
cannot
a makeshift
a series of short boards horizontally
ground to support the outer ends. (See Figure side of the spar that is to be straight,
nailed together
or else a perfect glued
spar bench may be devised
to a wall or fence, 16-6A.)
at the same height, or the top edges shimmed
201
be made.
When only one or two spars are to be made, by nailing
DETAILS
with legs down to the
All supports should be level and
to be so, as upon them will be placed the
that is, the aft side of the mast or the top side of
the boom. Shellac
the inside of spars, taking care not to coat the surfaces
Use a marking pieces
gauge
and shellac
elsewhere
to scribe
between
as called
that will be glued.
the width of the side pieces on the forward and aft
the lines. The
filler
for by the plans are fitted
pieces at the ends of the spar and
and shellac
is also omitted
in way of
these. Because solid filler blocks have been known to swell and either split the spar or cause poorly glued joints
to open up, some prefer
the pad-type
fillers glued to the in-
side before assembly as shown in sketch B, Figure 16-6. A long solid filler fitted at the heel of the mast is bound to locally stiffen the mast due to the sudden increase in sectional area. The late Phil Rhodes, one of the great yacht designers, insisted upon a block cut as shown in Figure 16-6C to avoid this situation and also advised running saw cuts longitudinally on the block to allow for expansion. Provide drain holes in all solid fillers cxcrpt the one at the masthead, so moisture will not collect and start rot. When everything paying partirular
is ready. mix the glue strictly
attention
to those regarding
in accordance
temperature
ing. Once the glue is mixed,
spread it quickly
sure there are enough clamps
at hand: it is surprising
with the instructions,
and working life after mix-
and thoroughly.
Before
gluing make
how many are needed,
as there
should bc one every few inches or so to apply the pressure required for the glue, particularly resorcinol. Although Figure 16-6a shows a boom that is larger than any that the average amateur would attempt. it is a good illustratiorr of the number of clamps used bv a builder to ensure a perfect job. Ail kinds of clamps may be utilized if their openings clamp
are sufficiently
pads to distribute
insufficient, joined
wide to clamp
you can make satisfactory
together
the spar plus pieces of scrap used under the
pressure and prevent scars.
If the number
spar clamps
at the ends with bolts of at least
of your clamps is
of two husky pieces of oak or ash 92 n diameter.
(Set
sketch,
Figure
16-6D.) The clamps should not be removed for at least 24 hours to allow the glue to develop full strength. corners, paper.
Finish the spar by scraping
and then sand all sides smooth, If a varnish
finished
finish is wanted
the excess glue from the seams, gradually
Sitka spruce
working
has a beautiful
clear - apply at least four or five coats, carefully
round the
down to fine abrasive appearance
when
sanding off the gloss between
coats.
Round Even (Figure
Hollow though
Spars
a boat
may have a rectangular
16-6G) will be round,
mast
made in symmetrical
and boom,
the spinnaker
halves around
a centerline.
pole First,
202
MISCELLANEOUS
Figure
DETAILS
16-6a.
get out two pieces of stock that will be square when clamped of the pole in the middle.
surfaces
of the
material;
then lay out the inside of the pole, that is. the part to be hollowed.
Make
hollowing templates,
Figure 16-6E,
Mark centerlines
together and equal to the
diameter
on the mating
for points every two feet or so apart and constantly
use them to check as the wood is cut away. The templates
control
the wall thickness of
the finished spar and guard against ending up with walls that are too thin or not uniform in thickness. The hollow portion is ended in a quick taper, as shown on the sketch,
so that pole end fittings will be attached
When the halves have been glued together, and then the square
assembly is tapered.
to solid wood.
the spar must be laid out on the outside,
The walls will then be of equal thickness
all
along the spar’s centerline. The next step is to cut the corners off the square and make it eight-sided. This is done by drawing guide lines as done in Figure 16-6F. The following description
is an example
of how the guide lines might
along the length of the tapered assembly,
be laid out. At any point
the end of a rule is placed even with one cor-
ner, and the rule is pivoted until the 12” mark lines up with the opposite corner. Points are made on the wood at the 3t$$ 0 and 8rh H marks on the rule. This is repeated at every foot and a batten
is run through
he varied to suit differences
the points to draw a line. These figures should
in the diameter
of the spar, because for ease of layout, the
rule should be almost square across the spar. The ratio of 12-814-3% can be reduced or enlarged to suit any size of spar. For smaller spars of, say, 5 d diameter, the figures can be halved. Therefore,
the end of the rule is held on one corner of the spar, and the
6” mark on the other, with points made at the 1% Nand 4 !LaII marks. When guide lines have been drawn on all four sides, it is a simple matter to make the spar eight-sided with a drawknife
and plane and to then round it off to be finished by sanding.
I ------
_____
Y-7
PVR ub.l~~~PhI WALL THIC~A?SS USe: A TEMPL’ICITiZ WCRY -l-WC feey OR so vd-E*i ROUhD SCCTICUS
--------____ ----------
-
HOLLONJIW ,
I
SPIt4kJAdiR
~.-
C
Ou~WR4lGHT~Td~.
Sl-RhlOHT
AFTsIDC OF COOUS SIIXD
I
FVLE
% ~ __ em+ Of Ak.JO -IDIdhSl-5 ARE W?ZA’GHr3
1
Fl?CWl
LdE5 MA-We\
XAWicl 0t.l AL -‘V CUT
SICSC,
rwh
-!-AWLCC I,- e @MT-
ROUND
Chamfer ~orndr5 droc moisture
LL *T k!EcJw&qOhl
Figure
16-6.
Sbar-mak,‘rzg
drfails.
THRO
IM-
204
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
A round mast for a marconi making
sail will be straight
on the aft side but the method
of
it is the same.
Rigging
Atmchnents
for Wooden
Spars
Not too many years ago almost all masts were round and the upper ends of the standing rigging location
were spliced
in a loop, dropped
and held in position by shoulder
the marconi
rig and the systems of stays for supporting
manufacturers
logical
It has more strength
rigging
therefore
oval or rectangular
it came taller masts, and the a rope consisting
than any other rope of the same diameter
for looping around
section.
of of a
wires twisted around it. This is known as 1 to 19 con-
to use to reduce windage.
not suitable
to the desired
With the introduction
of wire rope started to make what is called strand,
single wire core with eighteen struction.
down over the masthead
cleats on the mast.
Consequently,
It is very stiff and difficult a mast, particularly spliced rigging
and is the
to splice and is
one with an elongated
has practically
disappeared
and the ends of the wire rope are fitted with swaged stainless steel terminals,
which are
attached to the mast by means of tangs. Most tangs are made of strong sheet metal, like Everdur, Monel, or stainless steel, and are held to the mast by one bdt and a number
of wood screws calculated
to take the outward
ponents of the stay. It is the job of the naval architect light and strong,
and each tang is usually carefully
and downward
stress com-
to design tangs that arc both
detailed
for the job to be done.
The tangs can be made by a machine shop or a rigging specialist, or the enterprising amateur can tackle the sheet metal work by fitting his bandsaw with a metal cutting blade.
Besides making
the tangs exactly
according
to plan,
the builder must drill the
holes for the tang fastenings with care. Loose holes will permit the tangs to slip, possibly overloading a few of the fastenings instead of letting all of the fastenings do their share of the job. and mizzen masts
Figure
of a ketch.
16-7 shows tangs for double These
particular
tangs
made, with tube bolts used to save weight. Straps encircling heels of the spreaders Fore-and-aft
lower shrouds on the main
are strong,
simple,
and well
the mast with clips for the
are found a few inches above the tang bolts.
bolts for tangs have nuts on the aft side of the mast that would inter-
fere with the sail track if it were laid directly on the mast’s aft face. To get around this, the sail track can be laid on a batten the nuts. Battens
are also sometimes
binding due to contact through the batten as at the extreme through-fastenings
that has been glued to the mast and cut away for desirable
on booms
to prevent sail slides from
with the boom at their edges. The screws for the sail track go
and imo the wall of the spar. At certain ends of a track and at reefed positions rather
points of extra strain, of the mainsail
such
headboard,
than screws should be used.
Mast Step The compressive
load from the mast is taken by the mast step, which is of some hard-
wood like oak. The step is given a length of several frame spaces to distribute
the load
over the hull, and in boats of any size it is placed in notches in the floors after first having been notched itself. When carefully done, the resulting joint at each floor will pre-
MISCELLANEOUS
Figure
drain
205
16-7.
vent movement floors,
DETAILS
Figure
of the step in any direction, 16.4C.
hole drilled
The
mortise
and in addition,
it is drift bolted to the
in the step to take the mast tenon should have a
at the low point so that water will not collect
typical step is shown in Figure
ltj-4B.
and rot the step. A
but like many other boat details,
there are other
types of steps, particularly in small craft, and details will be found on the plans. Masts are sometimes stepped on deck or on the cabin roof. The thrust load is then carried ample
down to the hull by a stanchion
or by strategically
located joiner
bulkheads
of
strength.
Aluminum
Alloy
Spars
The plans for the boat you are building will probably call out the specifications for the parts if the spars are to be made of aluminum alloy. There is now a large choice of sizes of extruded sections for masts, booms, spinnaker poles, and the like. and also a large choice of fittings to complete the rig and make it work. Sailboat rigging is a business of its own and is best left to the experts if you do not have the details of what you need. There
are ads in the sailing magazines
for many spar suppliers and sailmakers
help with your problems
if you have decided
known firms are Kenyon
Marine,
to use aluminum
New Whitfield
Street,
ready to
spars. Among the best-
Guilford.
Connecticut
06437;
206
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
Figure Schaefer
Spars,
Sailmakers,
Industrial
Inc.,
16-8.
Park, New Bedford,
100 S. W. 15th Street,
Figure 16-8 is a section through
Vertical
Fort Lauderdale,
an extrusion
for the sail and a groove for the boltrope in Figure
Massachusetts
02745; Florida
for a mast.
and Mack-Shaw 33315.
In this design there is a slot
of the sail similar
to the wooden mast section
16-5. Tie
Rod
The forces from the thrust of the mast and the upward pull of the rigging tend to collapse the hull, so that in moderate-size step and mast partner
boats it is well to fit a tie rod between the mast
as shown in Figure
16.4B.
The rod is threaded
on both ends for
nuts which are set up over washers. Just take up the nuts snugly when installing
them,
as there is no need to try to putt the deck and step together.
Types
of Rudders
A rudder
consists
transmitted powerboat
of a wood or metal
to the blade and around rudders,
The location
it is attached
blade
which it pivots.
waterline,
or it is hung outboard
balanced,
with all the blade area abaft
force required
Powerboat Modern
meaning
on the transom.
which
for common
force
is
types of
called gudgeons and pintles.
forward of the after end of the
Further,
the rudder is either
the stock or pivot point,
of the area forward of the stock.
to turn the rudder
through
Except
to the hull by hangers
of the rudder is eithtir inboard,
anced, with a percentage
and a stock
un-
or it is partly bal-
In the case of the latter the
is reduced.
Rudders powerboat
rudders
are
now almost
invariably
made
of metal,
formerly they were often of wood. They are sometimes
of galvanized
into a split stock through
The
blade of cast manganese
which the blade
is riveted.
although
sheet steel, fitting
most common
type has a
bronze bossed for a rolled bronze or None1 stock that is in-
serted in the head of the rudder.
This is a more durable
blade than a steel one. Figure
MISCELLANEOIJS
DETAILS
207
C-i?’ 3?‘=\ZE 23 ;-A-5 572, j j I 5 .d:;:t ;
?>,
I I i
-p<
1
0A
v(
i
I* -5xE‘j
I\ . \ ‘;cyy:gL,l L
- f3ne ., LsEetEr F-ZCK c -v +=l , ‘\ 4 yt;r-,“yfg0a I\L,: e,rtEEL 16-9A shows this type of rudder supported
Figure
16-9.
at the top by the rudder port, a stuffing box
to prevent leaks where the stock enters the hull, and at the bottom by a pintle riding in a hole in a metal skeg. A spade-type the same
manner.
rudder is sketched
but is not supported
in Figure
at the bottom
16-9B and is made in
and is more
liable
to catch
lobster pot buoys and the like. It is a clean design and results from an effort to reduce underwater
resistance
the bottom
of the rudder.
each of the propellers sketched
Small
by cutting
and gives excellent
may be purchased
Sailboat
away the deadwood,
so there is no way of supporting
On twin screw boats a spade-type in 4 number
steering
qualities.
rudder
behind
of sizes.
Rudders
Small centerboard
sailboats
have an outboard
rudder as shown in Figure 16-10A.
blade may be of one or more pieces, depending case it should be doweled with galvanized the grain direction
upon available
of the wood should be alternated
The blade area below the surface
on the sections in the sketch, with the maximum
of the water is streamlined thickness
cent of the blade width aft of the leading edge of the rudder. and pintles as seen in any marine disengaged
The
but in any
warping,
and
from piece to piece for the same
dicated
may float up and become
material,
iron or brass rod to prevent
reason.
ety of gudgeons
is used
The two types of rudders
hardware
in shape, as in-
being about 25 per-
When the common vari-
catalog
is used, the rudder
from the boat, leaving the skipper with a tiller in
hand but no control over rhe boat. To prevent
this, the rudder may be weighted with
an insert of lead heavy enough to offset the buoyancy of the blade, or the upper pintle can be drilled for a cotter pin just below the gudgeon. The tiller is fixed, or preferably made to hinge so it can be raised when tacking. In shoal
water localities
the small
boat
outboard
rudder
is often
made
with a
208
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
FtlnxlER PWl-l-E RUDDER
0
HEAD
.
F
,,---
7lLLClC FlrnuG
au
,P~vioTit.lG
RUDDEI~
b3JDDER
16-10. Small sailboat rudders
Figure
‘5LllJlhll3’
A t=Ed 5TAtJDAc2C’
TZALL OAROE(L
FITTINGS
and fittings.
pivoting blade so that it may be raised to clear obstructions. (See Figure 16.10B.) This is done by pivoting the blade between long cheek pieces riveted securely to a filler of the same thickness buoyancy
as the blade.
A lead insert is needed to prevent it from rising due to
or the forward motion
while sailing
of the boat.
A light line is used to raise the rudder
over shoal areas.
Some of the standard fittings available from marine stores are sketched in Figure 16- 1OC. Besides these, several of the marine hardware manufacturers make sets of fittings for small outboard rudders that prevent the rudder from coming off, yet leave the rudder readily removable from the transom. Rudder fittings should be bolted rather
than screwed to the transom.
Large
Sailboat
Figure 16-11A enough
Rudders shows the rudder for a keel sailboat
to take a few bolts through
in which the stock is run down far
the piece of blade next to it. A strap is fitted as
shown at the end of the stock to prevent it from bending the blade gudgeon
when
the rudder
are fitted
from pressure of water against
is turned. At the bottom of the rudder a pintle Unfortunately, the variety of rudder shapes
for support.
and and
thicknesses is so great that stock fittings are not available and patterns must be made for castings. These fittings are usually detailed by the architect with enough dimensions so that,
together
with templates
made on the hull and rudder,
terns can be turned out for the use of the foundry. nonferrous tough,
metals
for rudder
strong Tobin
good grade manganese square inch.
fittings.
bronze or Everdur
It is inadvisable
One of the best materials shafting,
the necessary patto use anything
but
for rudder stocks is
while the cast parts should be of a
bronze with tensile strength
Do not skimp on the quality of fittings,
of not less than 60,000 because
pounds per
the rudder is important.
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
209
EC’ Figure
16-11.
Larger
rudders mus! be made of pieces that are doweled or drift bolted together
indicated
as
by the plans. The size of dowels and bolts should be shown by the designer
and may be decreased
in diameter
near the trailing
so the wood will not be weakened one another
or the pieces cannot
the middle
edge, where the blade is thinner,
by the fastenings. bc joined together,
of the blade to prevent
their coming
Dowel holes must be parallel and all fastenings
through
they lock the pieces together.
edge have a slot cut far enough piece of wood is inserted
to each other,
and when
Drifts driven from the trailing
in from the edge so the head will be hidden,
to fill the slot. The enlarged
how the blade is tapered.
must be kept in
when the blade is tapered.
Drift bolts used in heavier rudders do nut have to be parallel driven at varying angles,
to
section in Figure
and then a
16-11A shows
It may be seen that the amount of work required
to make a
rudder should not be underestimated. If the builder
is fortunate
be saved by planing tapering
in adjacent
of the sternpost with a minimum is sheathed sheathing
enough piece
to have a thickness
to its thickness
is done with plane and spokeshave.
alternated
painting,
each
planer,
some hand labor can
at the forward
edge.
of disturbance.
As mentioned
all
The sketch also shows how the grain is
pieces to prevent or minimize
warping,
and how the after edge
is hollowed out so water will flow past the deadwood in Chapter
onto the rudder
8, the edge of the sternpost
1/?” thick for protection from worms and to eliminate which is practically impossible without unshipping the rudder. The is carried around the sides by an inch or so and secured with copper tacks.
The forward
with copper
Otherwise
about
edge of the rudder
blade begins aft of the center of the stock so that the
rudder can be turned hard over without fouling the sternpost. With the rudder arranged as shown in Figure 16-11 A, water is kept out of the hull by screwing a threaded brass or bronze pipe into a hole drilled in the horn timber.
The hole must be just the
right amount smaller than the pipe so the threads will take hold, and it must be drilled at the correct angle. The best way to start the hole is to cut through a block (shown dotted in the figure) having its face at right angles fcJ the center of the stock. This can be laid out from your mold loft drawings and a drilling that the hole is drilled at the proper angle.
guide can be devised to ensure
RuDDEP AL/V -
Foe
IL4AW
210
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
.nEz~ STAGGEPED
FLUS-
B;*zEym iv)& -42’ BeorJZE A0OuT
3“ W’I CE
TL?AILiNG
B
0
l-E ,=?I?“.\ m.
Fi,gure
Rudders
(Figure
AFT
-.
!=L?R CPA\\ ---.-
IUEf ._.. ----
Sailboats
cut in the deadwood
16- 11 B). The aperture
such that the propeller the aperture
hiJLC
is fitted with an engine
be a hole or aperture
ATE
PL
16-12.
for Auxiliary
When a sailboat
\l
EC’GE
SHEATHING --
and the shaft is on the centerline,
there must
and rudder in which the propeller
should not be larger than necessary,
blades will not strike the rudder
can turn
but its size must be
when revolving.
The edge of
can be checked on the mold loft floor by setting up a semicircular
the same diameter
as the propeller
on the propeller
piece of thin plywood or heavy cardboard
centerline,
on the centerline
disc of
and then hinging
of the rudder.
a
The aper-
ture is cut away by trial until the “rudder” can bc swung 40 degrees off center and still clear the propeller blades. (See sketch, Figure 16-12.) It is not sufficient to end the rudder stock at the top of the aperture: it must either partly surround the opening as shown in Figure 16-11B. or completely encircle it as shown in Figure complete
long pattern machining
16.1lC.
Sometimes
the latter
method
is carried
stock in one piece from upper end to the pintle is needed, is required
the casting to finish
is not the easiest
the job.
A shorter
to make,
casting
out by casting
below the aperture, and quite
around
the
but a a lot of
the aperture,
as
shown, is hard to beat for strength, and except for filing rough spots from the casting, the only machinin, = needed is to taper, bore, and keyway the upper end for the stock, drill holes in the blade straps, and turn a pintle or b arc for an inserted pintle on the lower end. The blade straps shown are cut from flat bronze and secured with counter-
‘! /fl b >; :
MISCELLANEOUS
Figure
the apertui’e casting,
tapered
ing off the two-piece
split gudgeon
disengage
pintle
the bottom
adapted,
and the stock and lifting
from the heel gudgeon.
This will very likely be a special job,
A stuffing
tiller fitting,
to
box is shown on the fittings be
The upper end of the stock
or in larger
boats for a wheel
There are several varieties of each of these items made by the marine hardware
manufacturers. An expensive and by no means necessary the trailing Thk
a cleep hole by ;ak-
the rur’der enough
as seldom can star.dard
due to the angle between stock and horn timber.
of any rudder has a keyway for a standard steerer.
and keyed to
and is secured with a pinned nut on the lower end. A rud-
der made like this may be removed from the hull without digging
horn timber.
211
16-13.
sunk rivets. The stock, of course, is made from bronze shafting, match
DETAILS
edge as illustrated
is made
sheathing
refinement
in Figure 16-12B
by templating
the shape
to a rudder is to bronze sheath
and in the photograph,
of the trailing
edge
and
Figure 16-13. bandsawing
the
from a sheet of bronze about &, V to X2 Minch thick. and there is much waste. and laid on the rudder to mark a rab-
The edges of the curved strips are filed smooth bet that is cut so the sheathing
by means together,
of countersunk then ground
wiil be flush with the surface of the blade. Fastening
head rivets as shown,
reasonably
I;harp.
and the trailing
Sometimes
the rudder
is
edges are brazed on a new boat will
vibrate so that it chatters considerably, a condition remedied by sharpening the trailing edge somewhat, but the sheathed rudder is perfect from the start and is usually fitted on cruisers and racers of the finest quality.
Steering There
Controls
are various means of transmitting
the simple tiller for an outboard
directional
forces to the rudder,
rudder shown in Figure 16-10A.
starting with
When the rudder is
212
MISCELLANEOUS
inboard, steerer These
DETAILS
more complicated
methods
with the wheel and gearing gears must be carefully
sailboats
aligned
have the wheel farther
nected to a quadrant rope running
must be used. Some sailboats attached
to the upper
and securely
have an Edson-type
end of the rudder
fastened
away from the rudder and use a pedestal steerer con-
over sheaves.
The Edson Corp., 471 Industrial Park Road, New Bedis one of the world’s largest producers of sailboat steerers
02745,
and issues a catalog
that is practically
utilizes husky push-pull
a design handbook.
cable steering
from a pedestal
A recent Edson innovation
in lieu of cable-over-pulley
nections to the rudder tiller. This greatly simplifies the installation. There are several types of steerers for powerboats. One method steerer.
at the wheel a.nd chain
Others
use a gearbox
and wire rope similar
at the wheel or elsewhere
pull cable
sizes of boats,
con-
uses a reduction
to the sailboat
pedestal
in the system and connect
the rudder arm with shafts, solid or pipe. A more modern small to medium
Other
on the rudder stock with a length of sprocket and chain and wire
ford, Massachusetts
gear steerer
stock.
to the structure.
type of steerer,
suitable
to for
uses a rack and pinion at the wheel and a heavy push-
from the rack to an arm at the rudder.
This is by far the simplest
type of
steerer and is seen in many boats because it is the least expensive to install. The fortunate builder has good detail of the steering system on his plans: otherwise he has been left on his own to work it out. The steering much of the interior
joinerwork
gear parts be securely wire rope
sheaves.
has been built.
fastened
The
to prevent movement
latter
should
aligned to reduce friction and eliminate nonferrous
whenever
should be installed
It is most important
before too
that all steering
of units such as the steerer and
be through-bolted
and should
be carefully
wear on the wire rope. All parts should aiso be
possible.
Due to the high cost of labor, dard with the stock powerboat
manual
hydraulic
manufacturers.
of a pump that is turned by the steering
steering
has almost become
stan-
This type of steering consists essentially
wheel, a hydraulic
cylinder,
and a reservoir,
all connected by three tubes or hoses of small diameter. There cpn be two or more steering stations-it makes little difference as long as there are no leaks in the piping-so
the more
drawback,
the number
and this is a matter
of stations of design,
the more
advantageous
the system.
One
is the great zumber of steering wheel turns In the larger boats, the number of turns
from hard over to hard over of the rudder. can be reduced
by introducing
one. One of the largest suppliers
a power-driven
Box 668,
Osprey,
Florida
of hydraulic
pump instead of a manually steering
components
operated
is Hynautic,
Inc.,
33559.
Fuel Tanks Due to the danger of explosion and fire, the construction particularly struction
gasoline
should
not be taken
are well covered by standards
written by people Guard.
tanks,
with long experience,
The standards
well. (See Chapter The standards
and installation
lightly.
set by the American and most recently
are only as good as your compliance
17 and Recommended specify the all-important
of fuel tanks,
Both installation
and con-
Boat and Yacht Council, (1977)
by the U.S.
Coast
with them, so heed them
Reading.) matter
of tank materials.
Monel Alloy 400
MISCELLANEOUS remains
probably
the finest metal from which to make tanks,
diesel fuel, but it is extremely for
diesel
fuel tanks
breakthrough aluminum
but
DETAILS
either
for gasoline
high in cost. Steel remains the most inexpensive
must not have
since the last edition
for the construction
a coating
of certain
nection
and that it shows it was tested.
to the bonding
One caution
as called for
Also, be sure that it has a tab for con-
system of the boat.
about aluminum
tanks concerns
the connection
of metal fittings,
as metal tubing and metal ends of fuel hoses, to the tank, because be galvanically
A
alloys of
Now tanks can be welded of alloys 5052,
5083, or 5086. When buying a fuel tank, be sure it bears the label of the manufacturer by the standards
or
material
of any sort on the inside.
of this book is the approval
of fuel tanks.
213
compatible
with the aluminum
weld half of an aluminum
pipe coupling
alloy. One way to avoid trouble
threads
of the coupling
size of the opening;
you must start out with a coupling
larger than usual. Fill and vent connections can be slipped over and clamped All valves in the fuel piping, engine (and fuel return
half.
The bushing
unthreaded
reduces
the
that is a size or two
to the tank are normally
to aluminum including
is to
to the tank and then screw a stainless steel
pipe bushing into the female therefore
such
the metal may not
of hose, and these
nipples welded to the tank.
those at the tank for the fuel suction to the
line in diesel systems),
must be of the approved
packless type,
which do not leak at the stems. And one final anywhere
except
word:
openings
in the tank
for any purpose
are not permitted
on the top surface of the tank.
A tank manufacturer that has made hundreds of aluminum alloy fuel tanks for stock and custom boatbuilders as well as for the one-off people is Florida Marine Tanks,
Tank
Inc.,
16480
Capacity
Figure
N. W. 48th Avenue,
by figuring
U.S. gallons. dimensions
Florida
33014.
Calculation
16-14 shows tank shapes commonly
capacity
Hialeah,
used in boats and how to calculate
their
the volume in cubic inches and dividing by 231 to find contents
Boatbuilders
seem to always work the capacities
are taken in feet, the cubic capacity
is multiplied
in
from inch dimensions.
If
by 7.48 for the answer in
gallons. The cylindrical and rectangular tanks A and B are straightforward to figure. Shape C is typical of a tank installed under the cockpit of a sailboat. The sides are parallel but the top and bottom
are not, due to hull shape. The cross-sectional
area W times H
is the average of the area of the ends, or the same as the area at midlength Shape
D is often
used for tanks located
under
the floor of a cabin,
of the tank.
and again
the
volume is the length times the average of the area of the ends. The W measurements are taken at midheight
Propeller Propeller
Shafts
and
of the ends.
Bearings
shafts must be made from strong,
of the best metals,
non-corrosive
material.
Monel Alloy 400 and the higher strength
At this writing two
Monel Alloy K-500
have
TAti<
CApAC17-y
e
0A
fibLL0Fd.S
(DlMEdSlo~5
I
L
1b-i (J-s-
/ ;.
6 ALJ.=
Id
INCH&)
L%3.\4SCKlZ 231
Q H
=
LXH%W 231
00
Figure
CiALS_
16-l<.
-
MISCELLANEOUS just about priced themselves
out of the pleasure
content,
the reason why little people,
and this is probably
afford them. A somewhat bronze, ing
weaker metal, although
but this seems to have disappeared
a used
materials,
Tobin
shaft)
notably Armco’s
and
been
Aquamet
but in typical intermittent standard
tioned
Typical
P-6 has charts for selecting
while the outboard
hub bore and threads done so the propeller
cannot
by various
stainless
of find-
steel
shafting
Aquamet
17 is a strong, suitable
22 is a better
diameter,
American
choice.
Boat
and Yacht
the sizes of shafts for the materials
men-
spacing.
shafts have a keyway machined
to the engine,
are high in nickel
for many years, is Tobin
boat use, then Aquamet
yacht service
above and also for bearing
“standard”
215
17, 18, and 22. If the shaft is going to be turning
If your boat plans do not specify the shaft Council
These
unlike governments,
(but don’t overlook the possibility
replaced
most of the time, like in commercial metal,
boat market.
DETAILS
on one end for the propeller
shaft coupling
end has a taper with keyway to match
for the propeller
locking
nuts. The tapering
the propeller
must be carefully
will fit properly and is best left to a shaft supplier
who is set up
for this work. Dimensions for machining the shaft end and propeller hub have long been standardized, at least in the U.S., and the SAE data for this is usually tabulated and illustrated in the catalogs of the propeller makers. When setting up the length of your shaft, allow one shaft diameter’s clearance between the propeller hub and the strut. Figure
16-15A
motorboat. batten shaft
shows a longitudinal
The same section
section
at the shaft centerline
applies to a common
and cutaway skeg. It shows the usual modern log with a stuffing
around
box inboard
to prevent
arrangement
long to require
additional
with a keel
of a rubber-necked
water from leaking
the shaft, and a strut to support the shaft at the propeller.
are used when the shaft is sufficiently
of a twin screw
single screw motorboat
into the boat
Intermediate support.
The stuffing box and the shaft log are both of bronze and are connected length
of rubber
minor
misalignment
proven
hose secured
by clamps.
of the shaft.
The
hose helps to reduce
Shaft logs are made in the several
the most useful for the majority
of boats,
struts
by a short
vibration
due to
angles that have
but they may have to be shimmed
with a wedge of wood in your boat to get the correct alignment. The base flange of the shaft log must be made watertight by bedding the flange with a generous amount of bedding
compound,
Wherever otherwise *a
The
possible,
such
therefore
or with one of the thiokol-base
wood screws of the same metal should
shaft hole through
because
as Dolfinite,
the base should be through-fastened
the hole is difficult susreptible
to worm damage.
Some shaft logs are designed
materials.
bronze
bolts;
be used.
the wood should be treated to clean
with silicon
and paint
with polyester
later with the shaft
This precaution
with a tube integral
or epoxy resin, in place and is
is very important
indeed.
with the base. The tube is a lining
for the shaft hole and is cut off flush with the outside of the hull. This type of shaft log is rather special and is not used as frequently as the kind that terminates at the base. Another type of special shaft log is sometimes used in moderate to large size boats where the shaft is quite long in proportion bearing
between
the first intermediate
to the diameter
and it is desirable
shaft strut and the engine.
logs are made that have a short length of bearing.
The bearing
to have a
In this case shaft
is housed so the for-
s
f
/n
*
7”
‘CVTLE-X
CACTtUG Pene’uG
t----t-Y
,?-.‘-1 I 1-k\ .--&&E iP.45-e.‘$, 7 I)&,EE
uSHAFT
COMMOU
TYPE
-n-i~u
B~iiC\xoc~D
OF
-1.
LdL,3 -
TE:r
JL
v
Y~-\FT .---.I
SECT “COTIE
Figure
16-15.
~-HZ. ~~DZ;~ 11 7-v PE FEPLz,rJlj
1
,+..-..
l?Z.3’ -
F - u-~.
Z’C
.--AFT
MISCELLANEOL’S ward end is not exposed cooling
water tapped
to a flow of water;
into the log forward
water lubrication of the bearing.
that usually piped into the exhaust line for cooling,
DETAILS
is provided
The
217
by engine
water used is part of
but the diversion
is not detrimen-
tal, because only a small amount is sent to the shaft log bearing.
This type of shaft log
is specially made up and not found in marine supply catalogs. A part of the propulsion setup that is almost always a special
item is the propeller
shaft strut. As specified
by the plans, these are either the single amI or the v type, and
due to the angle of the shaft and the shape of the hull it is nearly impossible stock strut that will fit. There might just do the job. 16-15A
or a mock-up
pair to fit the boat. umbian struts,
Bronze
are, however,
Otherwise,
enough
dimensions
I am not advertising Freeport,
Corp.,
so they have many
patterns
Struts are fastened
through
11520
have a screwdriver
These
bolts are best oldered
beat the Goodrich
that may be adapted
with moderate
the planking
and the inside blocking
slot to keep the bolt from turning from
“Cutless”-type
the strut
bearing,
has grooves that channel
and sand, thus minimizing the strut and secured
manufacturer,
alterations.
to an optional
bearing,
boat goes through
the deadwood.
The latter for bearing
The stuffing
has a Cutless-type lubrication.
shell. This type
and for washing out silt is lightly pressed into are four times the shaft
and they are often reduced bearing
when the shaft of a single-engine
and a water scoop on each side of the box can be had “rubber
necked,”
with a
piece of hose between the stuffing box and the casting.
Both stuffing
the stern bearing
and are readily available.
Water
are stock items of marine
hardware
will fill the hole for the shaft and must be prevented
hull through joints
in the deadwood
to
can be cut to make two
box is inside the hull, the stern bearing
bearing
The stuffing
bonded to an outer
plastic-type
shaft wear. The shell of the bearing
struts, so that one standard
the length
in the strut. It is hard to
in water for lubrication
in length when used as the aftermost
and
while it is tightened.
which is made of rubber
intermediate ones. Figure 16-15A also shows a typical arrangement
casting
of special
with silicon bronze
specifying
with one or two set screws. The bearings
half length in intermediate
outside.
thousands
bronze.
shell of bronze or, if the hull is aluminum,
diameter
but over the years Col-
has made
needed. You might as well have the strut maker install the bearing
of bearing
as shown in Figure
bronze bolts. The heads of the bolts should be oval and countersunk
should
that
so he can make up one or a
anybody in particular,
New York
to find a
struts on the market
on a sketch
must be sent to a strut manufacturer
Most struts are made of cast manganese or manganese
some adjustable
structure.
box assembly and
from leaking into the
This is done by fitting a tube between
the stuffing box and stern bearing castings, either a lead sleeve as shown in A of the figure (the lead is easily flanged by hammering) or a bronze tube special ordered from a supplier
like Columbiar.
ends of a threaded bolts. The
stuffing
impregnated
box
asbestos
pipe.
Bronze.
The
The castings
packing braid,
pilots of the castings should
is square, and is installed
be fastened
either
waxed
as individual
gered so they are not all in line, thus preventing
leaking.
can be tapped
for the
to the wood with hanger braided rings,
flax
or
Teflon-
with the joints stag-
LEFT
HAND
$?IGHT
kV
Fbgure
+M
r(4~D
A$-+-EC?t.l
16-16.
Direction Screw
fWD
of Propeller
propellers
astern,
Rotation
are made
either
right-hand
a shaft that turns clockwise
turns counterclockwise
requires
takes a left-hand
twin screw boats to be of opposite
or left-hand. a r$ht-hand
propeller.
rotation
Looking propeller
It is customary
forward
from
and a shaft that
for the propellers
and to turn outboard
in
as shown in Figure
16-1G.
Aligning
Propeller
Shaft Couplings
If there is misalignment not only be unnecessary to the rear bearing the engine mated
between vibration
the engine
and propeller
shaft couplings
when the engine is running
and seal of the reverse gear. The shaft should be installed to it. If there are only two support
bearing or strut bearing
and a rubber-necked between the coupling
for the shaft,
first and the stern
shaft log, block up the shaft inboard
the shaft log to prevent the shaft from sagging geuge, test for alignment
bearings
there will
but also possible damage
at the rubber
neck. Lacking
halves by inserting
of
a feeler
four strips of paper
as shown in Figure 16.17. You can tell by gently pulling on the strips whether the pressure, and thus the gap, is the same for all pieces. Hardwood and thin brass shims are used under the engine mounts
until the alignment
final test is to tighten down the engine
is as perfect
and still have good alignment
as possible.
The
of the couplings.
Many engines are equipped with adjustable mounts that need but a wrench to lift or lower them a few thousands of an inch, and some of the larger engines have jacking screws built into the mounts for the same purpose. If aligning
of the engine is done with the boat out of water,
it must be tested again
MI.~CEi~l.ANEOC~.S DE?,-IILS
when the vessel is launched throwing Pulley
out the alignment
because
some
shape
when water-borne,
that was done while hauled out.
Drives
‘l’hc boatbuilder
is often
pump or rxtra generator
faced with figuring
Driven
out a v-belt
pulley ratio when a bilge
is to br driven from a power take-off
‘l’he fortnulitt~ below art’ handy for finding
pulley diameter
pulley on an engine.
or spcrd in RPM.
pulley:
Driving
Engine
hulls change
219
RPM
-_
Diameter
=
Diameter
=
RPM
=
diameter
x RPM of drivel
diamctcr diameter
of driven
x RPM
RPM
of driver
of driven
pullry: diameter
x RPM of driven
RPM diameter
of driver
x RPM of driven
diameter
of driver
Controls
The engine is almost always located some distance away from the steering station of the boat, so remote controls must be installed for operating the throttle, the reverse gear,
and an emergency
shutdown
in the case of some two-cycle
diesel engines.
This
used to be done with complicated linkages of rods, pipes, and bell cranks and was a job One of the greatest boons was the advent of the hydraulic of major proportions.
220
MISCELLANEOUS
reverse gear,
DETAILS
requiring
many foot-pounds
but fingertip
effort on a small lever on the gear instead of the
of effort needed
to operate
the old manual
push-pull cable controls now seen in most boats, a method time and cost of installation.
The engine
set of levers at the steering station the engine,
brand of engine
for connecting
Control
Panish Transdyne,
Street,
Hudson,
4806 N. E. 12th Avenue,
with a first class product
Avenue,
Vancouver,
are also sources
British
is Kobelt
cables,
Limerick, Pennsylvania 19468. The length of cables between control but they should
be installed
Another
pioneer in control
Fort Lauderdale,
firsthand
Columbia,
for push-pull
to the gear and throttle.
by one of the oldest makers,
Ohio 44236.
fit that can give advice from much market
maker usually has kits for each
for each job.
heads of high quality can be furnished 21 Clinton
reduced the
cables running from the levers to
The control
the engine end of the cables
brackets
This led to the
system now consists of an attractive
and two push-pull
one each for gear and throttle.
The5.e save hou1.z of making Controls,
control
clutch.
that drastically
experience.
Manufacturing
Canada
V5T
as is Teleflex.
Florida 33308, A newcomer Co.,
Ltd.,
Morse heads is an out-
in the U.S. 235 East 5th
lH2.
The first two mentioned
Inc.,
640 North
Lewis Road,
levers and the engine can be almost unlimited,
with a minimum
number
of bends,
and the minimum
bend radii for the size of cable being used must not be exceeded.
Contrary
nions of some, it is a mistake to restrict
cables. They should
only be secured sufficiently tle time spent planning bends. The control
the movement
of push-pull
to keep them from interfering
the cable
manufacturers
to the opi-
with other equipment.
A lit-
runs will show which way has the least number furnish
really good instructions
for making
of
the in-
stallation. A variation
of a control
favored by many operators.
head with two levers per engine
is the single lever control
Two cables per rngine are still required,
is planned the same as when there are two levers. When two or rnc*e control stations are planned
so the installation
and would require
long runs of
cables with many bends, consideration should be given to hydraulic controls for the Inc., mentioned earlier in this chapter under Steering throttle and gears. Hynautic. Controls,
has a system that may do the job for you.
Engine
Connections
Water,
fuel, and electrical
connections
to an engine should always have slack so vibra-
tion cannot cause premature failure of the lines. Cooling water lines to the engine should be hose, double clamped at each end with stainless steel hose clamps whenever possible. On the other hand, fuel lines should be hose of approved type with threaded ends and rtezler clamped. The reader should heed the relatively new regulations described in the following chapter. A good number of boats have sunk because exhaust clamped
to the adjoining
widths and hose overlap permitted on this subject.
hoses have been inadequately
rigid pipes or tubes. Figure 16-18 shows the minimum
See the following
by the American chapter
clamp
Boat and Yacht Council standard
for additional
reference
to the ABYC.
MISCEI.L.~lNEOI~S Ohk CLAM4
W\DTc(
II
M~hd.
1
wo
uo5e
Electrical
221
CLAMPS
Mlfd. WIOfH
Figure
DETAILS
of
~%cI=! r ‘12”
16-18.
System
Here is a part of modern boatbuilding that can get a builder into a lot of trouble. If he is lucky, there will be only one voltage on board, such as 12 volts direct current. However, more often these days there will also be 115 volts of alternating a shoreline perhaps
connection
also operate
not running,
to operate
AC-powered
generator
cooking
to keep the batteries
the AC side of a dual voltage refrigerator
and to operate
AC independent
a charger
air conditioning
while dockside.
when the engines are Progressing
range,
heating
or air conditioning,
television,
in USC aboard,
such as 12 and 24 or 12 and 32. The complications Boat and Yacht Council standards
are endless:
Materialwise.
the standards
that alfe~tpl
an
such as an
etc. And farther
and also IWO DC voltages, in some of the larger
thrrc seems to be no end at all. But this has been recognized,
American
further,
on board can be used to provide conveniences
along the line there can be ~UWAC voltages yachts
current from
topped off and to
and there are
to keep things manageable. matter
of overload pro-
tection to avoid fire and to the type of insulated conductors necessary various environments aboard a boat. The conductor size is governed
to cope with the by the length of
thr wire and the ampere stranded
are a guide to the all-important
load to be carried,
rather than solid to minimize
approved
crimped
terminals
The I1.S. Coast Guard IO tragic cxprriences Guard guideline
and the wires of the conductors
failure
from vibration.
and should preferably
also has something
in the past, particularly
to safe electrical
switchboards
ware store-type
recognized
availahle
by the appearance
tection.
Now, there
are DC panels and combination circuit breakers
of batteries.
There
the circuits
used in many boats,
utilize
custom
Marinetics
is a sufficient
designed
Corp.,
P.O.
selection
circuit
of
the only hard-
12-volt DC panel
breakers
for circuit
pro-
DC and AC panels of various
and meters to show loads and the condition of panels and load capacities
and this often
and built switchboards. Box 2676,
due
on the market
For years,
has been a small
having six to a dozen toggle switches and automotive sizes, all having approved
installations,
engines. The Coast
is listed in the following chapter.
standards.
to boatmen
should be must be by
as well.
to say about electrical
system installation
meeting
switchboard
be soldered
in boats with gasoline
Life is being made easier for the boatbuilder standardized
Connections
Newport
eliminates
the necessity
One of the pioneers
Beach,
California
92663.
to take care of of having to in this field is
222
MISCELLA
Battery
NEOLJS llET/lILS
Storage
Boxes
The clrctrolyte
in a lead-arid
metals, so it is important unsecured multiple
battery units,
storage
to overturn:
must
battery
to prevent spillage. therefore
bc secured.
is very destructive
the battery,
For small
craft
molded plastic cases, with straps and hold-down
whether there
batteries.
Onr of the simplest resistant by carefully
it consists of a single or
are on the market
coveted
fittings to keep the thing in place.
larger boats there might be a bank of two engine starting to eight ship’s service
to wood and certain
The worst thing that can happen is for an
batteries
In
and a bank of two
for which custom boxes must be built.
containers
is made
and completely
of plywood,
with its interior
lining the box with fiberglass.
made
acid-
The inside dimen-
sions of the box should be about 3i Wlarger all around than the battery to provide space for spilled water, which can be removed by suction with an oven baster. A couple of expendable the clearance.
wooden blocks can be used to keep the battery
The top should be of a material
plosive hydrogen generated when the battery top also guards against the possibly dangerous tool be accidentally Figure
Fresh
dropped
battery
and ventilated
so that ex-
is being charged will not be trapped. A sparking that would take place should a
across the battery
16-19 is a suggested
Water
like Masonite
from shifting despite
terminals.
box.
Tanks
Fresh water tanks should be just as carefully One difference
is that
there should
built, tested,
be an opening
outlet. This is used to drain the tank weather. Suitable water tank materials
and installed
in the bottom
the
when a boat is unused or stored in freezing include Monet Alloy 400. superior in quality
and cost, stainless
steel (Type 316 is the best in salt atmosphere),
vided the interior
is treated
to remove
as fuel tanks.
of the tank-
taste and odor.
and fiberglass,
pro-
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
223
Plumbing Copper
used to be the ultimate
water,
but it has had drawbacks,
for piping,
either
salt water or hot and cold fresh
such as a tendency
to develop
costly not only as piping but in thz price of the fittings marine (PVC)
supply stores have good quality pipe, some of which is suitable
polybutylene
tubing
suitable
nect with the available Where pipes pierce water intakes, etc. -up
pinholes.
Now it is
necessary
to hook it up. The
hose of other materials:
polyvinyl chloride
for hot water,
and one of the latest (1979),
for cold and hot water that is exceptionally
a
fast to con-
fittings. the hull for any reason whatsoever-toilet
connections,
to about a foot above the normal waterline,
fittings should be directly
connected
cooling
the “through-hull”
to sea cocks. These should preferably
be genuine,
approved full-flow sea cocks rather than valves or other devices made of brass or similar alloy that could deterioration
be corroded
remained
by sea water
undetected
the boat
to sink if
until too late. Here again the American
and possibly
allow
Boat and
Yacht Council standards should be used for guidance. Intakes for engine cooling, etc., must have scoop strainers outside of the hull and also good quality
intake strainers
tween the sea cock and the device pumping
Water
Trap
There
should be a circulation
over the opening
the water.
Vent of fresh air through
a boat even when it is otherwise
closed up. The vent shown in Figure 16-20 was developed for sailboats ago and remains
popular
while excluding
rain and flying spray.
and practical
for any type of boat, The
at sea some years
as it permits ventilation
cowl can be turned
g.hi
as desired for best
~ENTILA~;‘C’ K ITH \‘.ATEE TCAI’ I%.~‘\
Figure
16-20.
on the
on the inside of the hull be-
224
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS MATERIAL’
2500zoooIs*o-
FACTOR
60,000
LBS.l?S.I.
OF SAFETY=
STE
4
r’L- 4
6”
IO0
5”
,o*o300MOTOO 630z 5007 r?400 z cl !.a,/-3 -i
4+ AZ “PKlCIrtr
4”
REACH
B= ANGLE OF HEEL C - HCELCP REACH 0:
3g
nr
m.oYE “PPLR BEAQING
3” 5---
--
: : 50a--
/-
TO USE
--- --
--
:
DWW LlNE(2) THR” REACH s LOAD. FROM INTERSECTION WITH B.M. LINE PRoJEC7(F) PARALLEL WITH GUIDE LINES TO PIPE SIZE SCALES.
.-
: 2 al*-w - a 55’
I ”
Ii 30’1
la PIPE
Figure
16-21.
results.
The
removable
screen should
screens reduce the effective pliable
rubbery
can be plastic,
opening
not be used unless there
by about 25 percent.
are insects,
DAVITS
because
The cowl can be one of the
plastic kind that bends when a rope crosses it. The tube into the boat aluminum,
or copper.
The box can be installed
either fore and aft or
athwartships.
Davits Davits are used for handling poses on commercial against corrosion,
anchors
and dinghies
boats. Aluminum
has become a popular
material
This is good when, for one reason or another, and stowed and thus needs manhandling. pipe or tube or of ordinary
aboard
alloy pipe, anodized
yachts and for other purif possible for protection
for davits because of its light weight.
a davit must be removed from its socket Davits can aiso be made of stainless
steel pipe, the latter preferably
hot galvanized
3 z z I
steel
after shap-
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
225
Level shpiyhfedge 4 kuli
Figure
16-22.
ing and welding whatever nying chart,
labeled
war were clamoring
Figure
fittings are needed on the davit. I worked up the accompa16-21,
some years ago when scores of small craft going to
for davits for all sorts of uses. If you know the load and the reach
(dimension A), the chart will give a pretty good idea of the pipe size needed. The chart has a built-in safety factor of four using ordinary steel pipe. A davit is basically a cantilevered
beam, so if a load swung outboard
are expected, the reach should be increased then probably be indicated.
will heel the boat much, as noted on the chart.
or if rolling seas
A larger pipe size will
Anodized aluminum alloy davits of various capacities, ranging from 150 pounds for anchors and up to 1500 pounds for small boats, are made as stock items and can be had with a tackle arrangement, in various voltages. The reach,
with a hand-operated winch, or with an electric winch dimension A in Figure 16-21. is usually limited to six
feet. Principal makers of the aluminum davits are Mar-Quipt. Inc., 231 S. W. 5th Street, Pompano Beach, Florida 33060, and Pipe Welders, Inc., 413 S. W. 3rd Avenue, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33315.
Painting The boatbuilder
today has a choice of the finest exterior
finishes imaginable,
both for
protection and appearance, from one-part enamels to the very expensive, long-lasting two-part high gloss polyurethane coatings. There is also a wide choice of varnishes and synthetics
to protect
and bring out the best natural
wood trim.
Underwater there is also a wide variety of antifouling paints, usually priced according to life expectancy. Here you must be guided by the length of your season and which paint has proven effective
in the areas to be frequented.
The same makers of the fine marine exterior coatings (perhaps “paint” is becoming extinct?) have material for the interior as well, and there is nothing wrong with the high-grade latex-base paints, which make cleanup so easy with water.
226
MISCELLANEOUS
Marking
DETAILS
the Boot Top
Nothing looks worse to yachtsmen tom paints. waterline
Assuming
than a ragged division between the topside and bot-
that the buiider
way to mark
Figure
profile.
16-22,
Level straightedges
just about the easiest
waterline
at frequent
are set up at the ends of the boat as shown in tightly between
until it barely touches the hull and a point is marked
By moving the cord in and out on the straightedges on the waterline
intervals
to the boot top as scaled from the plan of the
and then a length of thin, strong cord is stretched
edges and moved inboard
may be marked
as often as desired.
if it is allowed to sag, the waterline
alternately
boot top or stripe is usually
the
there.
at opposite ends, points
Be sure to keep the cord tight, for
will not come out straight.
and aft and there is room to work, a builder’s line. The
to mark the designed
during construction,
the boot top is to first plot the straight
along the hull and then lay off heights outboard
has had the foresight
at the stem and stern for reference
If the boat is level fore
level or transit may be used to run in the
curved (sheered)
for appearance,
and offsets
above the waterline can be taken from the plans and plotted as shown in the figure. A batten is nailed on the hull to fair the points and mark the line, which is done by scribing with the broken
end of a hacksaw
knife made for scribing
wood.
blade or similar
device or with a so-called
race
Chapter
17
SAFETY
A sound hull is only the beginning
of a safe hoat. unless it is the simplest of craft like
one made to be paddled or rowed. As soon as holes are made in the hull underbody for through-hull fittings or machinery and electrical installations are made, precautions must be taken building
to prevent
are fortunate
leaking,
sinking,
Not too many years ago this knowledge learned
fire, or explosion.
in having information
available
Newcomers
to boat-
to keep them out of trouble.
was not so easy to come by. Many lessons were
the bard way
water through-hull number
sinking caused by a rotted hose attached to a valveless underfitting, loss of fire control from the wrong kind or an inadequate
of fire extinguishers,
fire and/or
explosion
because
a fuel line to an engine
was installed without slack and broke from vibration, loss of life because passengers aboard a sinking boat could not find the life preservers. These occurrences and others were and are preventable. The very nnturc of boats calls for deck levels of varying heights steps and ladders. hand
Risk of injury can be reduced
rails and grabs
that
whenever possible. Similarly rails and lifelines
American
council
with safety.
important
fastened
in place
are the adequate
by
number
of
with through-fastenings
height and fasteningofsafety
the edges of all decks accessible
Boat and Yacht
This non-profit cerned
around
are securely
to be accessible
by having an adequate
to those aboard.
Council
was formed in 1954 by members
Over the years dozens of members
of the boating
industry con-
have served countless
hours in
the preparation of standards for safe practices in the general areas of hull, equipment, machinery, electrical, and engineering standards. Ample time has been given for comment
and criticism
standards
of the standards
do not represent
one-sided
before
they have been approved:
therefore
the
opinions. 227
220
SAFETY
There
STANDARDS
are numerous
available
individually
standards
For a list of these standards P.O.
contact
Box 806, Amityville,
the complete
in each of the divisions mentioned the Secretary,
New York 11701.
set of standards
above and all are
book called Safety Standards for Small Craft.
or as a complete
is included,
American
Membership
Boat and Yacht Council,
is open to all, in which case
as well as copies of new standards
as issued
and revisions to those existing.
Federal
Safe Boating
Poor design,
Regulations
construction,
and equipment
file, and loss of life have inevitably gasoline loading Boat
fuel systems,
and Yacht
pliance
Council,
guidelines”
turer or backyard In my opinion, mended
electrical
and safe powering,
installations
that
led to the enactment
systems
in boats
and level flotation under contract to determine
to the U.S.
the standards
whether
required
in explosions,
with gasoline-fueled
in case of swamping. Coast Guard,
to ease the burden of the boatbuilder. builder,
resulted
of laws in the U.S. governing
whether
his product
engines,
safe
The American prepared
“com-
he be a manufac-
will meet the regulations.
by law are the same as the practices
recom-
by the ABYC.
Copies of the following
booklets
Guard District Office or Washington, D.C. 20590:
from
may be obtained I1.S.
Coast
Guard,
from
your nearest
Office
of
U.S.
Boating
Coast Safety,
Electrical System Compliance Guideline applies to all inboard or inboard/outboard gasoline-powered boats and boats that have gasoline auxiliary engines such as generators. Fuel
System
Compliance
engines
(except
outboard
generators,
and to gasoline~fuel
inboard/outboard Level Flotation length.
Guideline applies to all boats powered with gasoline engines), all boats with gasoline auxiliary engines, such as tanks that are permanently Guide--applies
Coast Guard publication
CG-466,
to monohull
canoes,
Safety Standards for Backyard
attaching
careful
a “capacity
a hull identification
all these
things
regulations
and a “certification
number
will not discourage
study of the safety regulations
Many government
label”
boats. Boat Builders,
is a
as to how to work up the safe loading
for boats under 20 feet long to which the law applies.
and how to obtain Hopefully
and
boats less than 20 feet in
kayaks, or inflatable
boon to the home builder and includes directions how to go about
in inboard
boats. Compliance
It does not apply to sailboats,
calculations
installed
In addition,
it tells
label” to the hull,
for your boat. a would-be
will show that their intent
backyard
builder:
a
is good.
seem to consist of endless pages of solid text, making
them boring to read, to say the least, but not so the guidelines put out by the Coast Guard. These clearly illustrate with simple line drawings what is acceptable and what is prohibited,
,,:,s,y (3
* ,’
I
SAFETY Product
STANDARDS
229
Testing
A step for safety beyond mere words has also been taken. Manufacturers
can now have
their products
Council
tested for compliance
with American
Boat
and Yacht
dards and so labeled when the product meets the requirements. the
testing
Laboratories
is the marine (UL),
which succeeded
The UL label on hardware the material located
section
of the
well-known
the pioneering
Yacht
and other items of equipment
has been tested and found suitable.
at 1647 Jeffords
and
Street,
Clearwater,
Florida
The agency that does respected
Safety
Underwriter’s
Bureau.
assures the purchaser
Underwriter’s 33516.
stan-
Laboratories,
that
Inc. is
RECOMMENDED
Ruilding
Cl~ssr’c S~lnll
Co., 2 1 Elm Street, tions for building Bouthuildi:rg Co.,
Camden,
by Gilbert
Camden,
for pleasure
also contains
a chapter
Brought
covering
entitled
International together
Marine
Publishing
in one book are instruc-
boats.
C. Klingel.
Maine 04843.
craft,
is just as enthusiastic
steel. Both writers explain
Gardner,
of classic wooden
with Stwl,
construction
by John
Maine 04843.
a number
21 Elm Street,
Colvin
Crc#,
READING
International
Written
Marine
by an advocate
the steps from start to finish.
“Boatbuilding
about aluminum
Publishing
of welded steel This volume
with Aluminum.”
by Thomas
alloy construction
as is Klingrl
how to do quality work as opposed to commercial
Colvin. about
boat-type
construction. Roat building Marine
Designs,
with Plywoori 9152
still one of the most inexpensive for handling
and How to Fibq1a.u
Rosecrans,
and fiberglass
Bellflower.
boatbuilding
covering
California materials,
Bay City, Michigan
cold-molded authors.
48iO6.
90706.
both
from
Because
the instructions
Glen -L
plywood is
in these book3
plywood are useful.
Thr GOU.,~PON Brothcars on Boat Construction, Street.
Boats.
This volume
Gougeon
Brothers,
is a complete
wooden boats. with emphasis given to the WEST
Inc..
treatment
706 Martin of building
system developed by the
232
RECOMMENDED
Laprake Marine
Boatbuilding, by Walter J.
Publishing
Walter J, building
RE.4 DING Simmons.
Co., 21 Elm Street,
Simmons,
Lincolnville,
Camden,
Maine
wooden boats with clinker
04843.
International
Marine
Co.,
One of the best books on boatbuilding
Sq@ty
Standards
CC-466,
availahle
booklet
foreword:
Federal
recreational
non-professional
for
Backyard
“This
Boat
Coast
pamphlet
safety
builder.
hazards
Joinrry,
21
Elm
published
by
in the art of
of cold-molding
Builders,
Guard
U.S.
Camden,
District
is described
Coast
Office.
Guard
Maine
requirements
and is intended
have
been
found
with
in depth.
Publication
Best described
is a simplified
‘Che primary objective
which
Fitting Out, by John
Street,
. . . (CC-466)
boat construction
individual
avoid certain
(Reprint
from start to finish. Well illustrated
The technique
from nearest
04843.
A book specializing
Cold-Molding,
Publishing
photocgraphs and line drawings.
Maine
04849.)
published by International
planking.
Modr~rrr Woode~r Yacht Construction: Guzzwell,
Originally
by the
explanation
of
for the use of the
of these requirements
to be the cause
is to
of boating
accidents.” .Sa/;sty Standards 806. Amityvillc. stallation
of equipment.
on electrical
Small
Station
American
industry
Road,
and Yacht
Council,
for boat construction
Kings
Inc.,
Box
and the in-
especially
the parts
and Allied
Publica-
protcbrtion.
Tools, by Ian Bradley.
sharp is vc*ry important
Boat
standards
This is of great value to the boatbuilder,
wiring and circuit
Sharpllin,q tions,
/i)r Small Crafi,
New York 11701.
Langley,
Argus Books,
Herts,
England. of boatbuilding.
to the enjoyment
Ltd.,
Keeping woodworking tools This little British book tells
how IO do it. Shrj) and .-!ircrali Fairin,q and Dvzr~lopmcwt, by S.S. Rabl, Cornell Maritime Press, Cc~ntrc*viIIc~.Maryland 21Gli. A good old book with clearly illusrrated details of some Iofring rrchniqut~s. Wood: A Manualfor Its Use as a Shipbuilding Material. Department of Ships,
1957-1962.
(Reprint:
superb source of information, building,
moisture
content,
Wood Ilandbook Office,
woods of interest
including structural
(Ilandhook
ment of Agriculture. Printing
‘Teaparty
Available
No.
i2),
Forest
of the Navy, Bureau
Massachusetts,
1983.)
A
and storage of wood for boatwooden boat repairs,
Products
Laboratory,
of Documents,
Contains
much
etc.
U.S.
Depart-
U.S. Government
basic information
about
to the boatbuilder.
loaded with news, pictures, WoodenBoat,
specifications
design of parts,
D. C. 20402.
Washington,
Kingston,
from Superintendent
National Fisherman, 21 Elm Street,
WoodenBoat
Books,
a
Maine
and plans of commercial
bi-monthly
Publications,
Camden,
Inc.,
magazine
for
04843.
newspaper
fishing boats.
wooden
Box 78, Brooklin,
A monthly
Maine
boat
lovers
04616.
and
builders.
(I
’
EQUIVALENTS
Linear 1 in. = 25.4 mm 1 in.
-
0.083
1 ft.
= 12 in.
6 ft.
= 1 fathom
= 2.54
1 cm
= 30.48
1 ';tat.ute mile
= 5280
1 statute
= 1.6093
mile
1 mm
cm
ft.
= 0.03937 = 0.3937
1 m = 39.37
cm ft.
in.
= 3.2809
1 fathom
= 1.8288
1 nautical
mile
1 km = 0.6214
km
in. in. ft.
m
= 6080
ft.
statute
mile
Area 1 sq. cm
sq. cm
= 0.1550
1 sq. in.
= 6.4516
1 sq. ft.
= 144 sq. in.
1 sq. cm = 0.00108
1 sq. ft.
= 0.0929
sq. m
1 sq. m = 10.764
= 16.39
cu. cm
sq. ft. sq. ft. sq. ft.
Volume 1 cu. in.
1 cu. cm = 0.061 cu. in. 1 gal. =231 cu. in. 1 1. = 0.03531 cu. ft.
1 cu. ft. = 1728 cu. in. 1 1. = 61.017 cu. in. 1 cu. ft. = 7.481 gal. 1 pt. = 0.4732 I. 1 qt. = 0.9464 1.
= 0.0283
1 gal.
= 3.785
Note:
= 7.481
cu. ft.
The gal. above
cu. m = 28.32 1. 1 1. = 2.113 1 I. = 1.057
pts. qts.
1.
= U.S. gal.,
and 1 pt.
= & gal.;
1 qt.
= % gal.
233
234
EQUIVALENTS
Weight 1 oz. = 28.35
1 g-r = 0.03537
g-r
1 oz. = 0.02835 1 lb.
= 16 oz.
1 lb.
= 453.6
kg
1 kg = 35.274
= 0.4536
gr.
kg
oz. oz.
1 oz. = 0.0625
lb.
1 kg = 2.2046
lb.
Pressure 1 lb. per sq. in. 1 kg per sq. cm
= 0.0703
kg per sq. cm
= 14.223
lb. peh- sq. in.
Miscellaneous 1 Imp. gal.
= 1.2 U.S. gal.
1 ft. high column of water = 0.434 lb. per sq. in. 1000 warts = 1 kilowatt = 1.34 hnrsepower 1 horsepower 1 long ton
= 746 watts
= 2240 lb.
1 cu. ft. fresh water 1 cu. ft. sea water 1 knot
1: 1 nautical
= 35 cu. ft. of sea water
= 62.5
lb.
= 64 lb. mile per hour
= 1.85318
km per hr.
DECIMALS FOR
EACH
WITH
Fraction __---.
‘,&.dhs
OF
OF
64TH
MILLIMETER
Dcclmal
Mllhms*ars ,approx.,
___
AN
,! ji
I/ --/I
Fraction ~
0.397 0.794 1.191 1.588
?4
5 6 7 a
.07al25 ! .09375 .109375 ,125
1.984 2.381 2.778 3.175
ii
10
9
3.572 3.969 4.366 4.763
_._.
11 12
.I40625 .15625 .17la75 I .la75
13 14 15 16
.203125 .21875 .234375 .250 !
5.159 5.556 5.953 6.350
.._.
17 18 19 '20
.265625 .28125 .296875 .3125
6.747 7.144 7.541 7.938
____
21 22 23 24
.328125 .34375 .359375 ,375
a.334
....
25 26 27 28
.390625 .40625 .421875 .4375
9.922 10.319 10.716 11.113
29 30 31 32
.453125 .46875 .484375 .5oo j I
11.509 11.906 12.303 12.700
'42
J&i
.... %i . .. '4 . M _... gh .. %I .... '% .... % ._.. 'xi .... '/is ._._ 15h __._ M
I
INCH
--
I’
.015625 .03125 m6875 .0625
%i
AN
EQUIVALENTS
1 2 3 4
.
INCH
I/
33 34 35 36
;9/6 w
%i .... "X6
as .... %
'% i&6
a7A ___. T-6 'I /
._._ agA ;5& _.._ %
/i 'I
1""
---____
1 Milhmeters Capprox.) -~
I
._._
ii
a.731 9.128 9.525
I Decimal
/
~
"A
1
I
%eths
'
.515625 53125 546875 .5625
: j I '
13.097 13.494 13.891 14.288
zt 39 40
-578125 -59375 .609375 .625
I 1 : I i
14.684 15.081 15.478 15.875
41 42 43 44
MO625 A5625 .671875 .6875
16.272 16.669 17.066 17.463
45 46 47 48
.703125 .71875 .734375 , .750 '
17.859 18.256 18.653 19.050
49 50 51 52
.765625 .78125 .796875 A125
19.447 19.a44 20.241 20.638
53 54 55 56
.a28125 .a4375 .a59375
.a75
21.034 21.431 21.828 22.225
57 58 59 60
.a90625 SO625 .921875 .9375
22.622 23.019 23.416 23.813
61 62 63 64
j
.953125 .96875 1 .984375 , l.OOO ;
24.209 24.606 25.003 25.400
INDEX
Abcking & Rasmussen, 24 Abbreviations, lines plans, 69 ABYC standards: for electrical installa. tions, 221; for exhaust hoses, 220; for fuel tanks, 212-213; for sea cocks, 223; for propeller shafts, 213-217 Additives, epoxy rrsin, 36, 64. 165 Adhesives, 64-65: sources for, 65; waterproof, 64. SW also Epoxy resins, Glue Aerolite glue, 64, 65 Aircraft Spruce and Specialty Co.. 65 Airex foam core, 41 Allied Resin Corp., 65 Aluminum construction: davits. 224.225: fuel tanks, 212-213: hulls, 9. 43; spars, 205-206. American Boat and Yacht Council (ABYC). 227-228. SW n&o ABYC standards American Dureau of Shipping (ABS). 26 American Klegecell Corp., 41 Anchorfast nails, 48. 52, 58-59 Anti-fouling paints, 225 Arc-bottomed hulls. 2; frames for. 96; setting up, 108 Arcon epoxies, 64 Ash. white, 25 Augers, 16 Backbone
assembly,
105
Backbone structures. 101-105 Ballast keel, 195 Bahek Corp., 41 Batrs. Fred. 148 Battens: for fairing cutves, 73, 76-77, 78-79. 97. 110. 116; as pick-up sticks, 78, 79-80: in planking, 144.146: for planking scale, 136-137: for spiling. 133-134 Batten seam planking, 144-146 Battery storage boxes. 222 Bearings, propeller shaft assembly. 213-217 Berths, 184 Bevel board, 98 Bevels. 94. 96-98: by computer, 99. of floor timbers, 124; of lapstrake planks, 142-143, of transom assembly, 99-100 Bilge stringers, 125 nont ou~rff’rs nuycr.5 ChidfJ, 9. 10 Body plan. 77-78 Bolts: carriage, 51; drift. 50-51. 105. 198, 209; hanger, 55; lag. 55: screw. 50 Boot top (waterline), 226 Breast hook, 154 Bruynreel plywood. 29 Bulkheads, 159. 183-186 Bulwark rail. 174-175 Butt blocks, 92. 131. 149
mmx Buttocks, 67, 80, 83 Butts, plywood, 184 Cabin trunk, 171-173 Cabosil, 36, 165 Camber, deck beam, 153. 156-157 Cant frames, 120 Canvas deck covering, 163-165 Canvas duck, 162 Carve1 planking, 35, 130-131, 138-139 Cast fittings, 192-195: rudder stock, 210-211 Cast iron keel, 195-96 Caulking, 93, 138-140, 166-169 Cedar: Ala ka. 25: Port Orford. 23: western rt 1, 23; white. 23 Ceiling, 188 C-Flex “plankir :.” 37-38 Chainplates. 19; 198 Champion Buildil T Products, 28. 29. 30 Chrm-Tech epoxy, h 1, 65 Chrm-‘I‘rrh. Inc., 65 Chine. 7 ClilmpS. 124, 153-156. 2t.l Clench-nailing, 60.61 Clinker planking, 14 1 Coamings: cockpit. 173: hatch. 177-178 Cockpit roaming. 173 Cockpit, self-bailing. 179 Cockpit sole. 179 Cold-molded hulls. 32-33. 89. 150-151, i.52
Computers: for fairing lines, 87; [or lofting. 99 Condon. M.L., Company, 32 Contourkore bals;l core. 41 Corrosion, galvanic. 43, 48-50. 63 Cotton caulking, 138-140 Cotton wicking. 143 Countcrborcs. 16.17, 53 Countrrsinks. 16-17. 54 Counter stern. ! YO-I21 Couplings, propeller shaft. 218-219 Cowl ventilator, 223-224 Cradles, 41 Cross spalls. 92. 109 Cypress. 23 Davits. 224-225 Deadwood. 104 Dean Company, Thr. 33 Deck beams, 156-157 Deck coverings: canvas, 163-165: fiberglass cloth, 165
Deckhouse, 17 1 - 173 Deck line, 76, 83 Decks: caulked, 166-169: plywood, 163; strip-built, 162-163; teak, 166-169; tongue-and-groove, 161-162 Deck shelf, 153 Defender Industries, Inc., 36 Developable-surface hull, 5, 149 Diagonal planking, 152 Diagonals, 67. 69. 78-80 Double planking. 143-144 Dowels, 96. 209 Drawers, 186 Drills, 16-17 Duck Trap Woodworking, 61 Duraply. 28-29. 183 Dynel. 35 Edson Corp.. The. 212 Electrical systems, 221 Electrolysis, 48-49 Elmer’s glues, 64, 65. 186 Engine: bed, 129; connections, controls. 219-220; stringers, vibration, 218 Epoxy resins, 36, 64. 147-148. Evrrdur. 47
220: 128: 165
Fairing: of diagonals. 79-80: of lines. 76-77; computer-aided. 87. 99. .%Y nlso Battens Fastening materials: brass. 47: bronzr. 47; copper. 48; galvanized iron, 46-47: stainless steel, 48 Fastenings: in double planking, 143. 144: drilling for, 52-54: interior, 186: plank, 137-138 Frrrocement hulls, 44 Fiberglass cloth, 37, 165 Fiberglass hulls. 9. 36-37, 39-41. 89 Fiberglass insulation. I89 Fiberglass sheathing, 35-36 Fillers. 36. 168 Fin keels, 104 Fir, Douglas, 22 Fir plywood, 28 Flat-bottomed hulls. 2-3. 71. 103. 108 Floor timbers, 123-124 Florida Marine Tanks. Inc.. 213 Foam core, 39 Formica, 28, 183 Frames. 88: bending. 119-123: coldfitted. 120-123: steaming, 119: transvrrse. 117. v-bottomed 96-97 Framing. 3-5
237
238
INDEX
Fuel hose lines, 220 Fuel tanks, 212-213 Fuller, W.L.. Inc., 54 Galvanic corrosion, 43. 48-50. 63 Galvanic series, 49 Carboard, 134- I35 Gel coat, 37 Glue: batten seam, 144; Elmer’s 64. 65, 186: resorcinol, 64. 147-148 Gluing: plywood planking. 149: spars, 201-202. See also Laminatton Cougeon Brothers, Inc., 32, 65, 150
Coufyon
Rrothm
m
Rtrnl
Comtruc-
151 Graphite fibers. 44 Grids: for inverted hull construction, 109: for offsets, 73-74: for transom plan, 81 Gripe, 105 Guzzwell. John, 151 Il’on.
Thf~,
Hackmatack, 25 Half beams. 157-158 Half-breadth plan, 93-95 Half-model, 69 Hanging knees, 158-159 Ilarbor Sales Company, 29. 30, 65 Harra. John, Wood & Supply ComIIilIlyq 32 Hatches: cabin sole, 188.189: [let-k, 176-179: flush, 179: sliding, 175.176 Headers, I57 Headliners, 189 Herreshoff & Kerwin. Inc.. 87 Horn timber, 105 Hull design, 2-5 Hull lines (terminology), 7. 66-69 Hull painting, 141 Hull repairs, 39 IHydraulic engine controls, 220 Hydraulic steering, 212 I-lynautic, Inc., 212, 220 Icebox, 189-191 Independent Nail Insulation. 189
I12
Laminated beams, 157 Laminated planking, 150-151. 152 Lamination: of fiberglass hull. 37; of stem assembly, 92; of wood, 31-32 Lapstrake planking, 108, 141-143 Larch, 25 Lauan. 24 Lead keels. 195, 196-197 Letcher. John, 87 Lexan, I78 Lines, hull (terminology), 66-69 Lodging knees, 158 Lofting: computer-aided, 99: of body plan. 77-79; of half-breadth plan, 76-77: of long lines of profile, 76-77: of transoms. 81-87, preparations for, 72-74; tools for, 72-73 Logan Lumber Company, 32 Lumber: drying, 21: sawing, 17-18. 21; seasoning, 18-Z 1; shrinkage, 2I: sources, 32-33 Mack-Shaw Sailmakers, Inc., 206 Mahogany: African, 24; Honduras, Mexican, 24; Philippine, 24 Marconi rig. 204
Mnrirw Iksign
46, 58
24;
Mtrnunl. 37
Mar-Quipt, Inc., 225 Masonite, 186 Mast partners, I58 Mast step, 204-205
Modrm Inc.,
Joinerwork: deck, 170- 181: interior. 182-191 Joints: mortise-.,nd-tenon, 107; 32, 105-106 scarphed. Juniper. 23 Keel blocks,
Keel Makers, 196- 197 Keels: cast iron, 195-196; fin, 104; lead, 195. 196-197; powerboat, 103-104: rabbeted, IO3 Kenyon Marine, 205 Krvlar, 36, 44 Kit boats. 9 Klegecel foam core, 41 Knees, 105; hanging, 158-159; lodging, 158: quarter, 154-156 Kobelt Manufacturing Co., Ltd., 220 Kristal Kraft. Inc., 65
Woo&n
Ydrt
Carrstructiotl,
151 Mold construction 88-92 Mold loft, 72 Molds: for cast fittings, 193-194; for fiberglass hulls, 36-37; for keels, 195-197; for strip-planked hulls, 148 Monel fastenings, 48. 50, 58, 62 Monel tanks, 212 Monkey rail, 175
INDEX Morse
controls,
220
Quarter
Motor Boating B Sailing,
Nails: copper, 55-56. 60; galvanized, 47, 57: threaded, 57-59
National
Fisherman,
Nomex honeycomb, Non-skid sole, 189 Oak: red, 22; white, Offsets, 69-72. 78
knees.
154-156
10
9. 32 44
22
Painting: of deck joinerwork. 171: of hull, 141 Paints: anti-fouling. 225; Pxterior. 225; interior, I83 Panish Transdyne. 220 Patterns, casting: for fittings, 192-195, for keels, 195-197 Pick-up sticks, 78 Pinr: longleaf. 22-23; Oregon, 22; white, 23; yellow, 22-23 Pipe Wcldcrs. Inc.. 225 Planking: batten scam, 144. 146; carvel. 130-140; double. 143-144; laminated, 150-152: lapstrakc*, 111-1-13: plywood, 149-150; strip, 146-149: transom, 100-101 Planking dimensions. 132: thickness drducrion. #Y-Y0 Planking scale. 136. I37 Planksherr. I66 Plugs. wood. 53-5-l Plumbing, 223 Plywood: bending, 30-31; cutting. :iO: grading, 28-29: laminating, 31-32; panel sizes, 29 Plywood decks, I63 Plywood interior structures, 182-183 Plywood planking, 149-150 Polybutylenr tubing, 223 Polypropylrnr cloth, 35, 36 Polyurethane coatii:g, 17 I Polyvinyl chlnricle (PVC) pipes, 223 Powerboat construction: clamp, 158: rngine beds. 129: keels, 103-104: rudders. 206-207: shelf, 158; transom. 85-87: twin-screw, 218 Preservatives, wood, 34. 141 Profile plans. 77. 92 Propeller shafts, 213-219 Pulley drives, calculating, 21Y Push-pull cables, 220 PVC pipes, 223
Rabbet, 77, 78. 92. 103 Refrigerator. SIT Icebox Resorcinol glue, 64. 147-148 Reverse curves. 122. 151 Rhodes, Philip, 149. 201 Ribbands. 88. 109. 1 IO. 112-l I6 Ribs, 117 Riveting, 62-63 Rivets: copper. 55-56, 143: “pop.” 62-63 Rot prevention, 33-34 Round-bottomed hulls, 2-3; bilge stringers. 125: frames, 88. 118; lines, 71; planking, 38 Rudder fittings. 208 Rudders: outboard. 207-208; powerboat, 206-207: sheathed. 211
Rules for Building und Clossiq forced Plastic C’css&. 26
RGn-
Safety: davit design for, 225: features, 227; product testing for. 229: regulations, 228
Sn fbt,y Starndri rds /or lkck yn rd Bon t Buildm. 228 Safety Stnndarrls for Snr~ll Crcr/t. 228 Sail track, 204 Sandwich (fiberglass hull) construction. 36. 38.39 Scantlings (trrminolcqy). 34 Scarphs. 105.106. 147. 184. 199 Schaefer Spars, 206 Srrews. 16-17, 51-55: galvanized, 47: lag, 55; machine, 61: stainless sreel. 54-55 Scribing of waterline, 226 Scuppers. 174, 176. 179 Sea cocks, 223 Sealers, 28, 168 Sea rails, 184 Scats. cockpit. 179-l HO Sections: bocly plan, 67. 77-78: slrm. 94 Seemann Plastics, Inc.. 37 Self-bailing cockpits, 179 Shaft logs, 103-104. 215 Sheathing: copper. 104; fibc=rglass. 35-36 Sheer clamp, 126-128 Sheer guards, 180- 182 Sheerline. 76-77 Shelves. 153-156 Sole: cabin. 188-189: cockpit, 179
239
240
INDEX
Spars, aluminum, 205-206 Spars, wooden, 198-204; hollow rectangular, 200-201, hollow round, 201-202 Spiling. 133-13’ Spiling frames, 135 Spinnaker poles, 20 l-202 Splines. 103 Spruce: northern white, 24; Sitka, 24, 198. 199 Stanley tools, 15-16 Star class sloop, 2 Stations, 78, 83 Stealer planks, 137 Steam box, 119-120 Steel hull construction, 9. 42-43 Steering controls, 211-212 Stem assembly, 92-95 Sternpost, 104 Stopwaters, 96, 105 Stringers, 124-128 Strip-planked hulls, setting up, 108 Strip planking, 146-149 Stronghold nails, 52, 58-59 Stuffing box, 211, 215, 217 Synthetic fabrics, 35-36 Table of offsets. 73 Tamarack. 25 Tangile. 24 Tangs, 204 Tank rapacity, calculating. 213 Tanks, fresh water. 222 Tanks, fuel, 212-213 Teak, 25, 168-169 Teleflex, Inc.. 220 Templates, 67; for bulkheads, 185; for stem assembly, 92-95; for spinnaker pole, 202 Tenons, 107 Thiokol sealers. 168. I69 Tie rods. 158. 206 Tillers, 2 I 1 Toe rails, 166, 174 Tools: caulking, 139: hand, 15-17: lofting, 72-73; power, 17-18; sourres. 18
Torin, 41 Transom. connections to, 154-156 Transom, construction of. 99-101 Transom, lofting of: curved, 82-83: flat, 81-82: powerboat, 85-87; raked, 81 Tremont Nail Co.. 61 Tributyl tin oxide (TBTO). 34 Twin keelsons. 103 Underwriter’s LaGoratories (UL). 229 “Unipoxy” glue. 65 U.S. Coast Guard regulations: for passenger-carrying boats. 14; safety, 228 U.S. Coast Guard standards: for electrical installations. 221: tanks, 212 Varnishing, 170-171. 182. 201 V-bottomed hulls. 2-3: clamps, 128: floors, 123; frames, 88. 96. 117-118; lines, 72; planking, 38: seam batten construction. 144; setting up, 108 Veneers, 28 Ventilation, 187- 188. 223-224 Watrrlines. 67. 76. 80. 225-226 Water trap box, 223 WEST System (Wood Epoxy Saturation Technique), 150 Wheel, steering, 2 12 Wicking, 105. 138 Wiley. Ralph, 148 Wire rigging, 204 Wood: A Manual FOT Its list ds A
Shiphui!di?lg
Matcmal,
25
Wood: comparative strengths, 26; design stresses, 26-27; species for boatbuilding. 22-25 Woodcraft Supply Corp., 65
WoodrnRoat, Wood
finishes,
32 interior.
Wood Ilnndh~ol~. Wood
screws,
Zinc plating.
16.17. 46-47
182.813
26 51-55
